User Guide

Version 4.0
© 2003-2011 subx, inc. All rights reserved.
Quantrix® Modeler Version 4.0User Guide.
This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms
of such license. The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be
construed as a commitment by subx, inc. subx, inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
book.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form
or by any means electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of subx, inc.
Any references to company names in sample templates are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual
organization.
Quantrix, the Quantrix logo, and Quantrix Modeler are trademarks of subx, inc. Unauthorized duplication is a violation of applicable law.
subx, inc., 428 Fore Street, Portland, Maine 04101, USA
“Excel”, “Vista”, and “Word” are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The names of other actual companies and products
mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
Notice for U.S. government end-users or persons acquiring the software and documentation on behalf of the U.S. Government, to which the
following provisions apply: The U.S. Government acknowledges that the software and documentation were developed at private expense
and no part of them is in the public domain. The software and documentation are “commercial items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.
§2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48
C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as
applicable, the commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government
end-users (A) only as commercial items and (B) with only those rights as are granted to all other end-users pursuant to the terms and condi-
tions set for the standard commercial agreement for this software. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United
States.
 Table of Contents i

Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
To the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Conventions Used in this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Special Fonts and Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Choosing > From > Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Dragging Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Installing and Updating Quantrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Activating Quantrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Automatically Checking for Updates to Quantrix . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Version 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Other Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
www.quantrix.com. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
Electronic User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
Quantrix Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Sample Models and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Getting Oriented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Changing the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Adding an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Adding a Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adding a Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Displaying the Entire Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Filtering a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Creating a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Printing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Where to Go from Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 2: Learning the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About Matrices and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About Categories, Items, and Item Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Comparing Models and Spreadsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Working in the Model Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

ii Table of Contents

About the Tool Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Using the Title Bar and Window Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the Model and Format Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Customizing the Tool Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the Model Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
About Modeling Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using the Formula Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Auto Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Organizing Model Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Moving Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Detach / Attach Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Saving Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Perspectives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Saving a Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
About the Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
About the Table View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
About the Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Managing Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Opening the Quantrix Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating New Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Opening Existing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
File In Use Detection and Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Opening Recently Viewed Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Saving Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Renaming Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Saving in XML: the XMODEL File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Saving as a Template: the MODELT File Format . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Recently Opened Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting International Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Choosing Units of Measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Choosing Currency Symbol and Separators . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting Print Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setting Proxy Server Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting Automatic Update Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting Launch Panel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting Undo Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting Maximum Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting A Default Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting Database Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Table of Contents iii

Adding and Removing JDBC Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Overview of the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Defining the Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Defining and Building the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Understanding Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Defining the Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Creating the Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Creating the Calculation Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating an Assumptions Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adding Q1 Sales and Quarterly Growth Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Constructing General Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Constructing a Quarterly Growth Formula . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Constructing a Yearly Growth Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Deriving the Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Answering the Revenue Question. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adding Price Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Calculating the Revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Estimating Expenses and Gross Profit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Calculating Cost of Goods Sold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Calculating Gross Profit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Improving the Clarity of the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
About Operating Expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Creating a Profit and Loss Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Building the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adding P&L Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sharing the Answers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Preparing Model Excerpts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Preparing the Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Presenting the Canvas in a Word Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Exporting the Model to a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 4: Working with Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

About Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Understanding Item Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Naming Structural Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using Matrices and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adding Matrices and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Renaming Matrices and Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Deleting Matrices and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Copying and Pasting Matrices and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Creating Views from Canvas Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Renaming Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Deleting Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Copying and Pasting Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

iv Table of Contents

Moving Categories to Change the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Filtering Based on Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Using Linked Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating Linked Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Link Existing Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Deleting Linked Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Removing a Category Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Synchronize Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Category Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Using Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Renaming Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Automatic Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Deleting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Copying and Pasting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Re-ordering Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Formatting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Item Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Collapsing and Expanding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Collapse Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Expand Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Hide Empty Rows or Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using Summary Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Creating Summary Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Deleting Summary Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using Item Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Creating Item Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setting Item Descriptor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Formatting Item Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Showing / Hiding Item Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Deleting Item Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using Item Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Creating an Item Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Adding Items to an Item Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Ungroup Grouped Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Deleting Item Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Comparing Item Groups and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 5: Working with Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

About Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Identifying Calculated and Input Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Overriding Values in Calculated Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using the Cell Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting All Cells in a Matrix or View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting Cells by Item or Item Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Selecting Cells by Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Selecting a Structural Subset of Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Selecting an Arbitrary Range of Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Table of Contents v

Moving Between Cells and Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Entering Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Entering Dates and Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Entering Percentages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Entering Fractions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Entering Text Strings and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Surrounding Special Characters with Single Quotes . . . . . . 156
Using the Equal Sign (=) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Using the ESCAPE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
About Multiple Number Signs (####) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Constrained Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Undo and Redo Edits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Deleting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Find and Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Copying and Pasting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Copy/ Paste Uses Cell Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Sorting and Filtering Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Sorting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Filtering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 6: Working with Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

About Quantrix Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Understanding General and Cell-Specific Formulas . . . . . . . . . 166
Formula Syntax Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Managing Formula Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Inserting a New Formula Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Editing Formula Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Deleting Formula Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Reordering Formula Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Formulas, Functions, and Comments to Formula Fields . . . 171
Using the Formula Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Specifying Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adding Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Adding Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Using Mathematical Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Circular References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Empty Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Using Different Types of Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Constant Value Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Constrained Formulas Using In and Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using the Insert Skips Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Recurrence Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Soft Recurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Intermatrix Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Intermodel Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Updating Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

vi Table of Contents

Index Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Summary Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Using/As Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Using Item Names and Positions in Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adding Functions to a Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Library of Quantrix Functions and Sample Models . . . . . . . . . . 189
Select Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Understanding and Controlling Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Calculation Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Calculation Time Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
When Automatic Recalculations Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Toggling Automatic Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Performing a Manual Recalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Formula Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Eclipse Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Size Mismatch Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Troubleshooting Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Using the Dependency Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Expression Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Embedded Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 7: Formatting a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

About the Formatting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Format Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Format Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Customizing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Aligning Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Formatting Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Using the Number Format Drop-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing Precision and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Using Scientific Notation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Formatting Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Formatting Negative Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Formatting Percentages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Formatting Fractions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Formatting Dates and Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Formatting Special Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Creating Custom Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Custom Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Using Extended Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Customizing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Adding Colors to Items and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using Conditional Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Table of Contents vii

Column Width and Row Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Changing Column Width and Row Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Automatic Resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Setting Column Width and Row Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Setting the Financial Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Using the Outline Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hiding the Default Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Clear All Cell Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Chapter 8: Charting a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

About Chart Views and Charting Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Charting Table and Category Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Format Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Understanding Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Creating and Managing Chart Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Creating a Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Creating Views from Canvas Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Opening and Closing a Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Renaming a Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting a Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Common Chart Formatting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Setting the Chart Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Specifying Chart Data Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Choosing the Data Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Moving the Data Series to a Different Axis . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Reordering Data Along an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Excluding Data from a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Enhancing the Chart Data Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Setting a Chart Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Manipulating the Chart Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Adding Data Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Choosing Graphical Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Customizing Fonts, Colors, Grids, and Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Changing the Chart Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Changing Font Face, Size, and Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Changing Font and Axis Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Showing and Hiding Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Customizing a Data Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Details on 2D Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Details on 3D Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
General Chart Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
2D Chart Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Statistical Options in 2D Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3D Chart Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Chart Series Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Set Default Series Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Chart Axis Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Chart Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

viii Table of Contents

Creating a Chart Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Using Chart Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Chart Grid Rows and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Drill-down on Chart Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Expand a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Formatting a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Scaling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chart Grid Data Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Manipulating the Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Setting Page Breaks in a Chart Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Chapter 9: Presenting a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

About the Presentation Canvas and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Presentation Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Creating and Managing Presentation Canvases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Creating a Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Opening and Closing a Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Renaming a Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Deleting a Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding Table and Chart Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Adding Table Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Adding Chart Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Interacting with a Canvas Table View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Interacting with a Canvas Chart View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Interacting with a Canvas Chart Table View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Interacting with Linked Categories on the Canvas . . . . . . . . . . 275
Snapping Table Views Together. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Text Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Objects that Control Value of Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Connecting Sliders to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Connecting Drop Down Menus to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . 283
Connecting a Toggle Switch to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Connecting Radio Buttons to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Connecting Checkboxes to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Adding Objects that Show Status of Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Connecting a Dial Gauge to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Connecting a Thermometer to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Connecting a Status Light to Cell Values . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Connecting Annotations to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Adding Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Adding Images from Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Changing Colors and Styles of Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing Fill Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing Line Colors and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Using Expressions in Presentation Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Table of Contents ix

Interact with Canvas Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Layout Canvas Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Resizing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Copying Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Deleting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Rotating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Group and Ungroup Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Viewing the Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Using the Drawing Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Showing and Hiding the Drawing Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Changing the Size of the Drawing Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Drawing Grid Nudge Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Using Snaps to Align Canvas Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Chapter 10: Printing a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

About Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Previewing Model Components Before Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Printing Using Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Printing Multiple Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Changing Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Including and Excluding Tables, Formulas, and Charts . . . . . . . . 307
Changing the Page Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Printing One or All Variations of a Filtered Table . . . . . . . . . . 311
Changing the Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Adding Column and Row Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Using Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Adding and Deleting Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Customizing Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Using Page Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Setting Page Breaks in a Table View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Removing Page Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Page Breaks in the Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Setting Page Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Chapter 11: Sharing a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

About Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Obtaining Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Opening Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Using Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Upgrading Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Managing Quantrix Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Displaying Models in Other Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Pasting a Model into Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Exporting to Different File Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Exporting to a Microsoft Excel® Document (.xls). . . . . . . . . . . 325
Exporting to a Web (.html) Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Exporting to a Delimited Text File (.CSV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

x Table of Contents

Chapter 12: Integrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

DataLink Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Configuring DataLink Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Using SQL Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Using SQL Expert Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Scrollable Emulation Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Using a Microsoft Excel File as a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Using XML Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Web Services / SOAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Using Delimited Text Files / CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Using Fixed Width Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Using Other Matrices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Configuring DataLink Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Configuring Multi Dimensional Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Configuring Two Dimensional Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Updating Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Editing the DataLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Updating One Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Updating All Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Deleting a DataLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
DataLink Drill Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Chapter 13: Advanced Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

Protecting a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Managing Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Deleting Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Switching Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Edit Structure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Edit Presentation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Allow Interaction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Turning Off Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Audit Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Inspecting Structure and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Inspecting Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Quantrix Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Installing a Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Removing a Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Developing a Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Importing External Legacy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Supported File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Appendix A: Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
File Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Selection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 xi

Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Appendix B: Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
About Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Alphabetical Summary of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

xii

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Introduction

Introduction

To the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

Conventions Used in this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Installing and Updating Quantrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Version 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Other Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii

This chapter introduces the User Guide and includes information on

installing and updating Quantrix.
xiv Introduction

To the Reader
Welcome to the Quantrix Modeler User Guide. This guide is written for people
who are familiar with personal computers, and who have experience using a
traditional 2D spreadsheet program.
This guide helps you become proficient with Quantrix in two ways:
• Chapters 1-3 introduce you to concepts, interaction techniques, and
modeling methodologies that are unique to Quantrix.
• Chapters 4-13 and the appendices provide the detailed reference
information that you will need as you build your own models.
The fastest way to become comfortable and efficient with Quantrix, is to
work through the first three chapters. As your experience grows, you will
use the detailed information that is available in the rest of this guide.

Conventions Used in this Guide

To make its information easier to understand, this guide uses a standard set
of typographical styles and icons.

Icons
This guide uses six alert icons:

Note: Notes expand on the topic at hand or emphasize the importance

of a particular detail.

Caution: Cautions alert you when taking a particular action (or failing
to do so) could yield an unexpected result.

Tip: Tips provide shortcuts or pointers that often help you accomplish a
task more quickly.

Professional Edition: Indicates that the feature is only avail-

able in Quantrix Modeler Professional Edition.

New: Indicates that the feature is new in the latest version of Quantrix
Modeler.

Mac OS X: Indicates an action that is different for Mac OS X users.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Introduction xv

Special Fonts and Characters

When this guide refers to different parts of Quantrix, instructs you to take
specific actions, or defines a new term, it uses the fonts and characters
shown in this table.

Table ii-1. Typographical conventions

Information Convention and Example

menu choices Choose Edit > Cut

The Model Browser contains the
labels that Quantrix displays
Sales Projections matrix
text that you type Type Year1
keyboard keys that you press Press ENTER
text that Quantrix displays Profit = Income - Expense
new terms The area above the table is the filter tray
names of files Double-click mymodel.model

Choosing > From > Menus

This guide instructs you to choose from menus using the format “Choose
File > Open”, where File is the menu name and Open is a command that
it contains. When you need to choose from a rollover menu, this guide uses
this format: “Choose Insert > Summary Item > Sum.”

Dragging Objects
This guide often instructs you to drag an object, for example, “Drag the
category tile into the filter tray.” In this example, drag is shorthand for
“Position your cursor over the handle of the category tile, press and hold
down the left mouse button, move the category tile into the filter tray, and
then release the mouse button.”

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

xvi Introduction

Installing and Updating Quantrix

If you purchased a boxed copy of Quantrix, you will find installation
instructions and your serial number in the box. If you downloaded your
copy from the Quantrix web site, you will receive installation instructions
and your serial number via email. To install Quantrix, follow the written and
on-screen instructions.

Activating Quantrix
You typically activate Quantrix as the last step of the installation process. It
is possible to install Quantrix but not perform this final step, where you
provide your copy’s serial number either over the internet or by telephone.
If you completed the installation but did not yet activate Quantrix, you can
activate it by choosing Help > Activate Quantrix and then following the
on-screen instructions.

Note: If you are running Microsoft Vista® or Windows 7, and

Quantrix appears to activate successfully but then asks to activate again the
next time Quantrix is launched, follow these steps:

1. Navigate to the Quantrix installation directory, c:\program

files\quantrix modeler
2. Right-click on Quantrix Modeler.exe
3. Choose Run as Administrator to launch Quantrix in administrator
mode
4. Choose Help > Activate Quantrix

Automatically Checking for Updates to

Quantrix
You can instruct Quantrix to use your internet connection to automatically
check for and install updated versions. When you turn on this option,
Quantrix checks for updates each time you exit Quantrix; it never attempts
to perform an update while you are editing Quantrix models. For details, see
“Setting Automatic Update Options” on page 66.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Introduction xvii

Version 4.0
Quantrix 4.0 offers three new major pieces of functionality.
Quantrix Qloud
With Quantrix 4, we are introducing a new thin client viewer application
and server component called the Quantrix Qloud. Now, you will be able to
upload Quantrix files to the Qloud server and share your models with select
individuals or make a public link available that anyone can access.
Scripting
Quantrix 4 also introduces scripting into the Quantrix Modeling environ-
ment. Scripting allows sophisticated users to author small programs that will
run within the context of a model.
New Calculation Strategy
Quantrix 4 implements calculation engine changes to decrease calculation
time and memory utilization while at the same time lay the groundwork for
a multi-threaded calculation process in a future Quantrix release. We are
very encouraged with the results from internal testing and external
customers. Calculation time improvements in the range of 25% to 80% are
being reported.

4.0 Documentation
Quantrix is currently working on integration of the 4.0 functionality changes
into the Quantrix User Guide. A future release of Quantrix Modeler will
include an updated help system.
The 4.0 changes are currently documented in the 4.0 User Guide PDF
Addendum found on the Products > Downloads > Documentation
section of Quantrix.com.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

xviii Introduction

Other Resources
Our team is committed to providing the best possible resources to ensure
your satisfaction with Quantrix.

www.quantrix.com
The Quantrix web site provides both sales and support information. It
includes:
• live support chat
• product information and announcements
• downloadable updates and upgrades
• user forums where you can share experiences and ideas with other
Quantrix users
• answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs)
• a knowledge base of “Modeler Note” articles
• online tutorials for specific topics
• other contact information so you can reach us when you need us
The site is updated frequently, so be sure to visit often.

Electronic User Guide

This entire guide is available in electronic format from the Quantrix Help
menu. To use it, follow these steps:
Choose Help > Contents in the navigation pane, click a folder or bullet to see
its contents, or click the plus sign next to a folder to see its subtopics.
Quantrix displays the content in the content pane.
Choose Help > Index in the navigation pane to see the full index. Click an
entry, and Quantrix displays the content in the content pane.
Choose Help > Search in the navigation pane to see a search field. Type
search terms and then press ENTER; Quantrix displays the search results in
the navigation pane. Click a result to see its content in the content pane.
Navigate to additional information in one of these ways:
• Click a link within the body of the content.
• Click the Previous and Next links at the top of the content pane
to see the content that logically precedes or follows the content
that is currently displayed.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Introduction xix

• Click the Back and Forward buttons above the navigation pane
to navigate between content that you have recently viewed.
• Print the content that is displayed in the content pane by clicking
the Print button above the navigation pane.
If preferred, you can download the latest version of this guide in PDF
format at www.quantrix.com/User_Guides.htm.

Tip: A PDF version of the User Guide can be found in the Quantrix
Modeler directory of your computer if the application is installed from a
CD.

Quantrix Tips
In the Learn section of the Quantrix Launch Panel, there is an option called
Quick Tips. Selecting this item opens a Quantrix Quick Tips window.
This window highlights the elements that distinguish Quantrix Modeler
from the traditional two-dimensional spreadsheet. Select one of the five
icons located along the top of the window to learn more about the key
elements of Quantrix.
You can bring up the Quantrix Tips window at any time by choosing Help
> Quick Tips.

Sample Models and Templates

Your copy of Quantrix came with several sample models and templates.
You use some of the models in order to complete your test drive in Chapter
1. There is also a set of models that illustrate how to use each function.
To access the sample models, choose Help > Sample Models or select
Sample Models... from the Open section of the Quantrix Modeler
Launch Panel. Be sure to make a copy of a sample model file before you
change it so it is always available to you in its original form.
Choose File > New to access a list of Quantrix templates. For more infor-
mation about using and creating templates, see “Creating New Models” on
page 57 and “Saving as a Template: the MODELT File Format” on page 61.

Customer Support
To contact the Quantrix customer support team, email
[email protected] or call 1-207-775-0808.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

xx Introduction

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model

Chapter 1
Test Driving a Model

Getting Oriented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Changing the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Adding an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Adding a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adding a Formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Displaying the Entire Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Changing Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Filtering a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Creating a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Printing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

The fastest way to experience the unique capabilities of Quantrix is to

work with an existing model. In this chapter you will become acquainted
with the elements and interactivity of Quantrix as you edit a model,
create an informative chart, and then print it out.
 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
2
Getting Oriented

Getting Oriented
To begin your test drive, follow these steps:
1. Start Quantrix in one of these ways:
• Double-click the Quantrix Modeler icon ( ); depending on the
preferences that you chose during installation, it may be on your
desktop, applications folder or in a local directory.
• Choose All Programs > Quantrix > Quantrix Modeler.
2. The Quantrix Modeler Launch Panel opens as shown below.
Choose Sample Models... from the Open section of the panel.

3. Open the Forecasts.model file double-clicking Forecasts.model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
3
Getting Oriented

You see this model window:

modeling
matrix

table

item

category tile

formula
editor

mode indicator cursor focus indicator

Within the model window, you see one modeling matrix tab named Sales
Projections. The modeling matrix includes several elements.
• A table that contains rows and columns of labeled cells is located in
the upper left-hand corner.
• Two category tiles, labeled Product and Quarter, are located below the
table in the row tray; a third category tile, labeled Year, is located to
the right of the table in the column tray. Each category tile has a text
label that you can edit and a grey handle that you use to reposition it.
• The formula editor, located below the Product category tile, contains
three formulas that calculate the values presented in the table.
This model forecasts the sales of Widgets, Gadgets, and Gizmos over a 2-
year period. Each year includes unit sales for each of four quarters, plus a
running Year-to-Date total.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
4
Changing the Layout

Before you use some of Quantrix’s unique features to modify and extend it,
save a copy of this model for yourself by following these steps:
1. Choose File > Save as...
2. In the directory browser, navigate to the directory in which you want
to save the file
3. In the File Name field, type MyForecasts.model, and then press
ENTER

Changing the Layout

To display the quarters as columns rather than rows, follow these steps:
1. Position your cursor over the grey handle of the Quarter category
tile, press your left mouse button, and then drag the tile across the
table. As you approach the Year tile, you see a shadow in the column
tray where you can place the Quarter tile:

2. Position the Quarter category tile directly below the Year tile, and
then release your mouse button. Now all of the quarters are laid out
as columns:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
5
Changing the Layout

You have just experienced one of Quantrix’s powerful capabilities: by

moving this category tile you instantly changed the layout without any possi-
bility of compromising the integrity of your model. This move did not affect
anything else in the model—its data, structure, and formulas remain the
same.
If needed, resize the model window so you can see all of the data for Year1
and Year2 by following these steps:
1. Position your cursor over the right-hand edge of the model window
so the cursor changes to a resize arrow ( )
2. Press and hold down your mouse button and drag the window to the
right
3. The matrix tab resizes automatically to fill the available space in the
model window

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
6
Adding an Item

Adding an Item
When you moved the Quarter category tile, several labeled rows became
labeled columns. Before the move, the labels (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and YTD)
appeared to reside in ordinary cells, just like the cells that contain data;
however, when you moved the tile, Quantrix handled the labels differently
than the other cells. This is because those labels are special entities called
items, and they belong to the Quarter category.
All models include categories, and each category has a set of items. In this
model you see:
• a Quarter category with five items: Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, YTD
• a Year category with two items: Year1, Year2
• a Product category with 3 items: Widget, Gadget, Gizmo

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
7
Adding an Item

Now you will extend this model by adding a third year. To add this new
item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item labeled Year2
2. In the standard toolbar at the top of your model window, click the
Insert Item button ( )

Tip: As a shortcut to clicking the Insert Item button, you can press
ENTER.

Quantrix adds the new item, names it Year3, and automatically displays the
corresponding set of Quarter items.

Quantrix also scrolls your model so you can see the new item.
To see the entire model, maximize the model window by clicking the
maximize icon in its upper right corner.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
8
Adding a Category

Adding a Category
Categories are powerful tools for organizing and manipulating logical collec-
tions of items. They also offer a great deal of flexibility as you plan and build
your model. It is not unusual to invest significant time working on a model,
and then realize that you are missing a critical dimension. In a traditional
spreadsheet application, this may mean that you have to start all over. With
Quantrix, often you just need to add a new category.
Now you will extend the model so you can divide your sales by region. To
add a new category called Region, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the Product category tile, and then press ENTER.
Quantrix adds a new category tile (labeled A) in this example and one
new item (labeled A1) for each Product item.

2. Name the new category by clicking the letter A in its category tile,
typing Region, and then pressing ENTER.
3. Name the first item in this category by clicking A1 next to Widget,
typing North, and then pressing ENTER. Notice that this changes
the names of all A1 items to North.
4. Add three more items to this category by clicking to select North,
and then pressing ENTER three times.
5. Rename the new items South, East, and West.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
9
Adding a Category

Your model should look like this:

Note: If your model doesn’t look like the figure above, choose Help >
Sample Models and open the file named Forecasts2.model. Save a copy of
this new file as MyForecasts.model.

6. Change the layout to more easily view the data by region. Drag the
Region category tile to the left of the Product tile to make your
model look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
10
Entering Data

Entering Data
When you added the Region category, Quantrix added two types of corre-
sponding cells:
• input cells into which you manually enter data
• calculated cells whose values are calculated by Quantrix
Look closely at the table in the Sales Projections tab. Notice that the new
Q1 cells are empty, and the rest of the new cells contain the calculated value
of zero (0). Once you enter data into the input value cells of Q1, Quantrix’s
formulas will use that data to calculate values for the rest of the cells.

Tip: You can visually distinguish between input and calculated cells by
choosing View > Show Input Cells. Quantrix adds a small green flag to
the upper right-hand corner of all input cells.

To add Q1 data, follow these steps:

1. Click to select the Q1:Widget cell for the South region, type 750,
and then press ENTER. Quantrix calculates Widget sales for this
region out through Year3, and is ready to accept data in the Q1:
Gadget cell for the South region.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
11
Entering Data

2. Continue entering Q1 data as follows:

South Gadget 800

South Gizmo 675
East Widget 1400
East Gadget 1300
East Gizmo 1575
West Widget 500
West Gadget 475
West Gizmo 435

Your model should look like this:

Your initial data set is complete and the model is projecting sales over a
three-year period.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
12
Adding a Formula

Adding a Formula
To better understand total sales by region, add a formula that calculates
product totals by following these steps:
1. Click to select the Product category tile.
2. Choose Insert > Summary Item > Sum. Quantrix creates a new
item labeled Sum of Product below each Gizmo item, and calculates
product totals for Q1 - Q4 and YTD.
The model should look like this:

3. Rename Sum of Product by clicking to select it, typing Total, and

then pressing ENTER. The tiny icon ( ) next to Total indicates that
it is a summary item, and that it contains the sum of the other items
in its category.
4. Reformat the numbers using the buttons that are in the format
toolbar at the top of the model window.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
13
Adding a Formula

Drag to select all four regions, click the Currency button ( ) once,
and then click the Decrease Decimal button ( ) twice to remove
all of the decimal places.
When you added the summary item, Quantrix added a formula to the
model. The formula editor now displays the four formulas that your model
uses:

Formulas 1 and 2 are standard formulas that you explicitly create, while
formulas 3 and 4 are summary formulas that Quantrix generates automatically
when you add a summary item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
14
Adding a Formula

Formula 4 calculates your product totals; click to select it:

Quantrix highlights all of the cells whose values formula 4 calculates. Click
the other formulas to see which cells they calculate.

Note: For step-by-step instructions on constructing simple formulas,

see “Adding Data and Constructing Formulas” on page 82; for detailed
reference information see Chapter 6.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
15
Displaying the Entire Model

Displaying the Entire Model

While you are focused on the formula editor, take a close look at formula 1:
Quarter[THIS]=Quarter[PREV]*Assumptions::Rate
The formula references Assumptions and Rate—two elements that you
haven’t yet encountered in your model. Up to this point you have been
working with only the Sales Projections matrix; these other elements are
located in another modeling matrix.

Note: Formulas that reference other matrices are called intermatrix

formulas. For details, see “Intermatrix Formulas” on page 181.

To display a list of all of the matrices that comprise this model, click the
Show Model Browser button ( ).

You see this tab:

The Model Browser shows that your model has two matrices: Sales
Projections and Assumptions.
Click the arrow portion of the Show Model Browser button ( ) to
access this list in a drop-down menu. For more details, see “Using the
Model Browser” on page 38.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
16
Displaying the Entire Model

Double-click the Assumptions matrix icon ( ) to see its tab. Quantrix

opens the Assumptions matrix in the work area and brings it to the front.

Click and drag the Assumptions tab toward the right, you will see the black
outline of a vertical box.

Release the matrix and it will snap into place in the outlined region. In this
way, Quantrix allows you to view two matrices at once.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
17
Displaying the Entire Model

You can adjust the width of each matrix tab, to show more or less of the
matrix, as shown here.

Positioning your cursor over a side of the matrix so it changes into a Resize
cursor ( ), and then drag to increase or decrease the size of the matrix. As
you resize a matrix, Quantrix automatically adjusts any adjacent matrices.

Each matrix contains a modular piece of your overall model. This provides
great flexibility, which you will now use to change an assumption.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
18
Changing Assumptions

Changing Assumptions
The formula in the Sales Projections matrix references the rate by its name
(Assumptions::Rate); when you change the value in this matrix, the
formula in the other matrix immediately reflects the change.
The model assumes a conservative growth rate of 2% for all products and
all regions. To change this assumption to allow for different growth rates in
each region, follow these steps:
1. In the Sales Projections matrix, click to select the Region category
tile.
2. Drag the Region category tile toward the row tray in the Assump-
tions matrix. When Quantrix shows a faint outline of the tile that you
are dragging in the row tray, release the mouse button.

Quantrix adds the category tile to the matrix, and changes the
Region tiles in both matrices to indicate that it is a linked category.

3. Assign the rates shown below to each region by clicking each cell,
typing a rate, and then pressing ENTER. If not already formatted as a
percent, be sure to include the percent sign (%) so Quantrix knows it
is a percentage value.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
19
Changing Assumptions

North 104%
South 101%
East 105%
West 102%

4. Look at the Sales Projections matrix to view the effect of this

change. Note that you didn’t have to edit either formula—Quantrix
automatically matched the value to the appropriate region.

Note: If your model doesn’t look like the figure above, choose File >
Open... and open the file named Forecasts3.model. Save a copy of this new file
as MyForecasts.model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
20
Filtering a Matrix

Filtering a Matrix
The Sales Projections matrix now contains all of the information that you
plan to share with the regional sales managers and the VP of sales. To focus
the discussion on annual regional performance, filter the matrix by
following these steps:
1. Drag the Product category tile to the grey area above the North
region; this area is called the filter tray.

When you place the tile in the filter tray, the products no longer
appear in the matrix. Instead you can view the data for each product
individually by choosing it from the new drop-down menu that is to
the right of the Product category tile.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
21
Filtering a Matrix

2. Drag the Quarter category tile to the filter tray, and place it to the
right of the Product tile.

3. To display the total product sales for each year, choose Total from
the Product drop-down menu and choose YTD from the Quarter
drop-down menu.
This filtered display contains the data that you want to share. Now you will
make it easier to understand by charting it.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
22
Creating a Chart

Creating a Chart
You can create charts from data contained in any Quantrix matrix. To create
a bar chart from your filtered Sales Projections matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click the Sales Projections tab to select it.
2. Click the Insert Chart View button ( ).

You see a new tab and a new object in the Model Browser labeled
Sales Projections - Chart1.

filter
tray

chart

legend

charting
table

Notice that Chart1 in the Model Browser has a unique icon ( ) and is
located directly below the Sales Projections matrix; this indicates that it is a
permanently linked chart view of that particular matrix. Any changes that you
make to data, structure, or logic in the Sales Projections matrix will affect
this chart. However, if you make any layout changes to the Sales Projection

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
23
Creating a Chart

matrix (such as moving a category tile from one layout tray to another),
those changes will not affect the chart.
As shown in the figure above, the chart view tab contains three distinct
areas: the chart, the chart legend and the charting table. Now you will use all of
these areas to change the layout and presentation of the chart.
This chart currently works well for the regional sales managers—it focuses
on growth for each region over a three year period. However, you want to
present it to the VP of sales, who is more interested in how total sales grow
over time.
1. On the chart, drag the Region category tile from the Points tray to
the Series tray, and then drag the Year category tile from the Series tray
to the Points tray.

2. To examine the performance of widgets only, in the charting table,

choose Widget from the Product drop-down menu, located in the
filter tray above the chart. The chart changes to show only that data.
Because your data is filtered by both Product (which contains 4
items) and Quarter (which contains 5 items), you can view 20 (4*5)
different charts in this way. Examine each product individually, and
then view product totals by choosing Total again.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
24
Creating a Chart

Tip: You can view all twenty chart variations simultaneously in Quantrix
Modeler Professional Edition by creating a Chart Grid. See “Chart Grid” on
page 257 for more information.

Note: You could add more categories to the filter tray, and then use the
drop-down menus to view even more charts. Because this model contains a
total of 240 items, you can generate and print up to 240 charts.

3. Finally, rearrange the order of the bars so they illustrate growth from
the lowest- to highest-performing regions.
• Position your cursor over the West label in the chart legend, and
drag it to the top of the legend. The first bar in each year now illus-
trates the data for the West region.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
25
Creating a Chart

• In the legend, drag South just below West, and then drag East
just below South.

Now you are ready to print your chart.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
26
Printing the Model

Printing the Model

You have several options for printing your model. For now, print only the
chart shown (filtered to show Product: Total and Quarter:YTD) by
following these steps:
1. Click to select the chart tab.
2. Choose File > Page Setup. You see this dialog box:

3. Adjust the options so Quantrix will print the chart in a landscape

orientation.
• Make sure the Print Chart checkbox contains a checkmark.
• Click to activate the Landscape radio button.
• Click OK.
4. Print the chart by clicking the Print button ( ), and then clicking
OK in the Print dialog box.
This creates a one-page printout.
You print modeling matrices the same way—by selecting a tab, choosing
options from the Page Setup dialog, and then clicking the Print button
( ).

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
27
Summary

Summary
This chapter introduced you to a number of unique concepts and
techniques that you will use as you begin building models.

Concepts
Quantrix understands and lets you independently manipulate four distinct
model aspects:
• the visual presentation of the model, including how it is oriented,
formatted, and laid out on the screen or printed page
• the structure or dimensions of your model, including categories and
items
• the data, including static and calculated values
• the logic, including formulas and functions that calculate the interac-
tions of your model’s structure and data
Quantrix stores your data in modeling matrices. Models will typically consist
of several matrices, some of which are linked together by intermatrix
formulas and linked categories.
Formulas are easily visible, and you construct them using meaningful natural
language syntax.
Quantrix includes a rich charting capability that lets you create a chart from
a particular matrix. The chart is permanently linked to that matrix, so if you
make subsequent changes to the matrix’s structure, logic, or data, Quantrix
automatically updates the chart. If you change the matrix’s presentation,
however, those changes will not affect the chart.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 1: Test Driving a Model
28
Summary

Techniques
Table 1-1 summarizes the techniques that you learned in this chapter.

Table 1-1. Changing one element of a model without changing the others

You changed
As you learned to:
the model’s:

• drag category tiles between the row, column, and filter trays
• use the drop-down menu in the filter tray to view one
product at a time
Presentation
• create a chart view of a matrix (by clicking the Insert Chart
View button), and then adjust its layout (by dragging
category tiles and legend items) to maximize its visual impact
• add a new item to the existing Year category (by selecting an
item and then pressing ENTER)
• add a new Region category (by selecting a category tile
located in the layout tray in which you want to add the new
Structure
category, and then pressing ENTER)
• link the Region category across two matrices (by selecting
the category tile, and dragging it into the layout tray of
another matrix)
• add data to input cells (by clicking a cell, typing a value, and
Data
then pressing ENTER)
Logic • add a new formula (by creating a summary item)

Where to Go from Here

To continue your introduction to Quantrix, first review and learn more
basics about interacting with Quantrix in Chapter 2, then work through
Chapter 3 to plan and build a sample model from scratch.
To experiment with sample models, choose Help > Sample Models.
For detailed reference information, see Chapters 4-13 and Appendices A
and B.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 2: Learning the Basics

Chapter 2
Learning the Basics

Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Working in the Model Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Managing Model Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

This chapter introduces you to the fundamental differences between

Quantrix and traditional spreadsheets. It discusses basic concepts and
teaches you how to interact with Quantrix’s tabs and tools.
 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
30
Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model

Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model

The key to solving any complex problem is to break it down into smaller
problems, solve each one completely, and then roll those solutions up into
one final answer. When you use this type of modular approach, your finan-
cial model is understandable, credible, and flexible. With a traditional
spreadsheet, your ability to craft modular solutions is limited to techniques
such as:
• using assumptions tables
• performing sets of calculations in hidden regions of a worksheet
• creating pivot tables
• using multiple linked worksheets
On their own, these techniques work well and result in accurate solutions.
Making changes to them can be cumbersome, but because you are solving
one manageable piece at a time, you can typically do so with high accuracy.
However, when you attempt to roll them up into an answer, you signifi-
cantly increase the level of complexity and probability of errors through the
use of the techniques listed above. In other words, you pay a price for your
well-intentioned efforts at modularity.
These rollups are difficult for one fundamental reason: the structure, logic,
and presentation of your model are dependent upon their relative physical
locations. Consider this scenario:
Your model consists of 1,476 formulas, 12 worksheets, and 2 pivot
tables. You need to add one more item to your list of products, which
moves the location of your Product Total cell from D12 to D13 in
Worksheet 2. Making this change affects 7 other worksheets and 1
pivot table, each of which you must update manually. When you forget
to update one of the worksheets, your model delivers erroneous results.
In this scenario, the physical location of cell D12 can make or break the
model. Even though you have carefully created a structure (a comprehensive
list of products that you add together to create a product total), robust logic
(formulas that use the product total in all the right places in the model), and
a communicative presentation (all of the products appear in a vertical list
and the total appears indented and at the bottom of the list), a simple
clerical error can undermine your work, and take hours to locate and
correct.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
31
Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model

Quantrix delivers the fundamental solution: it embraces modularity by

letting you explicitly create and change structure, logic, and presentation as
separate but related aspects. Because Quantrix understands their roles and
relationships, it can reliably and dynamically update one without disrupting
the others.

About Matrices and Tables

As you saw in Chapter 1, models usually require more than one modeling
matrix. Each matrix represents one table of data; Quantrix displays the table
at the top of the tab and the formula editor at the bottom. You can link one
matrix to another matrix, and you can operate on the contents of a matrix
by entering data, building formulas, or working with categories and items.
To learn how to work with the modeling matrix, see “About Modeling
Matrices” on page 42.

About Formulas
You use formulas to build the logic of your model. You can inspect all of
your formulas simultaneously in the formula editor, an editable list directly
below the table whose values the formulas calculate. You write the formulas
using a natural language syntax, and each formula typically calculates values
for a range of cells rather than an individual cell. “Using the Formula
Editor” on page 46 introduces you to working with the formula editor;
Chapter 6 provides detailed information on how to construct and diagnose
formulas.

About Categories, Items, and Item Groups

You use categories, items, and item groups to describe the structure of your
model. Categories contain items, and you can assemble items into logical
item groups; by definition those groups belong to the same category as the
items that comprise them. To link one matrix to another, you share linked
categories across the matrices. “About Modeling Matrices” on page 42
introduces you to working with categories and items; Chapter 3 walks you
through the process of creating a structured model; Chapter 4 provides
more detailed reference information.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
32
Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model

About Views
After crafting a modeling matrix, you can create two types of views. Each
view has its own tab and contains different elements.
• A table view of a modeling matrix displays the table portion only; it
does not include the formula editor. In this view, you can move the
category tiles to change the layout of the table and can use the
formatting tools to change its appearance.
• A chart view of a modeling matrix displays the matrix’s contents graph-
ically in the top half and displays a charting table in the bottom half.
In this view, you can choose different chart types, and customize
them. You can also rearrange the category tiles to change the layout
of the chart.
These views are permanently linked to the matrix by their structure, logic,
and data; their presentation is not linked. The relationship works in these
ways:
• When you change the structure, logic, or data in the modeling matrix,
Quantrix simultaneously updates all of its linked views.
• When you change the structure or data in one of the views, Quantrix
simultaneously updates the matrix and all of that matrix’s other views;
you cannot change logic in a view because views do not include a
formula editor.
• When you change the presentation in either the modeling matrix or
one of its views, the change will affect only the matrix or view in
which you make the change.

About Model Files

Quantrix stores all of these elements in a single model file. When you open
a model file, you interact with the elements in a single model window.
“Working in the Model Window” on page 34 shows you how to work with
this window; “Managing Model Files” on page 56 shows you how to work
with the model files.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
33
Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model

Comparing Models and Spreadsheets

Table 2-1 summarizes the major differences between models and
spreadsheets.

Table 2-1. Comparison of spreadsheets and models

Attribute Spreadsheet Model

modeling matrices, table views,

work areas worksheets
chart views, presentation canvas
organizational
cells categories, items, item groups
units
natural language labels for each
formula syntax cell coordinates
organizational unit
one formula one formula can calculate a struc-
formula range
calculates cell tural range of cells
formula location behind each cell listed in the formula editor
file extension .xls .model

In addition to these concrete differences, Chapter 3 suggests a different

methodology that you may want to adopt when creating models using
Quantrix.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
34
Working in the Model Window

Working in the Model Window

When you double-click the Quantrix Modeler icon or choose All
Programs > Quantrix > Quantrix Modeler from your Start menu, and
select New Empty Model... from the Create section of the launch panel,
you see a model window.

Figure 2-1. A new model window, labeled

title bar
menu bar
standard toolbar
format toolbar

modeling
matrix

window
frame

format toolbox
model browser

At startup, the tool area contains two toolbars, and the working area
contains two tabs: the Model Browser and one modeling matrix.

About the Tool Area

The top region of the model window is the tool area. It contains the title bar,
menu bar, standard toolbar, and format toolbar. The window frame, which borders
the entire window, is also part of the tool area.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
35
Working in the Model Window

Using the Title Bar and Window Frame

You use the title bar to control the overall size and position of the model
window; you use the window frame to manually resize the window. You
work with them as shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-2. Using the title bar and window frame

To: Follow these steps:

Position your cursor between the title bar and menu bar, and then drag the
move the window
window to a new location.
Position your cursor over a side or corner of the window frame so it
resize the window changes into a Resize cursor ( ), and then drag to increase or decrease
the window’s size.
change the window
Click the Minimize button ( ).
into an icon
change the icon into a
Click the icon to restore the minimized window to its previous size.
window
make the window fill Click the Maximize button ( ); Quantrix changes the button to a
the screen Restore button.
make the window
Click the Restore button ( ) of a maximized window; Quantrix changes
occupy part of the
the button to a Maximize button.
screen
Click the Full Screen button ( )to expand the Quantrix work area to fill
your entire computer screen for presentation purposes. All tools, toolbars,
full screen mode
and menu bars will be closed. Press ESC to return to the normal Quantrix
window.
Click the Close button ( ). If there are other open models, Quantrix will
close the window and
remain open. If there are no open models, Quantrix will be reduced to the
exit Quantrix
launch panel. Choose Exit Quantrix.
close Quantrix and all
Select File > Exit (Mac OS X users, use Quantrix Modeler > Quit).
open models

Tip: You can also use the title bar menu to control the window in many of
these ways. Click the Quantrix Modeler icon ( ) to see the menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
36
Working in the Model Window

Using the Menu Bar

You can choose commands from the menus in the menu bar in either of
these ways:
• Using the mouse, position your cursor over the menu, click the
mouse button, move the cursor to highlight a command, and then
click the mouse button again to choose the command. When this
guide instructs you to choose using this method, it uses this notation:
“Choose File > Open”, where File is the menu name and Open is a
command that it contains.
• Using the keyboard, simultaneously press the ALT key and the under-
lined letter of the menu’s name (for example, E for the Edit menu),
and then press the underlined letter of the command that you want to
choose.
Quantrix provides several shortcuts for choosing menu commands. For a
list of these shortcuts, see Appendix A.

Sum Toolbar
The Sum Toolbar is an easy way to check formulas while building a model.
The Sum Toolbar will display the sum (or other summary), of the selected
numerical data, in the lower right hand corner of the model window.
Quantrix offers seven different summaries that can be accessed by right-
clicking on the sum display in the toolbar as shown below or by choosing
View > Calculator.

Figure 2-2. Sum Toolbar

Note: To hide the sum toolbar choose View > Calculator > None.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
37
Working in the Model Window

Using the Model and Format Toolbars

These toolbars provide shortcuts to the tasks that you are likely to perform
most frequently. Instead of choosing a command from a menu, you can
click its equivalent tool button.
Quantrix displays the buttons in color when they are available to you, and
displays them in grey when they are not. Tools that affect the entire model,
such as Open or Save, are always available. Other tools, such as Cut or
Group Item, are only available after you have selected an item or other
object.

Figure 2-3. Model Toolbar

Located on the far right of the Model Toolbar is the Zoom menu.
Quantrix allows you to view matrices and tables at settings from 25% to
999%. Zoom settings are independent for each matrix and table view.

Figure 2-4. Format Toolbar

Customizing the Tool Area

You can customize the tool area as shown in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3. Customizing the tool area in the model window

To: Follow these steps:

Choose File > Save As... , type a new name in the dialog box, and then
change the name of press ENTER.
your model (the name Quantrix creates a copy of the model, displays that name in the title bar of
that appears in the title the model window, and places the copy in the same directory of your
bar) computer as the original model file. See also “Managing Model Files” on
page 56.
Choose View > Model Toolbar to hide it; Quantrix removes the check-
hide or expose the mark next to this command.
model toolbar Choose View > Model Toolbar to expose it. Quantrix places a check-
mark next to this command.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
38
Working in the Model Window

Table 2-3. Customizing the tool area in the model window

To: Follow these steps:

Choose View > Format Toolbar to hide it; Quantrix removes the check-
hide or expose the mark next to this command.
format toolbar Choose View > Format Toolbar to expose it; Quantrix places a check-
mark next to this command.

Using the Model Browser

When you open a new model file, Quantrix automatically displays a small
Model Browser tab in the upper left hand corner of the model window.

expand all
clear filter
collapse all
browser filter

model
components

resize comment field

show / hide comments
model
comments

The Model Browser is the road map to your model. It lists each modeling
matrix and its linked views; the matrices and views that make up your model
are called its components.

New: The Model Browser Toolbar allows you to easily navigate

through models with a large number of matrices and views. The options
available are:

Expand All: Opens all folders in the model browser to reveal the full list of
views.
Collapse All: Closes all folders.
Browser Filter: Filters the list of views based on text you type in the box
provided.
Clear Filter: Clears the textbox to reveal the full list of views.
This sample tab shows that your model has three components—the first is a
modeling matrix named Matrix1. When you rename this matrix to

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
39
Working in the Model Window

something more meaningful, you will still know that it is a modeling matrix
(rather than some type of view) by its icon ( ).
Even when closed, you can access the components of the model browser by
clicking the arrow portion of the Show Model Browser button ( ).
You will see a drop-down menu that looks like this:

This menu acts similar to the Model Browser by allowing you to control
the components of your model. See Table 2-4 on page 40 for a complete list
of options.
As your model grows, the Model Browser contains more components.

Figure 2-5. Model Browser with three types of components

Quantrix adds a component to the Model Browser each time you create a
new matrix or view. You use the Model Browser to manipulate those
components and to add comments about each one.
As you highlight each component, the associated comments appear in the
comment box.
Quantrix also allows you to create folders in the Model Browser to help
organize more complex models. Just as with components, you can add
comments to a folder to help document your model. Folders are repre-
sented with a folder icon in the Model Browser ( ).

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
40
Working in the Model Window

Figure 2-6. Model Browser with organizational folder

Tip: You can print all of the views inside an organizational folder at once
by clicking on the folder in the open model browser, then choosing File >
Print. See “Printing Multiple Views” on page 306 for more information.

You work with the Model Browser as shown in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4. Using the Model Browser

To: Follow these steps:

Double-click its name, type a new name, and then press ENTER. Quantrix
rename a component
renames it in the Model Browser and in the title bar of the component’s
or folder
tab.
open or expose the
Double-click the component’s icon.
component’s tab
Click its close box ( ). To close all views choose View > Close All
close a component
Views or press Ctrl + H.
Choose Insert > Matrix, Insert > Table View, Insert > Chart View, or
Insert > Presentation Canvas.
or
add a component*
Click the Insert Matrix button ( ), Insert Table View button ( ),
Insert Chart View button ( ), or Insert Presentation Canvas button
( ).
Click to select the component, and then choose Edit > Delete. Quantrix
delete a component* removes the component from the Model Browser and removes the
component’s tab from the model window.
Choose Insert > Folder or right-click on any component in the Model
add a folder
Browser and choose Insert > Folder from the pop-up menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
41
Working in the Model Window

Table 2-4. Using the Model Browser

To: Follow these steps:

Click to select the folder and then choose Edit > Delete. Quantrix
delete a folder* removes the folder from the Model Browser and removes all of the
components and folders contained within the folder.
move a component or Click to select the component or folder and drag it to its destination
folder* within the Model Browser.
Click its name to select it, and then type your comment in the comment
add a comment about
field at the bottom of the Model Browser. To start a new line, press
a component*
ENTER.
resize the comment
Drag the resize handle ( ) up or down.
field*
expose or hide compo- Click the up and down arrows ( ) to expose or hide the entire compo-
nents or comments* nent area or comment field.
close the Model
Click its close box ( ).
Browser
reopen the Model Choose View > Model Browser or Click the Show Model Browser
Browser button ( ).
to access the compo-
Click the arrow to the right of the Show Model Browser button ( ) to
nents of the Model
access the drop-down menu.
Browser while closed

*These features are only available in the open Model Browser tab.

Tip: To view comments in the Model Browser Drop-down Menu,

hover the cursor over the component.

Table 2-5. Model Browser status icons

Icon Condition

Matrix indicator under normal conditions

Indicates an error or warning in the matrix formulas
Indicates an active datalink in the matrix

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
42
Working in the Model Window

About Modeling Matrices

Modeling matrices provide your main work area; you use them to design
and build a modular piece of your model’s structure, logic, and presentation,
and to input data. In a new model file, Quantrix automatically displays one
modeling matrix tab to the right of the Model Browser tab.
You can add another modeling matrix in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Matrix button ( )
• Choose Insert > Matrix
• Click to select any matrix in the Model Browser and press ENTER

Figure 2-7. A new modeling matrix tab, labeled

item

category tile

formula editor

formula field
status column

The sample tab above shows that your new model has two generic catego-
ries (A and B), each of which contains one item (A1 and B1, respectively),
and one empty cell. You see that the model has no formulas because the
first formula field and its corresponding status column are empty, and there
is no scrollbar on the right hand side of the formula editor.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
43
Working in the Model Window

As your model grows, you notice more features in the modeling matrix tab.

Figure 2-8. Modeling matrix with data and structure, labeled

filter tray

column tray

summary item

linked category
row tray

status indicators

summary formula

Using the Table

You use the table of a modeling matrix to build structure, change the layout,
and enter data.

Managing Categories, Items, and Item Groups

You build the structure of your model using categories, items, and item
groups. You assign them names that make your model easy to understand
and to work with. See also “Understanding Structure” on page 74 and
Chapter 4.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
44
Working in the Model Window

Rearranging Category Tiles

You can move the category tiles between three layout trays: When you move a
category tile, all of that category’s items and item groups come with it. This
dramatically changes the layout of your table, but has no impact on your
model’s structure or logic.
The row tray and column tray let you control the horizontal and vertical layout
of a table. When a tray contains a category tile, Quantrix knows to display
that category and all of its items in a certain location. Quantrix displays the
items of categories whose tiles are in the row tray as row labels, and it
displays the items of categories whose tiles are in the column tray as column
labels. After you move a category tile, you may need to resize or scroll your
modeling matrix to see the full effect of the change.
In a new matrix, Quantrix displays one category tile in the row tray and one
in the column tray. If you remove a tile so there are none in a particular tray,
Quantrix hides the tray. To see the tray again, drag a category tile into its
vicinity.
The filter tray, which is empty in a new matrix, lets you simplify both your on-
screen view and your printed copies. This tray is located above the table in
matrices and table views. In chart views the filter tray is located above the
chart.
When you place a category tile in the filter tray, Quantrix places all of the
category’s items in a drop-down menu and only displays the data for the
selected item. You can then choose each item from the category tile’s drop-
down menu to change the view to show the data that is associated with it. In
other words, if your filtered category contains 4 items, the drop-down
presents each item as a choice.

Selecting Cells and Entering Data

You can select a group of cells by clicking the item or item group to which
they belong, or you can drag to select an arbitrary range of cells. You can
enter data into one cell at a time. You move around the cells using the arrow
keys on your keyboard. For details, see Chapter 5.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
45
Working in the Model Window

You work with the table in a modeling matrix as shown in Table 2-6.

Table 2-6. Working with the table in a modeling matrix tab

To: Follow these steps:

Click to select a category tile in the same layout tray to which you
add a category tile
want to add a tile, and then press ENTER.
Click to select the item below which you want to add a new item, and
add an item
then press ENTER.
Right-click (Control-click on Macintosh) on the item below which you
add multiple items want to add the new items, then choose Insert Items. Enter the
number of items to insert and click OK.
rename a category or item Double-click its name, type the new name, and then press ENTER.
delete a category or item Click to select the category tile or item, then press DELETE.
Position your cursor over the grey handle ( ) of the category tile,
press your left mouse button, drag the tile to a new layout tray (or to a
move a category tile
different position within the same layout tray), and then release the
mouse button.
Drag the category tile into the filter tray, and then choose an item
filter the table
from the tile’s drop-down menu.
Place your cursor over the right side or bottom of the item and then
resize an item
drag it or double-click the right edge of the item to auto-resize.
select an item and all of its
Click the item’s name; Quantrix highlights the item and all of its cells.
cells
Click to select an item and all of its cells, then choose Edit > Select
Items Only to deselect the cells, or choose Edit > Select Cells Only
to deselect the item name.
select a restricted set of
or
cells or items
Press and hold down the CTRL key and click to select only items.
or
Drag to select an unstructured range of cells.
enter data into an input cell Click an empty cell, type the data, and then press ENTER.
edit an input cell’s data Double-click the cell, type the data, and then press ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
46
Working in the Model Window

Using the Formula Editor

Each modeling matrix tab includes a formula editor. You enter and audit all
formulas for the matrix in this location. Formulas are written in the formula
pane using the item names in the model. Click on an item name and press
the equal sign key to start a formula. The left side of the formula shows
where the calculated result should appear. The right side of the formula is
the actual calculation.
If desired, Quantrix can keep all formulas visible. In addition, it pro actively
informs you of possible error conditions through its status icons and infor-
mative messages. Each formula is numbered, starting with 1. Quantrix uses
this number as its calculation order; it starts with 1 and works its way
through all remaining formulas.

Figure 2-9. Formula editor, labeled

formula toolbar
formula field

status indicators

For full details on constructing and troubleshooting formulas, see Chapter

6.
The formula editor includes a formula toolbar. You can click the
Function... button to access the Functions tab, or click its other buttons
to construct a formula rather than typing into the formula field.

Figure 2-10. Formula toolbar

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
47
Working in the Model Window

You work with the formula editor in a modeling matrix tab as shown in
Table 2-7.

Table 2-7. Working with the formula editor in a modeling matrix tab

To: Follow these steps:

resize the formula

Drag the resize handle ( ) up or down.
editor
expose or hide the Click the up and down arrows ( ) to expose or hide the entire table or
formula editor or table formula editor.
Click to select the formula that will directly precede your new formula,
add a new formula press ENTER to create a new formula field, type in your formula, and then
press ENTER to make Quantrix calculate the formula.
edit an existing
Double-click the formula, type in your changes, and then press ENTER.
formula
delete a formula Click to select the formula and then press DELETE.
check the status of a
Review the message in the formula field and the icon in the status column.
formula
change the calculation To move a formula up or down the list in the formula editor, select the
order formula, and then choose Edit > Move Up or Edit > Move Down.
When you press ENTER after adding or editing a formula, Quantrix recal-
culates the model.
force a recalculation or
Choose choose Tools > Calculation > Recalculate All to force
Quantrix to recalculate all values in the model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
48
Working in the Model Window

Auto Complete
When writing a formula, Quantrix gives you the option to automatically
complete formulas from an existing list. Pressing the TAB key will display a
list of possible items, categories, or functions that can be used in your
formula. The list is created by the characters that you have typed up to the
point when the TAB key was pressed. Use the mouse, or up and down
arrows, to select the appropriate entry from the list and press ENTER.

Figure 2-11. Auto Complete menu view

Organizing Model Tabs

The Model Window is arranged in tabs with tools on the left and matrices,
charts, and views tiled on the right. This type of layout enables the user to
navigate efficiently through matrices and provides many options for
organizing the work area.

Note: You can maximize the work area by closing the Model Browser
and any other open tool tabs. The tool space can only be utilized by
matrices if all tools are closed.

When you first open an existing or new matrix it will fill the entire available
work area. To view matrices simultaneously, use one of the options
described on the following pages.

Moving Tabs
Divide the work area between two or more matrices and views by dragging
the tab to a new location. The work area contains invisible regions. To move
the desired matrix to one of these hidden regions, click the tab to select the
matrix, hold down the left mouse button and drag to the desired location.
As you drag you will see the regions appear as boxes with a black outline.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
49
Working in the Model Window

When you have moved the matrix into one of these regions, release the
mouse button.
The matrix occupies the region and the matrices left behind fill the
remaining space. The work area will always be filled by the open matrices.

Caution: You can move tabs as many times as necessary, however, you
cannot use the Undo button to move them back. Pressing Undo will undo
the last action that was not a move.

Detach / Attach Tabs

Quantrix gives you the option of removing components from the Modeling
Window entirely to place elsewhere on your desktop. This option allows you
to resize the new window independently and keep key information visible
without sacrificing your work area. You can detach a tab, or a group of tabs,
by selecting the Detach button ( ) next to the components title on the
tab or on the upper right corner of the group of tabs.

Figure 2-12. Model with detached tab

You can re-attach a component, or group of components, at any time by

selecting the Attach button ( ). The matrix will be re-inserted in its
original position.

Tip: Use this option for a matrix that you want viewable on the desktop if
it contains a small table that would otherwise leave a lot of unusable space in
the work area.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
50
Working in the Model Window

Saving Tabs
When you save a Quantrix model that has been modified by one of the
previously mentioned methods, this is the way the file will appear when re-
opened.

Perspectives
Quantrix allows you to save your screen layout for a particular model in one
or more perspectives. While working with a model you can arrange the
matrices and views in a configuration that makes sense for the work you are
performing. You can then save this layout, or perspective, and return to it at
anytime. This is important if other users will be working with the model and
rearranging components in the work area.

Saving a Perspective
Once you have the work area arranged in a configuration that you want to
be able to access again, create a perspective by following these steps:
1. Open the Save Perspective dialog box in one of these ways:
• Choose View > Perspectives > Save Perspective...

• Click on the Perspectives drop-down ( ) in the model

toolbar
2. Enter a meaningful name for the new perspective.
3. Press OK.

The perspective is now saved with the name you have chosen. To return to
this perspective at a later time, follow these steps:
1. Choose View > Perspectives.
2. Select the name of the perspective from the menu.
The work area returns to the configuration of the saved perspective.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
51
Working in the Model Window

Reconfigure a Perspective
To change the layout of a perspective follow these steps:
1. Arrange the work area in the desired manner.
2. Choose View > Perspectives > Save Perspective... to open the
Save Perspective dialog box.
3. Choose the name of the perspective you are changing from the drop-
down menu.

4. Press OK.

Managing Perspectives
Quantrix allows you to make the following changes to previously created
perspectives:
• Edit: to change the name of the perspective
• Remove: to delete the perspective
• Move Up or Down: to change the order in which the perspectives
appear in the menu
To make changes to previously saved perspectives, follow these steps:
1. Choose View > Perspectives > Manage Perspectives... to open
the Manage Perspectives dialog box.

2. Select the name of the perspective you wish to edit.

3. Choose the appropriate action (Up, Down, Edit, or Remove).
4. Press OK.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
52
Working in the Model Window

About the Chart View

Quantrix contains a library of chart types that you can use to generate a
chart of any matrix. See Chapter 8 for details on selecting and customizing
the most appropriate chart for a specific communication challenge.
To create a chart view of a modeling matrix, click to select its name in the
Model Browser, and then choose Insert > Chart View.

Figure 2-13. A chart view tab, labeled

filter tray

chart

legend

charting
table

As described in “About Views” on page 32, the chart view is permanently

linked to the matrix from which you created it.
The chart view tab includes:
• a chart where you can move category tiles to change the layout of the
chart and therefore the layout of the chart table
• a chart legend
• a charting table where you expand and collapse items to change
layout of the table and the chart. You work with the charting table
the same way you work with the table of a modeling matrix. For
details, see “Using the Table” on page 43.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
53
Working in the Model Window

You work with a chart view tab as shown in Table 2-8.

Table 2-8. Working with a chart view tab

To: Follow these steps:

change the layout of

Drag the category tiles between the filter, series, and points trays.
the charting table
change the type of In the Format Toolbox > Chart > Chart Type, use the drop-down menu
chart to choose the chart type that you want.
In the Format Toolbox > Chart Legend, check or un-check the Legend
hide the legend
Visible checkbox.
Drag the item’s icon from one location in the legend to another as shown:
change the order of
items that are repre-
sented in the legend

preview your chart Choose File > Print Preview (Mac OS X users, use Preview button on
before you print it print panel).

Pro: In Professional Edition, creating a chart view of a matrix that

contains two or more categories in a row or column will result in a Chart
Grid. For more information see “Chart Grid” on page 257.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
54
Working in the Model Window

About the Table View

Table views are useful for tailoring the presentation of a matrix for a partic-
ular purpose. For example, you can:
• simplify the view by collapsing items and item groups
• change the focus or filter the view by rearranging the category tiles
• create a data-entry view that displays only input cells
To create a table view of a modeling matrix, click to select the matrix’s name
in the Model Browser, and then choose Insert > Table View.

Figure 2-14. A table view tab

The table view contains only the table of the matrix; it does not include a
formula editor.
You work with the table view the same way you work with the table of a
modeling matrix (see “Using the Table” on page 43). Like the chart view,
the table view is permanently linked to the modeling matrix from which it
was generated. For more details, see “About Views” on page 32.

About the Presentation Canvas

The presentation canvas allows you to combine table views, chart views,
and other elements into a cohesive display of your data.
To create a presentation canvas choose Insert > Presentation Canvas or
select the Insert Presentation Canvas button ( ) from the model
toolbar.
The presentation canvas consists of a blank canvas and the presentation
toolbar. You work with the presentation canvas as shown in Table 2-9.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
55
Working in the Model Window

Table 2-9. Working with the presentation canvas

To: Follow these steps:

Click the Insert Table View ( ) or Insert Chart View ( ) button

for a list of model components available.
add components OR
Press CTRL and drag the components from the Model Browser to the
desired location on the Presentation Canvas.

add shapes Click the Shapes drop-down ( ) for a list of shapes.

add line Click the Insert Line button ( ) for a list of line types.
Click the Insert Text button ( ) in the presentation toolbar, click to
add annotations specify an insertion point on the presentation canvas, type the annotation,
and then press ENTER.

Click the Select button ( ) in the presentation toolbar, click the object
move objects
you want to move, click and drag the object to the new position.
Drag the cursor to select the items you want to group and click the Group
group items
button ( ). Click the Ungroup button ( ) to reverse this action.
To arrange the depth of objects in the presentation canvas, select the
arrange objects object, then click the Bring to Front button ( ) or the Send to Back
button ( )in the presentation toolbar.

For more detailed information about creating a presentation canvas see

Chapter 9 “Presenting a Model” on page 267.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
56
Managing Model Files

Managing Model Files

Quantrix saves your work in model files. The files have the extension .model,
and are represented on your computer with the icon shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15. Quantrix Modeler file icon

Opening the Quantrix Application

You can open Quantrix in one of these ways:
• Double-click the Quantrix Modeler icon ( ).
• From your Start menu, choose All Programs > Quantrix >
Quantrix Modeler.
When Quantrix first opens, the Quantrix Modeler Launch Panel is
displayed. The launch panel consists of following three sections:
• Create: allows you to start a new model from an empty model or
existing template.
• Learn: offers resources for learning more about the Quantrix appli-
cation and its capabilities.
• Open: allows you to open recently opened or other existing Quantrix
models.

To open as Quantrix Viewer, see “About Quantrix Viewer” on page 320.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
57
Managing Model Files

The launch panel appears again when you close the last open model. To
prevent the launch panel from appearing, place a checkmark in the Show
on start-up or Show on close checkboxes. See “Setting Launch Panel
Options” on page 67 and “Recently Opened Files” on page 62 for more
information.

Mac OS X: Open Quantrix by double-clicking the desktop icon or, in

finder, choose Applications > Quantrix Modeler.

Creating New Models

If Quantrix is not running, you can create a new model by first opening
Quantrix as described in “Opening the Quantrix Application” on page 56.
From the Create section of the main menu select New Default Model...,
New Empty Model..., or Model From Template to start a new model.
If Quantrix is already running (i.e., you already have one model file open),
choose File > New. You then must choose to create the new model using
your Default Model template (see “Templates” on page 64 to learn how to
set the default), an Empty Model, or a model from the list of user defined
and system templates. The new file appears in a new model window whose
name is Untitled.

For more information on templates see “Saving as a Template: the

MODELT File Format” on page 61.

Opening Existing Models

If Quantrix is not running, you can open an existing model by first opening
Quantrix as described in “Opening the Quantrix Application” on page 56.
From the Open section of the launch panel, choose a recently opened
model from the list or select Browse... to use your directory browser to
locate the model you wish to open.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
58
Managing Model Files

If Quantrix is already running, use File > Open... to open an additional

model. Quantrix displays the model in a new model window and your
original model window remains open.
To open a template to edit or to use as a new model, choose File > Open...
and change Files of type to .modelt. Choose the user defined template you
want to open, and you will be given the choice to Open As New Model or
Open For Edit, as shown in this panel:

File In Use Detection and Notification

Quantrix notifies you if you attempt to open a model file that is currently
open by another user on the network. In this scenario, Quantrix displays this
dialog panel:

The panel indicates which user has the file open and gives you the opportu-
nity to select one of four actions.
• Open in read-only mode allows you to open the file in a mode
where the model can be viewed and manipulated, but when you
save it, you are asked to give the document a new name.
• Open in read-only mode and receive notification when
document is available for writing allows you to open the file in
read-only mode. When the other user closes the file, you will get a
panel like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
59
Managing Model Files

At this point you can click Revert to revert to the document that
was saved by the previous user. Reverting causes you to lose any
changes you have in the current document. Clicking Cancel allows
you to continue to work in Read Only mode.
• Take the lock from the current lock owner allows you to
override the other users lock on the file and grant you full write
access to the model. This action is necessary if the other user did
not properly shut down Quantrix when exiting the file or the
application.
• Cancel will dismiss the panel. You can try to open the file at a later
time.

Opening Recently Viewed Model Files

Quantrix includes in its File menu the last four model files that you opened
by default. To open one of these files, such as Forecasts.model, choose File >
Forecasts.model. Quantrix displays the model in a new model window and
your original model window remains open.
These recently viewed models are also listed in the Open section of the
Launch Panel.
See “Recently Opened Files” on page 62 to change the number of recently
viewed model files that will be displayed.

Saving Model Files

The first time you save a model, you need to specify a directory in your
filesystem in which to save the model, along with a filename. When you save
the model after that, Quantrix automatically saves it in the directory and
with the filename that you previously specified. To have Quantrix automati-
cally save your file at specific intervals, see “Autosave” on page 63.
To save a model, follow these steps:
1. Choose File > Save.
2. If you are saving the file for the first time, choose a name and
location for the file.
• In the directory browser, navigate to the directory in which you
want to save the file.
• In the File Name field, type a name for your model, and then
press ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
60
Managing Model Files

Tip: To save a model in a different directory or with a different filename

from the one you specified the first time you saved it, use File > Save as...
For details, see “Renaming Model Files” on page 60.

Professional Edition: Professional edition has no limit on the

size of the model file that can be saved. Standard edition limits the model
file size to 500,000 cells.

Renaming Model Files

You can change the name or location of an existing model file from within
Quantrix by following these steps:
1. If you have made changes (that you want to keep) to the current file,
choose File > Save to save those changes before proceeding.
2. Choose File > Save As...
3. In the directory browser, navigate to the directory in which you want
to save the file.
4. In the File Name field, type a new file name for the model, and then
press ENTER.

Saving in XML: the XMODEL File Format

Quantrix stores its documents using one of three file formats: .model (the
default), .modelt (discussed in further detail below) and .xmodel. The .model
format is a compressed, binary format that only the Quantrix application
can read. The .xmodel format is written in XML (eXtensible Markup
Language), a text-based format that Quantrix and other applications can
read.
To save a model in the .xmodel format, follow these steps:
1. If you have made changes (that you want to keep) to the current file,
choose File > Save to save those changes before proceeding.
2. Choose File > Save As... The Save As dialog opens.
3. In the Files of type combo box, select Quantrix XML Model
Document (*.xmodel).
4. Type in a new file name for your document, then press ENTER.
Once a model document has been saved in .xmodel format via the File >
Save As... command, subsequent ordinary saves using the File > Save
command will continue to save in .xmodel format.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
61
Managing Model Files

Saving as a Template: the MODELT File Format

Quantrix allows any file to be saved as a user-defined template. Templates
are useful when you have a set of parameters that are consistently the same
when creating new models. Once you have created a file that you want to
save as a template, the file can be saved with a .modelt extension which estab-
lishes it as a template file.
To save a model in the .modelt format, follow these steps:
1. Choose File > Save As... The Save As dialog opens.
2. In the Files of type combo box, select Quantrix Modeler Template
File (*.modelt).
3. Type in a new file name for your document, then press ENTER.
Once a model document has been saved to your default location for
templates in .modelt format via the File > Save As... command, the file
name will appear as a choice when you create a file via the File > New
menu.

Tip: To make your template available in the File > New menu, save the
model in the C:\Program Files\Quantrix Modeler\Quantrix Templates
directory.

For more information see “Templates” on page 64.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
62
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

You can apply some options to all of your Quantrix files using the Options
dialog box. To open it, choose Tools > Options.

Mac OS X: Use Quantrix Modeler > Preferences for setting

options for all Quantrix files.

Note: If you are a Microsoft Vista® or Windows 7 user, and you are
having trouble setting Quantrix preferences in Tools > Options, turn off
user access control in your control panel.

Figure 2-16. The Options dialog box

Setting File Options

You set File related options by selecting File on the left of the Options
dialog box.

Recently Opened Files

To specify how many recent file names Quantrix should display at the
bottom of the File menu, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the File section of the Options dialog box.
3. Specify the number of recent files to show in one of these ways:
• To remove all documents from the File menu, click to remove the
checkmark from the Show checkbox.
• To have Quantrix display a certain number of recent file names,
make sure there is a checkmark in the Show checkbox, and then
choose a number from the Number of files to show drop-down
menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
63
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Autosave
You can instruct Quantrix to automatically save a file at specific time inter-
vals. Quantrix adds a .auto extension to files that it saves in this way (making
the full file extension .model.auto); then when you exit from Quantrix, it
removes all files with this extra extension. If Quantrix unexpectedly exits, it
does not remove the .model.auto file so you can open this file to recover your
work.
To control whether Quantrix automatically saves your open files, follow
these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the File section of the Options dialog box.
3. Turn autosave on or off.
• To turn it on, click the On radio button, and then choose a
number of minutes from the Save every drop-down menu.
• To turn it off, click the Off radio button.
4. Click the OK button to apply the options.

Backup
The first time a model is saved during a session, Quantrix can create an
additional backup file. Quantrix adds the words “Backup of ” before the file
name and uses a .mbak extension. For example, a backup copy of the file
projections.model would be named Backup of projections.mbak.
To control whether Quantrix creates a backup file every time you save,
follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the File section of the Options dialog box.
3. Next to Create Backup original file upon first save, click the Yes
or No radio button.
4. Click the OK button to apply the options.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
64
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

File Locations
Quantrix will remember certain directories to make saving and opening files
more convenient. These directories are:
• Working files - Quantrix will automatically point Save and Open
dialogs to this directory.
• Autosave files - Quantrix will put auto-save files for Untitled
documents in this directory.
To set these directories, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the File section of the Options dialog box.
3. Click the corresponding Browse... button, of either the Working files
or the Autosave files fields.
4. Navigate to and select the desired directory using the file browser.
5. Click the Save button to set the selected directory.

Templates
You can instruct Quantrix to set any template file as the Default Model
template.
To set a template as the Default Model, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Choose File > Templates in the Options dialog box.
3. Click the Change... button under The “Default Model” template
section.
4. Navigate to and select the desired template (*.modelt) using the file
browser.
5. Click the OK button to apply the changes.
To set a default directory for all of your customized templates, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Choose File > Templates in the Options dialog box.
3. Click the Browse... button under The default location of user
created templates section.
4. Navigate to and select the desired directory using the file browser.
5. Select Save, then the OK button to apply the changes.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
65
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Setting International Options

Choosing Units of Measure

To select the units of measure Quantrix will use to display dimensional
information such as page-layout margins, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the International section of the Options dialog box.
3. Select the desired value from the Units of measure drop-down
menu.

Choosing Currency Symbol and Separators

To choose the default currency symbol and commas (,) or periods (.) for
thousands and decimal separators, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the International section of the Options dialog box.
3. Choose the currency symbol and separators.
• To use separators and currency based on the values you set in your
system’s regional and language control panel, click to place a
checkmark in the Use default system settings checkbox.
• Otherwise, to explicitly assign a separator or the currency symbol,
select the desired value from the corresponding drop-down menu.
4. Click the OK button to apply the options.

Setting Print Options

You can set default paper size and margins in the Print section of the
Options dialog box. Follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the Print section of the Options dialog box.
3. Set the desired values in the Paper size drop-down and the Default
Margins fields.
4. Click OK to apply the options.

Mac OS X: For information on setting print options for multiple

views see “Printing Multiple Views” on page 306.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
66
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Setting Proxy Server Options

Quantrix can be configured to utilize your organization’s proxy server when
it needs to communicate with the web. To set the proxy settings, follow
these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Click on the Proxy Settings section of the Options dialog box.
3. Set the options as follows:
• If your network does not use a proxy server, then remove the
check from the Use a proxy server for connecting to the
internet checkbox.
• If your network does use a proxy server, then ensure the proxy-
server checkbox is checked. Then fill in the Address and Port
field according to your network settings. If you do not know what
these settings are, your system administrator should be able to tell
you.
4. Click OK to apply the options.

Setting General Options

Setting Automatic Update Options

You can install newer versions of Quantrix when updates become available.
To choose whether Quantrix should automatically perform an update if a
newer version of Quantrix is available, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Select the General section of the Options dialog box.
3. Turn the automatic update on or off.
• To turn it off, make sure there is no checkmark in the Automati-
cally update Quantrix on exit checkbox.
• To turn it on, click to place a checkmark in the checkbox.
4. Click the OK button to apply the options.
You can also manually check for updates by choosing Help > Update
Quantrix. For more details on the update process, see “Installing and
Updating Quantrix” on page xvi.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
67
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Setting Launch Panel Options

The Quantrix Modeler Launch Panel appears by default when you first
open Quantrix or when you close the last open model. To prevent the
launch panel from appearing follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Select the General section of the Options dialog box.
3. Turn the Launch Panel off at start or close.
• Remove the checkmark in the Show Launch Panel on start-up
and Show Launch Panel on close checkboxes.

Setting Undo Options

By default, Quantrix can undo the last 100 changes to your model since it
was last saved. In cases where the model is very large, you can conserve
memory by reducing the number of undo actions that Quantrix can
perform. To change this setting, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Select the General section of the Options dialog box.
3. Set the desired value with the Undo stack size field.
4. Click the OK button to apply the options.
You can also manually clear the undo stack by choosing Edit > Clear undo.

Setting Maximum Memory

To aid in the performance of large model files, you can increase the memory
allocation for Quantrix. We recommend that you keep the memory size
under the amount of RAM installed on your system. To change the memory
setting, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Select the General section of the Options dialog box.
3. Set the desired value in the Maximum Memory box.
4. Click the OK button to apply the option.
After you select OK, the system will test your new settings to ensure that the
contiguous block of memory available is not exceeded. You will be
prompted to lower the number if needed.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
68
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Caution: On Windows operating systems, setting the memory higher

than the operating system configuration allows may result in Quantrix not
running. Values at or below 800M are safe in most configurations, but the
maximum value depends on software installed on your system. If Quantrix
fails to run after you make this change, please contact
[email protected] or visit the knowledge base at www.quantrix.com
for further information.

Setting A Default Font

Quantrix categories and items can be set to always use a font of your
choosing. To change the default settings, follow these steps:
1. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
2. Choose General > Fonts in the Options dialog box.
3. Remove the check from the Use default system font. checkbox.
4. Set the desired Font, Font style, Size and Font color.
5. Click the OK button to apply the options.
The changes will take effect when you restart Quantrix. Your default
settings will be applied to categories, items, formulas and cell values.

Note: If a new model is created via a template, the template font

settings will override the default model font settings. See “Templates” on
page 64 for more information about templates.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
69
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Setting Database Options

Adding and Removing JDBC Drivers

Professional Edition: This feature is only available in

Quantrix Modeler Professional Edition.

The Professional Edition of Quantrix Modeler can extract data from enter-
prise databases for use in modeling and analysis. On Microsoft Windows
computers, most databases can be accessed via ODBC drivers. On other
platforms or for optimized performance, you can install a JDBC driver for
the type of database you wish to access. To install a JDBC driver follow
these steps:
1. Download or install your database’s JDBC driver software. Your
database administrator may be able to help locate your database
vendor’s JDBC driver.
2. Identify the driver’s JAR file (with the .jar extension).
3. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
4. Select the Database (JDBC) section of the Options dialog box.
5. Click the Add Driver... button to bring up the Add JDBC Driver
dialog.
6. Fill in the Driver name field with a human readable name for the
driver.
7. Optionally fill in the Driver description field.
8. Click the Browse... button to bring up a file browser. Browse to and
select the driver’s JAR file.
9. Use the Driver class field to select which driver class to use (usually
there is only one).
10.Use the Available to drop-down menu to make this driver available
only to the current user or, if you have administrator privileges, to all
users on the machine.
11.Click OK to add the driver.
To remove a driver, select it in the driver list and click the Remove Driver
button. For more information about setting up a database connection, see
“Configuring DataLink Sources” on page 332.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 2: Learning the Basics
70
Setting Options for All Quantrix Files

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model

Chapter 3
Planning & Building a Model

Overview of the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Defining the Goal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Defining and Building the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Deriving the Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sharing the Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Now that you have made changes to an existing model, learned some key
concepts, and familiarized yourself with the mechanics of interacting with
Quantrix, you are ready to plan and build a sample model from scratch.
Like any discipline that combines art and science, there are many
different ways to create robust quantitative models. This chapter
suggests a methodology that has proven effective when building models
with Quantrix.
 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
72
Overview of the Process

Overview of the Process

This chapter illustrates how to apply a general model design methodology to
the specific task of creating a model with Quantrix. Regardless of how
similar this process is to the one you currently use, the techniques and
thought processes presented here will help you make the conceptual and
mechanical shift from using traditional spreadsheets to using Quantrix.
The process includes these steps:
1. Define your goal.
• What question is the model answering?
• Who is the audience of that answer?
• What is the best way to share the answer with the audience?
2. Design and build a modular structure.
• What are the elements of the question (such as time, products, or
growth rate), and how are they related to each other?
• Given those elements and their relationships, what level of granu-
larity and modularity does the model need in order to be flexible,
communicative, and accurate?
3. Add the data and logic needed to derive the answer.
• What initial data do you have?
• What supporting set of calculations will both deliver accurate
results and be manageable to maintain?
4. Expand and iterate on your design.
• What elements did you leave out or define too broadly?
• How can you improve the modularity?
• What additional information or calculations do you need?
5. Share your answer.
• What is the smallest set of information and the cleanest layout that
fully communicates the answer in a summary format?
• What is the best format in which to deliver the summary?
Now you will apply this process as you plan and build a financial model for
a fictitious startup company.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
73
Defining the Goal

Defining the Goal

You are considering starting up a new business, and would like to build a
financial model to understand whether it is viable. If the model looks
promising, you will write a complete, 3-year business plan that includes
excerpts from the model. You will then share the plan with potential inves-
tors and partners to secure the funding and talent that you will need.
Therefore, the model must:
answer this question: Will this business be profitable in
three years?
for this primary audience: potential investors
in this format: charts and tables at various levels
of detail, copied into a Microsoft
Word® document

Like most models, in order to answer the overall question, you first need to
answer a set of smaller questions in a manner that informs the overall
question. In this case:
• What level of revenue will the business generate over three years?
• What level of expenses will be necessary over three years?
• When will the business become profitable?
This chapter helps you build a model that answers these questions. The end
result will be a projected Profit and Loss (P&L) statement.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
74
Defining and Building the Structure

Defining and Building the Structure

The structure of your model must be complete, flexible, and robust. This
section introduces Quantrix’s unique structuring capabilities, and then
describes how to use them.

Understanding Structure
The first step in designing a model is to break your question down into its
critical elements. Consider this question:
“What level of revenue will the business generate over three years?”
It includes a minimum of three elements:
• time
• revenue
• growth rate
It is likely that your analysis requires more granularity, for example:
• Time might be expressed as years, where each year contains four
quarters and a year-to-date total.
• Revenue might be split between products and services, and you might
have different product lines or service agreements.
• Growth rate might be a value that you want to vary with time,
product, or some other element to create what-if scenarios.
Regardless of whether you are using a traditional spreadsheet application or
Quantrix, you need to understand these elements, and then plan and
organize your model to take them all into consideration. This collection of
model elements, expressed to a particular level of granularity, is called its
structure.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
75
Defining and Building the Structure

Quantrix helps you define and manipulate your model’s structure by

providing three organizational units:
• A category is the largest organizational unit; it contains items and item
groups. It is physically represented by Quantrix as a category tile.
• An item is the smallest unit; it is a single entity and must belong to a
category. An item appears as a labeled cell above a column or to the
left of a row.
• An item group is a set of items that you want to operate on collectively;
by definition, item groups contain one or more items and must
belong to its items’ category. An item group appears above the
columns or to the left of the rows that contain the set of items that
comprise the group.

Note: It is sometimes difficult to visually tell the difference between

item groups and categories or to decide when to use one rather than the
other. See “Comparing Item Groups and Categories” on page 144 for
details and guidelines.

You express structure in modeling matrices. A finished model that is both

flexible for the author and informative to others includes several matrices.
This is a major difference between Quantrix and traditional spreadsheet
applications. Instead of creating multiple worksheets, using separate regions
of a worksheet to perform supporting calculations, or using pivot tables, you
create a separate matrix to handle each modular piece of your model. The
method that you use to organize matrices is a matter of personal preference.
In this chapter, you will create three types:
• summary matrix: A matrix that answers your question and typically
serves as the source for charts and reports. In other words, this is the
matrix whose contents you want to share with others or roll up into
larger models.
• calculation matrix: A matrix that defines and calculates logical, modular
chunks of the model. The summary matrix accesses calculation
matrices for live data that it can display or use for additional
calculations.
• assumptions matrix: A matrix that contain fixed values. By varying these
values, the calculation and summary matrices calculate and display
what-if scenarios.
You will also create a chart view in order to fully communicate the answer.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
76
Defining and Building the Structure

Defining the Elements

Your goal is to answer this specific question:
“What level of revenue will the business generate over three years?”
As discussed earlier, some of its critical elements are time, revenue, and
growth. The granularity for time is already clear; you have a three-year
horizon, and typically you will want to understand business activity on a
quarterly and year-to-date basis. In order to model revenue and growth, you
need more specifics about this business.
Your idea is to build and sell three products: Widgets, Gadgets, and Gizmos.
You plan to divide your sales force into four regions: North, South, East,
and West. Because the products are more desirable in cooler climates, you
will have different growth projections for each region.
Now your elements include:
• Years, broken out into quarters and year-to-date totals
• Products, including Widgets, Gadgets, and Gizmos
• Regions, including North, South, East, and West
• Growth, which varies with each region
You now have enough information to begin building your model.

Note: You are about to build from scratch and then extend the same
model that you worked with in Chapter 1. If you encounter any difficulties
while building it yourself, you can access the completed Chapter 1 model by
choosing Help > Sample Models, and then double-clicking
Forecasts3.model.

Creating the Matrices

Building models is an iterative process. In this section you will create the
matrices necessary to calculate unit sales. Later you will extend the structure
to include revenue.

Note: If you are not familiar with the basic techniques for working with
matrices, categories, and items, see “Working in the Model Window” on
page 34.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
77
Defining and Building the Structure

Creating the Calculation Matrix

First you will create a calculation matrix that enumerates your elements and
defines the relationships between them. To create and add structure to this
matrix, follow these steps:
1. Start Quantrix by either double-clicking its icon or choosing
Programs > Quantrix > Quantrix Modeler from your Start menu.
2. Choose New Empty Model... from the Create section of the
Quantrix Modeler Launch Panel. Quantrix automatically opens
the Model Browser (which shows one modeling matrix called
Matrix1) and one new modeling matrix tab (named Matrix1) which
contains two categories (A in the column tray and B in the row tray).
3. Rename the new matrix by selecting Matrix1 in the Model Browser
tab, typing Sales Projections, and then pressing ENTER.
4. Create the categories and items that express the time dimension.
• Rename category A by selecting the A category tile, typing Year,
and then pressing ENTER.

Tip: Give categories singular names and matrices plural names for clarity
in your formulas. For details, see “Naming Structural Elements” on
page 117.

• Add three items to the Year category by selecting item A1,

typing Year1, and then pressing ENTER two times. Quantrix
creates the additional two years, and labels them Year2 and
Year3. Your matrix should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
78
Defining and Building the Structure

Note: When you add a new item to a category, Quantrix assigns it the
name of the category plus a number, and increments that number by one for
each additional item.

• Rename category B in the same manner and call it Quarter.

• Add three more items to the Quarter category by selecting item
B1, typing Quarter1, and then pressing ENTER three times.
Quantrix creates three items labeled Quarter2, Quarter3, and
Quarter4.
• Rename the four Quarter items Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 by
clicking to select each one (starting with B1), and then typing
the new names.
• Add a summary item named YTD that totals the Quarter
items. Click to select the Quarter category tile, and then choose
Insert > Summary Item > Sum. Rename the new item by
selecting it, typing YTD, and then pressing ENTER.

Note: In addition to adding the summary item to the table, Quantrix

also adds the summary formula as field 2 in the formula editor. This
formula is calculating a value of 0 for each YTD item because the model
contains no data. For more information, see “Using Summary Items” on
page 137.

Your matrix should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
79
Defining and Building the Structure

5. Save your model as BusinessPlan.model.

• Click the Save Model Document button ( ).
• In the directory browser, navigate to the directory in which you
want to save the file.
• In the File Name field, type BusinessPlan, and then press
ENTER.
6. Create a category and items that express the product dimension.
• Add a category tile to the row tray by selecting the Quarter tile,
and then pressing ENTER. Quantrix creates a category tile
named C and one item named C1 for each Quarter item.
• Rename the new category Product.
• Name your first Product item by selecting C1, typing Widget,
and then pressing ENTER. All five items previously named C1
are now named Widget.
• Add and name the remaining two products. Select any Widget
item, press ENTER to create and select a new item, type
Gadget, and then press ENTER. Gadget is now selected, so
you can create Gizmo in the same way—press ENTER, type
Gizmo, and then press ENTER again.

Note: After typing a new item name, press ENTER one time to make
the name take effect. If you press ENTER a second time, Quantrix creates a
new item. To delete an unwanted item, choose Edit > Undo. To move from
one item to another without creating new items, use your keyboard’s arrow
keys.

• Add a summary item named Total that totals the Product

items. Click to select the Product category tile, and then click
the Sum button ( ). Rename the new item by selecting it,
typing Total, and then pressing ENTER.
7. Adjust the layout before adding another dimension.
• Drag the Quarter category tile to the column tray, just below
the Year tile.
• Resize the model window, if needed, so you can see at least two
full years.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
80
Defining and Building the Structure

8. Create a category and items that express the region dimension.

• Add a category tile to the row tray by selecting the Product tile,
and then use the keyboard shortcut SHIFT+ENTER to add the
tile to the left of the selected Product tile.

Tip: For a complete list of Quantrix’s keyboard shortcuts, see

Appendix A.

• Rename the new category Region.

• Change the name of the new item D1 to North, and then add 3
items and name them South, East, West.
Your matrix should look like this:

9. Save your model by clicking the Save Model button ( ).

Your calculation matrix now contains the dimensions and relationships that
are fairly fixed. The remaining elements, growth rate and price, are more
variable. When your model is complete, you will want to experiment with
these values to understand how those changes affect the overall model.
Elements like growth rate and price belong in separate matrices where they
remain linked to the other elements, but are easier to vary and manage.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
81
Defining and Building the Structure

Creating an Assumptions Matrix

You anticipate that sales of all products will vary by geographic region.
Follow these steps to create a matrix where you can assign different growth
rates to each region:
1. Create a new matrix named Assumptions.
• Click the Insert Matrix button ( ) in the standard toolbar.
Quantrix opens a new tab labeled Matrix2 and adds Matrix2 to
the Model Browser tab.
• Click to select Matrix2 in the Model Browser tab, type
Assumptions, and then press ENTER. Quantrix renames the
matrix in both the Model Browser and the title bar of the
modeling matrix tab.
2. Reposition the Assumptions tab so you can see all of the category
tiles in the Sales Projections tab.
• Click and drag the Assumptions tab toward the right, you will
see the black outline of a vertical box.
• Release the matrix and it will snap into place in the outlined
region.
3. Link the Region category to the Assumptions matrix.
• Drag the Region category tile from the Sales Projections
matrix into the row tray of the Assumptions matrix (right next
to its F category tile); when Quantrix displays the outline of the
Region category tile in the row tray, release the mouse button.
Quantrix adds the four regions to this matrix.

Note: Linked category tiles include an arrow ( ) so you can easily

distinguish them from regular category tiles.

• Remove the F category tile by selecting it and then pressing the

DELETE key.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
82
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

4. Change the name of category E to Quarterly Growth, and name its

first item Rate. Your completed assumptions matrix should look like
this:

5. Save your model by clicking the Save Model button ( ).

Now that your model includes all of the categories and items related to unit
sales, you can add the data and logic necessary to perform the calculations.

Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

While it may seem like it took a while to get to this point, the practice of
planning and building a solid structure before adding data and formulas is
key to creating efficient models. The better the structure, the faster you can
construct formulas, and the fewer formulas you will need.

Note: If you are not building this model in one sitting and have there-
fore closed and reopened the BusinessPlan.model file, the names that Quantrix
generates for new matrices and category tiles (like matrix Matrix1 or
category F) may not match the names that are noted throughout this
chapter. Because you always rename these elements, this discrepancy will
have no effect on your end result.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
83
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

Adding Q1 Sales and Quarterly Growth Data

At this point in your business planning, you have developed the estimates
below. For each region, you are estimating unit sales for each product, along
with a quarterly growth rate.

Widget Gadget Gizmo Quarterly

Region
Units Units Units Growth

North 1200 1400 3500 104%

South 750 800 675 101%
East 1400 1300 1575 105%
West 500 475 435 102%

Add this data to your model by following these steps:

1. Add the Q1 unit sales data to the Sales Projections matrix.
• Click to select the North:Year1:Q1:Widget cell, type 1200, and
then press ENTER. Quantrix accepts the data and highlights the
next cell (North:Year1:Q1:Gadget). It also calculates the YTD
total for this region and product in the first year.
• Enter the rest of the Q1 unit sales data in the same manner.
Your matrix should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
84
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

Note: Quantrix responds differently to the ENTER key depending on

whether you are working with categories and items or entering data. For
details, see “Moving Between Cells and Items” on page 152.

2. Add the growth data to the Assumptions matrix.

• You can enter percentages either as decimals (so the North
value would be 1.04) or as percentages (104%). For now, enter
the data as percentages. Your Assumptions matrix should look
like this:

3. Save your model by clicking the Save Model button ( ).

Now you are ready to add the logic.

Constructing General Formulas

Traditional spreadsheet applications support cell-specific formulas, where you
write one formula to calculate the value for one individual cell. Cell-specific
formulas have this format:
=right side
The implicit value of the left side of the formula is the coordinate of the
particular cell whose value is calculated by the right side.
Quantrix supports general formulas, where by you write one formula to calcu-
late the values for a range of cells. General formulas have this format:
left side = right side
The explicit value of the left side is a range of cells whose values are calcu-
lated by the right side, as illustrated by your two summary formulas:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
85
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

This section walks you through the construction of a few basic formulas.
For full details on constructing, maintaining, and auditing formulas, see
Chapter 6.

Constructing a Quarterly Growth Formula

The first formula will calculate quarter-to-quarter growth. Calculations like
this one that recur over time are best performed by recurrence formulas. This is
a special type of general formula; for details see “Recurrence Formulas” on
page 179.

Note: If you are not familiar with the basic techniques for using the
formula editor, see“Using the Formula Editor” on page 46.

To construct this growth formula, follow these steps:

1. Think about the formula as this English sentence: “The value of this
quarter equals the value of the previous quarter, multiplied by the
quarterly growth rate.”
2. Construct your formula in the Sales Projections matrix using
Quantrix’s formula editor and natural language syntax.
• Click to select the Sales Projections matrix.
• Double-click the first field in the formula editor to make it
editable.
• Type the formula below, and then press ENTER.
Quarter[THIS]=Quarter[PREV]*Assumptions::Rate
Quantrix calculates the quarterly growth for the first year, and then
calculates the YTD total.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
86
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

Your model now has three formulas:

3. Reformat the new numbers to improve the presentation and elimi-

nate the decimal places.
• Drag to select all four Region items; this also selects all of the
cells.
• Click the Thousands Separator button ( ) in the standard
toolbar to remove all decimal places.
• Click the Decrease Decimal button ( ) in the standard
toolbar to remove all decimal places.
This recurrence formula illustrates several concepts:
• You can use category and item names (in this case, Quarter and
Rate) to specify a range of cells on both the left and right side of the
equation. For more information, see “Specifying Ranges” on
page 172.
• Recurrence formulas use special keywords (in this case, NEXT and
PREV) to define relative relationships between items. For more
information, see “Recurrence Formulas” on page 179.
• Formulas in one matrix can include categories, items, and data from
other matrices. In this example, the matrices share a linked category,
but this is not a requirement. For more information, see “Intermatrix
Formulas” on page 181.
• Because the matrices share the linked Region category, Quantrix can
automatically match the Region items; your formula doesn’t need to
explicitly reference the growth rate for each of the four regions. In
addition, because Rate has a unique name in its matrix, you don’t
need to include the name of its category in the formula. For more
information on linked categories, see “Using Linked Categories” on
page 125.
• Quantrix calculates formulas in the order that they appear in the
formula editor, and summary formulas are always last. For more
information, see “Calculation Order” on page 191.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
87
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

It also highlights some syntax usage:

• You enclose recurrence keywords in square brackets.
• You reference other matrices using this format:
matrix name::unique item name
• You use mathematical operators, such as *, in the same manner as
traditional spreadsheets.

Note: For a summary of syntax usage, see “Formula Syntax Tips” on

page 167.

Your model needs only one more formula in order to calculate the values
for the remaining years: a yearly growth formula.

Constructing a Yearly Growth Formula

Your quarterly growth formula stops at Q4 of Year1 for two reasons:
• The last item in the Quarter category (YTD) is calculated by a
summary formula. Because Quantrix always calculates summary
formulas last, it overrides the quarterly growth formula.
• The PREV keyword in your formula instructs Quantrix to use the
preceding Quarter item, which it does within the Year1 category
item. To instruct it to bridge the category items (i.e., to use a value
from another category item) you need to explicitly name the item.
To construct a formula that calculates the rest of the values, follow these
steps:
1. Think about the formula as this English sentence: “The value of the
first quarter of this year equals the value of the fourth quarter of the
previous year, multiplied by the quarterly growth rate.”
2. Add your formula.
• Click to select the first field in the formula editor, and then press
ENTER to insert a new formula field. Quantrix inserts the field,
numbers it 2, and highlights it.
• Double-click field 2 to make it editable.
• Type the formula below, and then press ENTER.
Q1:Year[THIS]=Q4:Year[PREV]*Assumptions::Rate
Quantrix calculates values for the remaining years.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
88
Adding Data and Constructing Formulas

Your Sales Projections matrix should look like this:

Using only four formulas, your model calculates the growth of unit sales for
three products in four regions over a three-year period. Next you will
expand this solid foundation to answer your questions.

Note: This model is identical to the sample model Forecasts3.model,

which you can open by choosing Help > Sample Models, and then
double-clicking Forecasts3.model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
89
Deriving the Answers

Deriving the Answers

In this section, you will estimate revenue and expenses, and then present
your conclusions in a P&L format.

Answering the Revenue Question

To answer the revenue question you will need to add pricing information
and create one additional formula.

Adding Price Information

1. Create a new assumptions matrix for your price information.
• Click the Insert Matrix button ( ) in the standard toolbar.
• Select the new matrix in the Model Browser tab, type Price
Assumptions, and then press ENTER.
• You can hide the formula editor by clicking its down arrow ( ),
as you will not write any formulas in this matrix.
Your Price Assumptions matrix should look like this:

2. Link the Product category from the Sales Projection matrix to the
Price Assumptions matrix.
• Position the Price Assumptions matrix so that you can still see
the Sales Projections matrix. Click and drag the Price
Assumptions matrix toward the lower, right-hand region of the
work area. When the region outline appears, release the mouse
and the matrix will snap into place.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
90
Deriving the Answers

• Drag the Product category tile from the Sales Projections

matrix into the row tray of the Price Assumptions matrix, and
position it to the left of the category tile that is already in the
row tray. When you release the mouse button, Quantrix adds
the three products and their total to this matrix.
3. Add your price assumptions for each product.
• Rename the other category tile that is in the row tray by
selecting it and then typing Assumption.
• Rename the one Assumption item Price by selecting the item
and typing Price.
• Enter the price of each product; a Widget is $12.50, a Gadget is
$11.25, and a Gizmo is $10.00.
• Format the price as currency by clicking one Price item, and
then clicking the Currency button ( ). Your matrix should
look like this:

4. In this matrix the total price of the products is irrelevant. Collapse

the Total summary item by selecting it and then clicking the
Collapse Item button ( ).
5. Remove the unused category tile from the column tray by selecting it
and then pressing DELETE.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
91
Deriving the Answers

Calculating the Revenue

To calculate the revenue and include it in the Sales Projections matrix,
follow these steps:
1. For each product in the Sales Projections matrix, break out sales
into units and revenue.
• Add a new category by selecting the Product category tile and
then pressing ENTER
• Rename the new category tile by selecting it and typing Line
Item.
• Rename the new Line Item item by selecting it and typing
Units
• Add a revenue item by selecting Units, pressing ENTER, typing
Revenue, and then pressing ENTER again. Your Sales Projec-
tions matrix should look like this:

Note that Quantrix is using the Q1 data that you previously entered
in order to calculate the Unit values. When you add a new category
and items, Quantrix assigns existing input values to the first item
only. However, it assigns existing general formulas to all items, as you
can see by the zeros in the Revenue rows.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
92
Deriving the Answers

2. Because revenue values are calculated differently than unit values, you
need to edit the existing formulas so they apply to units only.
• Double-click formula field 1, click to insert your cursor at the
beginning of the formula, type the phrase below, and then press
ENTER.
In Units,
Be sure to include the comma, just as you would in an English
sentence.
• Double-click formula field 2 and add the same text to it.
Your formulas should look like this:

3. Add a formula that calculates the revenue values.

• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 2, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the new field.
• Construct a formula that multiplies the number of units by the
prices that are in the Price Assumptions matrix. Type the
formula below, and then press ENTER.
Revenue=Units*Price Assumptions::Price
Because the matrices share the Product linked category,
Quantrix automatically matches the product items with their
unique prices when calculating the revenue values for each
product.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
93
Deriving the Answers

4. Format the Sales Projections matrix to make it easier to read.

• Format the revenue as currency by clicking one Revenue item,
and then clicking the Currency button ( ). Many cells now
contain pound symbols (#####) which indicate that the values
are too large to display in the cells.
• Reduce the size of the values; remove the decimal places by
clicking the Decrease Decimal button ( ) twice.
• Increase the size of the cells; drag to select Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and
YTD, and then drag the right edge of YTD to the right.
Your model now calculates the revenue and should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
94
Deriving the Answers

Estimating Expenses and Gross Profit

Now you will estimate your expenses and combine them with your revenue
projections to calculate gross profit.

Calculating Cost of Goods Sold

Each product has a different cost. Because cost has the same relationship to
products as price (one price and one cost value per product), you can store
both values in the same assumptions matrix. From there you can write one
formula that calculates the cost of goods sold (COGS) across all products,
regions, and timeframes.
To calculate the cost of goods sold (COGS), follow these steps:
1. Add cost to the Price Assumptions matrix.
• Add a new item to the Assumption category by clicking one
Price item, and them pressing ENTER.
• Rename the new item by typing Cost and then pressing
ENTER.
• Enter the cost of each product; a Widget is $7.50, a Gadget is
$6.25, and a Gizmo is $5.00.
Your Price Assumptions matrix should look like this:

2. Add a COGS line item to the Sales Projections matrix.

• Add a new item to the Line Item category by clicking one
Revenue item, and then pressing ENTER.
• Rename the new item by typing COGS and pressing ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
95
Deriving the Answers

3. Add a formula to the Sales Projections matrix that calculates the

COGS values.
• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 3, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the field.
• Construct a formula that multiplies the number of units by the
costs that are in the Price Assumptions matrix. Type the
formula below, and then press ENTER.
COGS=Units*Price Assumptions::Cost
Quantrix calculates the COGS values for each product.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
96
Deriving the Answers

Calculating Gross Profit

Your model contains all of the information that you need to take a first look
at gross profit. To calculate gross profit, follow these steps:
1. Add a gross profit line item to the Sales Projections matrix.
• Add a new item to the Line Item category by clicking one
COGS item, and then pressing ENTER.
• Rename the new item by typing Gross Profit and then
pressing ENTER.
2. Add a formula to the Sales Projections matrix that calculates the
gross profit.
• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 4, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the field.
• Construct a formula that subtracts COGS from revenue. Type
the formula below, and then press ENTER.
Gross Profit=Revenue-COGS
Quantrix calculates the gross profit values for each product.
3. Create a summary item that totals all regions.
• In the Sales Projections matrix, select the Region category
tile.
• Click the Sum button ( ). Quantrix adds a summary item
named Sum of Region below the West item.
• Rename the new item by selecting Sum of Region and typing
All Regions and then pressing ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
97
Deriving the Answers

Improving the Clarity of the Model

Take a moment to review the entire model:

Building models is an iterative process. Because you have extended the roles
of some of the matrices, their original names have some deficiencies:
• The Assumptions matrix does not contain all assumption informa-
tion for our model; the name is too general.
• The Price Assumptions matrix has a more specific name, but it
doesn’t communicate that it also contains cost information.
• The Sales Projections matrix projects not only sales, but also gross
profit.
You can rename these components without the risk of introducing errors
because Quantrix will automatically update all formulas that reference them.
To rename the components, follow these steps:
1. Rename the Assumptions matrix.
• In the Model Browser, click to select Assumptions, type
Growth Assumptions, and then press ENTER. Quantrix
renames the matrix in the Model Browser, in the matrix title
bar, and in all formulas that reference it.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
98
Deriving the Answers

• Inspect the formulas in the Sales Projections matrix to see the

change.
2. Rename the Price Assumptions matrix to indicate that it also
contains cost assumptions.
• In the Model Browser, click to select Price Assumptions, type
Price/Cost Assumptions, and then press ENTER.
• Inspect the formulas in the Sales Projections matrix that refer-
ence the Price Assumptions matrix. Quantrix changed both
the matrix name and the formula syntax. Because the new name
contains a special character (/), its name needs to be surrounded
by single quotes as shown:

3. Rename the Sales Projections matrix to indicate that it is calculating

gross profit. In the Model Browser, click to select Sales Projec-
tions, type Sales & Gross Profit Projections, and then press
ENTER. Your Model Browser should look like this:

About Operating Expenses

To model operating expenses, you would typically create another set of
matrices that provide a similar level of detail to the ones you have created to
model sales and gross profit. However, to expedite this exercise, you will
simply add some top level operating expenses when you create the final
matrix, a profit and loss statement.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
99
Deriving the Answers

Creating a Profit and Loss Statement

Now you will create a profit and loss statement (P&L) that summarizes your
findings.

Building the Structure

1. Create a new summary matrix named P&L.
• Click the Insert Matrix button ( ) in the standard toolbar.
• Select the new matrix in the Model Browser tab, type P&L, and
then press ENTER.
2. You need one category for all of the P&L line items; rename the
category tile that is in the row tray by selecting it, typing P&L Item,
and then pressing ENTER.
3. Add items to the P&L Item category.
• Select the first item in the P&L Item category, type Revenue,
and then press ENTER six times; this creates 5 additional items.
• Give the five additional items these names: COGS, Gross
Profit, Marketing, Personnel, Other. Your matrix should look
like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
100
Deriving the Answers

4. Link the Year and Quarter categories from the Sales & Gross
Profit Projections matrix to the P&L matrix.
• Position the P&L matrix so that it is beside the Sales & Gross
Profit Projections matrix. Click and drag the P&L matrix
toward the right-hand region of the work area. When the region
outline appears, release the mouse and the matrix will snap into
place.
• Drag the Year category tile from the Sales & Gross Profit
Projections matrix into the column tray of the P&L matrix,
and position it above the category tile that is already in the
column tray. When you release the mouse button, Quantrix adds
the three years to this matrix.
• Link the Quarter category in the same way, and position it
below the Year category tile.
• Remove the other category tile from the column tray by
selecting it and then pressing DELETE. Your matrix should
look like this:

5. Group the operating expenses to simplify your formulas.

• Drag to select the Marketing, Personnel, and Other items.
• Click the Group Items button ( ). Quantrix creates a new
item group named P&LItem7.
• Rename the item group Operating Expenses.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
101
Deriving the Answers

Your matrix should look like this:

6. Total your operating expenses.

• Select Operating Expenses, and then click the
Sum button ( ). Quantrix adds a summary item named Sum
of Operating Expenses below the Other item.
• Rename the new item Total.
7. Add the item that will give you your answer: net profit before tax.
• Click to select Operating Expenses, and then press ENTER.
Quantrix inserts a new item named P&LItem8 that is not a
member of the Operating Expenses item group.
• Rename the new item Net Profit Before Tax.

Note: To add a new item to an existing item group, you must select an
item within the group and then press ENTER.

The structure of the P&L and supporting matrices is now in place. You are
ready to complete it by adding formulas.

Adding P&L Formulas

For some formulas, you can use the mouse to select values from other
matrices; this saves time and reduces the risk of typing errors.
1. Add a formula that adds the total revenue to the P&L matrix.
• In the P&L matrix, double-click formula field 1 to make it
editable.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
102
Deriving the Answers

• In the P&L matrix, click to select the Revenue item. Quantrix

adds Revenue to the formula field.
• In the formula toolbar, click the = button to add the = sign.
• In the Sales & Gross Profit Projections matrix, click to select
All Regions.
• Press and hold down the SHIFT key, and then click to select
first the All Regions:Total item, and then the All
Regions:Total:Revenue item.
• Click the title bar of the P&L matrix to bring it to the top. The
formula should look like this:

• Press ENTER to complete the formula.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
103
Deriving the Answers

2. Add a formula that adds the total COGS to the P&L matrix.
• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 1, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the new field.
• Begin to construct the formula. Type COGS= but do not press
ENTER.
• In the Sales & Gross Profit Projections matrix, click to select
All Regions.
• Press and hold down the SHIFT key, and then click to select
first the All Regions:Total item, and then the All
Regions:Total:COGS item.
• Check the formula field, and then press ENTER to complete the
formula.
3. Add a gross profit formula using the information that is now in the
P&L matrix.
• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 2, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the new field.
• Type the formula below, and then press ENTER.
Gross Profit=Revenue-COGS
4. Before you add formulas to calculate operating expenses, enter this
Q1 data: Marketing is 10,000, Personnel is 66,500, Other is 7,500.
5. Add two formulas to calculate operating expenses.
• Insert two new formula fields by clicking to select formula field
3 and then pressing ENTER twice.
• Double-click formula field 4 to make it editable.
• Construct a formula that assumes a growth rate of 101% each
quarter. You need to constrain it with an In clause so Quantrix
knows not to apply the formula to other items in the P&L Item
category. Type the formula below, and then press ENTER.
In Operating Expenses, Quarter[THIS]=Quarter[PREV]*101%
• Double-click formula field 5 to make it editable.
• Construct a formula to explicitly tell Quantrix that it should roll
over the Q4 data from the previous year when calculating
quarter to quarter growth across years. Type the formula below,
and then press ENTER.
In Operating Expenses, Q1:Year[THIS]=Q4:Year[PREV]*101%

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
104
Deriving the Answers

6. Add a formula to calculate the bottom line: the net profit before tax.
• Insert a new, editable formula field by clicking to select formula
field 5, pressing ENTER, and then double-clicking the new field.
• Construct a formula that subtracts total operating expenses
from gross profit. Type the formula below, and then press
ENTER.
Net Profit Before Tax=Gross Profit-Operating Expenses.Total
7. Format all P&L items as currency with no decimal places.
• Drag to select all items in the P&L category.
• Click the Currency button ( ).
• Click the Decrease Decimal button ( ) twice.
You now have your answer:

Your company turns a profit in Q4 of year 2, and profitability increases

throughout year 3. You are ready to share these preliminary results.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
105
Sharing the Answers

Sharing the Answers

Quantrix offers several options for sharing excerpts from your model. In
this section, you will first prepare a chart and three tables for sharing, and
then use them to create a Presentation Canvas. You can then copy and paste
the presentation into a word processor document or a Microsoft Power-
Point® slide. You will also create a web page that you can either post to a
web site or email as an attachment.

Preparing Model Excerpts

You want to share two excerpts:
• the P&L for each of the three years
• a chart that shows year-to-year growth
To create the excerpts, follow these steps:
1. Format the P&L.
• Click to select the P&L matrix.
• Click the Insert Table View button ( ), you will make all of
your formatting changes in this view to preserve the original
data matrix.
• Choose View > Outline.
• Add a double underline above Net Profit Before Tax by
selecting the Total item, choosing the solid line from the drop-
down menu of the Line Pattern button ( ), and then
choosing a double underline style from the drop-down menu of
the Line Spacing button ( ).
• Move the Year category tile to the filter tray so you can view
each year individually.
• In the Model Browser, click to select P&L - View 1 and
rename the view Presentation. It should now read P&L -
Presentation.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
106
Sharing the Answers

Your table should look like this:

2. Create a chart.
• Click to select P&L - Presentation.
• Click the Insert Chart View button ( ).
• In the Model Browser, rename the new chart 3 Year P&L.
• In the 3 Year P&L chart view tab, rearrange the category tiles
so the Year tile is in the row tray, the P&L Item tile is in the
column tray and the Quarter tile is in the filter tray.
• Choose YTD from the drop-down menu of the Quarter tile.
Your chart view should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
107
Sharing the Answers

Preparing the Presentation

To create the Presentation Canvas, follow these steps:
1. Click the Insert Presentation Canvas button ( ).
2. Rename Canvas1 in the model browser by clicking on it and typing in
Financial Presentation.
3. Insert a table view.
• Click the Insert Canvas Table View button ( ) from the
presentation toolbar.
• Choose P&L - Presentation from the Insert Canvas Table
View dialog box and press OK. You can also double-click P&L -
Presentation to select it. The cursor will look like this ( ).
• Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the presentation
canvas and click once to insert the table view.
Your presentation should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
108
Sharing the Answers

4. Insert a chart.
• Click the Insert Canvas Chart View button ( ) in the presenta-
tion toolbar.
• Choose P&L - 3 Year P&L from the Insert Canvas Chart View
dialog box and press OK. You can also double-click P&L - 3 Year
P&L to select it.
• Move the cursor to just below the table view and click once to
insert the chart.
5. Insert a table.
• Click the Insert Canvas Table View button ( ) from the
presentation toolbar.
• Double-click Growth Assumptions matrix from the Insert
Canvas Table View dialog box to select it.
• Move the cursor to the upper right corner of the presentation
canvas, beside the P&L table view, and click once to insert the
matrix.
Your presentation should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
109
Sharing the Answers

6. Arrange items on the presentation canvas.

• Click on the chart to expose the blue resize handles.
• Select the bottom right corner handle and drag to the right so the
chart is centered under the two tables.
7. Insert titles.
• Click the Add text box button ( ) in the presentation toolbar.
• Position the cursor above the P&L - Presentation table in the
presentation canvas, click to add the text box.
• Type P&L in the text box and press Enter.
• Click on the text box and drag to center over the table
• Repeat this process to add the titles Assumptions and 3 Year
P&L over the Growth Assumptions table and chart respectively.
8. Format elements of the presentation.
• Use the cursor drop-down menu in the presentation toolbar to
change the cursor mode to Interaction.
• Click to select the Net Profit Before Tax item and choose the
Bold button ( ) from the format toolbar.
• Position your cursor over the right-hand edge of the item Net
Profit Before Tax so the cursor changes to a resize arrow ( ).
• Double-click to automatically resize the column width to accom-
modate the data.
• Click on the x-axis of the chart and choose the Bold button ( )
from the format toolbar.
9. Change assumptions.
• In the Growth Assumptions table of the presentation, click to
select the rate cell for the region West.
• Type 125 to change the rate to 125%. The P&L table and chart
will change to reflect this new assumption.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
110
Sharing the Answers

Your finished presentation should look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
111
Sharing the Answers

Presenting the Canvas in a Word Processor

You can include the canvas in a word processor by copying and pasting the
canvas from the model browser.
To copy and paste the canvas, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click on Financial Presentation.
2. Choose Edit > Copy View.
3. Open the word processor document.
4. Paste the canvas as a bitmap image. For example, if you are using
Microsoft Word, choose Edit > Paste Special, click the Paste radio
button, click to select Bitmap, and then click the OK button.
5. Save the document using the word processor’s Save command.

Exporting the Model to a Web Page

You have the option of exporting all of your matrices to a single web page
where you can view each matrix individually and rearrange the category tiles.

Note: The Presentation Canvas is not part of the HTML export at this
time.

To export the model, follow these steps:

1. Choose File > Export > Web (HTML) Document...
2. Click to Select all of the components of the file except for the P&L
- Presentation.
3. Click the Finish button.
4. In the Save dialog box, type a new name in the File name field and
then press ENTER.
5. View the new file by double-clicking it or dragging it onto a web
browser application. It will look like this:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 3: Planning & Building a Model
112
Sharing the Answers

For information on options available in the Web (HTML) Document

export wizard, see “Exporting to a Web (.html) Document” on page 326.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Structure

Chapter 4
Working with Structure

About Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Using Matrices and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using Item Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Comparing Item Groups and Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

All financial models describe entities, their relationships and, often, how
these change over time. In traditional spreadsheet applications, you
reduce these elements to static labels and numbered cells. With
Quantrix, you explicitly build this structure and then have the opportu-
nity to manipulate the elements individually without affecting the
integrity of your logic or data. This chapter provides detailed instructions
for creating, changing, and manipulating structural elements.
 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
114
About Structure

About Structure
The collection of model elements, expressed to a particular level of granu-
larity, is called its structure. Quantrix helps you define and manipulate your
model’s structure by providing three organizational units:
• A category is the largest organizational unit; it contains items and item
groups. It is physically represented by Quantrix as a category tile.
• An item is the smallest unit; it is a single entity and must belong to a
category. An item appears as a labeled cell above a column or to the
left of a row.
• An item group is a set of items that you want to operate on collectively;
by definition, item groups contain one or more items and must
belong to its items’ category. An item group appears above the
columns or to the left of the rows that contain the set of items that
comprise the group.
You express this structure in modeling matrices. A finished model that is
both flexible for the author and informative to others includes several
matrices.
This chapter covers advanced topics and provides comprehensive instruc-
tions for working with structural elements. For a detailed introduction to
structure and its underlying concepts, see “Understanding Structure” on
page 74.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
115
About Structure

Understanding Item Instances

Each category contains one or more items. When your model has only one
category, Quantrix displays that category and one instance of its items.
Consider the example in Figure 4-1, where Product is the category and
Television, DVD, and Camera are its items.

Figure 4-1. One category and one item set

When you add a second category and its items, you have a two-dimensional
table and Quantrix still displays only one instance of each item.

Figure 4-2. Two categories and one item set for each

When you add a third category, however, Quantrix needs to replicate the
items from that category in order to display the multi-dimensional matrix as
a two-dimensional table.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
116
About Structure

In the example in Figure 4-3, Inventory is the third category, and it contains
two items—Stock and Backorder.

Figure 4-3. Three categories, one with three item sets

In order to communicate the dimensions beyond the original two, Quantrix

displays multiple instances of each item set (Stock and Backorder) that
belongs to the dimension or category (Inventory). When you have three
categories, Quantrix repeats only one item set. For each additional category,
Quantrix repeats its item set as shown in the four-category matrix in
Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4. Four categories and multiple item sets

Quantrix displays only one item set for the two categories whose tiles are at
the far left of the row tray and at the top of the column tray. When you
rearrange the category tiles, you change the number of item set instances for
a particular category.
It is important to understand that only one item set exists per category; the
instances are just additional displays of the same items. When you edit an
item, Quantrix reflects the change everywhere that it displays the item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
117
Using Matrices and Views

Naming Structural Elements

To avoid confusion and to simplify your formulas, you may want to follow
these naming guidelines:
• Give matrices plural names.
• Give categories, items, and item groups singular names.
• Within a model, give each matrix and category a unique name.
• Within a matrix, give each item and item group a unique name.
While you can have different items share the same name, when you write
formulas that reference them you need to provide additional information.
For example, say you have a Unit category that has a Total item which is
different from the Total item in the Revenue category. When you write a
formula to reference one of the Total items, you need to prepend it with
the category name and a period (.) as follows:
Unit.Total
Revenue.Total
The alternative is to give each Total item a unique name; in this example,
you might choose Total Unit Sales and Total Revenue.

Using Matrices and Views

Quantrix models are comprised of four types of components:
• A modeling matrix contains a table and its corresponding formulas.
• A table view is permanently linked to an existing matrix; it displays
only the table portion of that matrix, and does not include a formula
editor.
• A chart view is permanently linked to an existing matrix; it displays
the table portion of the matrix, plus a chart that Quantrix generates
from the table.
• A presentation canvas that is created by adding views and objects to a
blank canvas.
Quantrix displays all of a model’s components in the Model Browser tab.
For more information, see “Understanding the Parts of a Quantrix Model”
on page 30.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
118
Using Matrices and Views

Adding Matrices and Views

You can add a modeling matrix in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Matrix button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Matrix.
• Click to select any matrix in the Model Browser and press ENTER.
Quantrix opens a new modeling matrix tab and adds a corresponding matrix
entry to the Model Browser.
To add a table or chart view of a particular matrix, follow these steps:
1. Select the matrix from which you want to generate the view by either
clicking its tab or clicking its name in the Model Browser.
2. Create the type of view that you want.
• To create a table view, either choose Insert > Table View or click
the Insert Table View button ( ).
• To create a chart view, either choose Insert > Chart View or click
the Insert Chart View button ( ).

Renaming Matrices and Views

When you rename a matrix or view, Quantrix changes the name in the
Model Browser and in the title bar of the component’s tab. It also changes
the name and makes necessary syntax adjustments in all formulas that refer-
ence it.
To rename a matrix or view, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, double-click the name of the matrix or view
that you want to change.
2. Type a new name and then press ENTER.

Tip: For clarity, give matrices and views plural names. See also “Naming
Structural Elements” on page 117.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
119
Using Matrices and Views

Deleting Matrices and Views

When you delete a view, Quantrix removes the view’s name from the
Model Browser and removes its tab from the model window. When you
delete a matrix, Quantrix removes the matrix and all of its views.
To delete a matrix or view, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the name of the matrix or view
that you want to delete.
2. Delete the component in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Press DELETE.

Caution: When you delete a matrix, you invalidate all intermatrix

formulas that reference it.

Copying and Pasting Matrices and Views

You can copy a matrix or view and then paste it into the same Quantrix file
or another Quantrix file.
To copy and paste a matrix, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the name of the matrix or view
that you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy.
3. Choose the Quantrix file into which you want to paste the copy.
4. In the Model Browser, click to select a matrix and choose Edit >
Paste.
5. Your copy will appear below the selected matrix.
To copy a matrix from one model to another, with both model files open,
simply click and drag the matrix from one Model Browser to the other.
If you are pasting a matrix into the same model, the categories of the pasted
matrix will be linked with the categories of the copied matrix. This allows
you to duplicate a matrix while insuring that future modifications to the
categories are synchronized between the original and the copy of the matrix.
To unlink categories in a copy of a matrix, see “Removing a Category Link”
on page 128.

Tip: To easily copy a matrix and all of its related views, place all of the
components in one folder and Quantrix will allow you to copy and paste the

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
120
Using Categories

folder and all of its contents to the same model or click and drag to another
Quantrix model file.

Note: To copy and paste matrices into other applications, see

“Displaying Models in Other Applications” on page 324.

Creating Views from Canvas Objects

You can copy a table view created on the presentation canvas to the Model
Browser of the same model as a new table view. Create a table view from a
presentation canvas table in one of these ways:
In layout mode on the Presentation Canvas, click to select the table view to
copy.
• Right-click on the table view and choose Table > Insert Table
View. A new table view is created in the Model Browser under the
associated matrix.
• Hold the CTRL key and drag the table view to the desired location in
the Model Browser.

Mac OS X: Hold down the ALT key while dragging the table view to
the Model Browser.

Using Categories
Each category in your model represents a different dimension, and each
category contains one or more items or item groups. For more information,
see “About Structure” on page 114.
Categories are physically represented by category tiles that you can add,
modify, and delete.

Adding Categories
You can add categories to any modeling matrix, table view, or chart view.
When you add a category to a matrix, Quantrix automatically adds it to all
table and chart views that are linked to the matrix. Likewise, when you add a
category to a view, Quantrix automatically adds the category to that view’s
matrix, and to all other views that are linked to the same matrix.
To add a category, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile closest to where you want the new
category tile to appear.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
121
Using Categories

2. Add the category in one of these ways:

• Choose Insert > Category.
• Click the Insert Category button ( )in the Model Toolbar.
• Position your cursor over the selected category, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Insert Category from the pop-up
menu.
• Highlight any category and press ENTER.
Quantrix inserts the category below the selected tile when it is in the column
tray, and to the right of the selected tile when it is in the row tray. Quantrix
also creates the first item in the category and labels it with the category’s
name, followed by the number 1.

Tip: To insert a category tile above a tile that is in the column tray or to
the left of a tile that is in the row tray, select the tile, and then press
SHIFT+ENTER.

Renaming Categories
When you change the name of a category, Quantrix also changes its name in
all formulas that reference the category; this ensures that your formulas
remain valid.
To change the name of a category, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile that you want to rename.
2. Type a new name, and then press ENTER.

Tip: For clarity, give categories singular names. See also “Naming Struc-
tural Elements” on page 117.

Deleting Categories
You can remove categories from any modeling matrix, table view, or chart
view. When you remove a category from a matrix, Quantrix automatically
removes the category, along with all items and item groups that belong to it,
from all table and chart views that are linked to the matrix. Likewise, when
you remove a category from a view, Quantrix automatically removes the
category from that view’s matrix, and from all other views that are linked to
the same matrix.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
122
Using Categories

Caution: When you remove a category, you invalidate all formulas

that reference it.

You can use either the Cut or Delete command to remove a category from
its table. When you use Cut, Quantrix places the category on its clipboard
so you have the option of pasting it into another layout tray or table. When
you use Delete, Quantrix discards the category so it is not available for
pasting.
To remove a category and place it on the clipboard, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile that you want to remove.
2. Cut the category in one of these ways:
• Click the Cut button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Cut.
• Position your cursor over the selected category tile, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+X.
To permanently remove a category, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile that you want to remove.
2. Delete the category tile in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected category tile, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Copying and Pasting Categories

You can copy a category (and all of its items) and paste it into other layout
trays in the same table or into a layout tray in a different table. If you paste
the category into the same table, it is a new category; it is not linked to the
original category and Quantrix will not update it with changes that you make
to the original. If you paste the category into another table in the same
model, the category is automatically linked to the original and any changes
made to the category will be reflected in all matrices and views containing
the linked category.

Note: To create a linked category instead, see “Using Linked Catego-

ries” on page 125.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
123
Using Categories

To copy a category tile to Quantrix’s clipboard and then paste it into a

layout tray, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile that you want to copy; note that you
can select only one category tile at a time.
2. Copy the category tile in one of these ways:
• Click the Copy button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Copy.
• Position your cursor over the selected category tile, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+C.
3. Click to select the category tile closest to where you want to paste the
copied tile.
4. Paste the category tile in one of these ways:
• Click the Paste button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Paste.
• Position your cursor over the selected category tile, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+V.
Quantrix pastes the category below the selected tile when it is in the
column tray, and to the right of the selected tile when it is in the row
tray. It labels the pasted tile with the copied tile’s name, followed by
the number 1.

Moving Categories to Change the Layout

You move category tiles between the row, column, and filter trays to change
the layout of tables in matrices and views. The layout is unique to each table;
when you change the layout of a table in a matrix, Quantrix does not change
the layout of the tables in any of its linked views, or vice-versa. See also
“Rearranging Category Tiles” on page 44.
Quantrix displays only one item set for the two categories whose tiles are at
the far left of the row tray and at the top of the column tray. See also
“Understanding Item Instances” on page 115. When you place a tile in the
filter tray, Quantrix removes all but one of that category’s items from the
view. See also “Filtering Based on Categories” on page 124.
To move a category tile, follow these steps:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
124
Using Categories

1. Position your cursor over the grey handle ( ) of the category tile.
2. Press and hold down your left mouse button, and drag the tile into a
new position in its current layout tray, or into a different layout tray.
3. When you see an outline of the category tile in the correct position,
release the mouse button. Quantrix changes the layout of the table.

Filtering Based on Categories

You move category tiles into the filter tray when you want to simplify (or
filter) the display of a table in a matrix or view. When you move a category
tile into the filter tray, Quantrix displays only one of that category’s items in
the table. It also adds to the category tile a drop-down menu that contains
all of the category’s items. Consider the example in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5. Choosing from a drop-down menu in the filter tray

When you choose an item from the drop-down menu, Quantrix displays the
values for that item only.

New: You can navigate through items in the filter tray using the arrow
keys on your computer. Highlight the appropriate category in the filter tray
and navigate up and down as appropriate.

You can move more than one category tile into the filter tray, and then
choose from all of the drop-down menus to filter the data in different ways.
For example, if you move two category tiles into the filter tray, each of
which contains three items, you can choose from the menus to create nine
(3 items * 3 items) variations.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
125
Using Categories

Figure 4-6. Filter tray with multiple drop-down menus

Note: When you print a matrix that has a filtered table, Quantrix prints
one page for each way you can filter it. In the example above, if you choose
to print all results, Quantrix will print nine pages. See also “Printing One or
All Variations of a Filtered Table” on page 311.

Using Linked Categories

When two matrices need access to the same category, you can link the
category (and all of its items) across the matrices. For example, say one
matrix forecasts unit sales of six different products, and another matrix
contains the pricing information for each product. Both matrices need the
Product category and its items, so you would first create a Product
category in one matrix, and then create a linked Product category in the
other matrix.
Linked categories have some unique attributes:
• They work in all directions; when you change the category (for
example, by adding or removing items) in one matrix or view,
Quantrix automatically reflects the change in all other matrices and
views that share the linked category.
• When you delete a linked category from a matrix, Quantrix removes
it from that matrix and its views but does not remove it from other
matrices and their views.
• Even though you create linked categories by first creating a standard
category and then linking it to other matrices, Quantrix treats all
linked categories the same way; it doesn’t consider the first standard
category to be the original or master copy.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
126
Using Categories

• They share only structure (items and item groups), not data; when
you create a linked category tile, Quantrix adds its structure and
corresponding empty cells to your table. For a summary item,
Quantrix also adds the formula that corresponds to the item.
Linked categories are especially powerful when you combine them with
intermatrix formulas (where a formula in one matrix uses data from another
matrix; see also “Intermatrix Formulas” on page 181).
When two matrices share a linked category, both matrices contain the items
that belong to the linked category, but each matrix has unique data that
corresponds to each item. When you write an intermatrix formula, Quantrix
can automatically match data in one matrix to the correct items in the other
matrix. This greatly simplifies your formulas and reduces the risk of intro-
ducing errors.
For example, consider the matrices in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7. Matrices with linked categories

The first and second formulas in the Sales Projections matrix use the
linked category Region to match the four separate Rate values from the
Growth Assumptions matrix to the North, South, East, and West items
in the Projections matrix. This formula doesn’t need to include the linked
category’s name or any of its items.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
127
Using Categories

Creating Linked Categories

To create a linked category, follow these steps:
1. Open both matrices that will share the linked category.
2. In the matrix that already contains the category, click to select the
category tile.
3. Drag the category tile to any layout tray in the other matrix. When
Quantrix pops the destination tab to the top and shows a faint
outline of the category tile that you are dragging, release the mouse
button. Quantrix adds the category tile to the matrix, and changes the
tiles in both matrices to indicate that it is a linked category.

Note: You can also link a category to another matrix by dragging the
category tile to the other matrix’s icon in the Model Browser.

Tip: Hover the cursor over a linked category tile to view a list of the
matrices it is linked to.

Link Existing Categories

To create a link between two existing categories, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the category tile you wish to link.
2. Choose Link Category...
3. Choose the category to link to from the Link Category dialog box.
This is a list of available categories that contain the same number of
items as the category you have chosen to link.

Note: The category you chose to link will assume the name of the
category you chose to link to.

Deleting Linked Categories

When you delete a linked category from a matrix, Quantrix removes it from
that matrix and its views but does not remove it from other matrices and
their views.
To remove a linked category, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the linked category tile that you want to remove.
2. Delete the linked category tile in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
128
Using Categories

• Position your cursor over the selected linked category tile, press
the right mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up
menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Removing a Category Link

You can remove the link between two previously linked categories by
following these steps:
1. Right-click the linked category tile that you want to unlink.
2. Choose Unlink Category from the pop-up menu.

Synchronize Views

New: With linked categories in the filter tray, it is possible to synchronize

the item displayed between multiple views. Changing the item displayed in
the filter tray of one view will change the item displayed for all other views
that contain the same linked category in the filter tray.

To align the items displayed in categories residing in the filter tray, choose
View > Synchronize Views to place a checkmark next to Synchronize
Views. To disable this option and enable independent view filtering, choose
View > Synchronize Views to remove the checkmark.

Category Notes
You can add a note to any category by following these steps:
1. Select the category.
2. Add a note in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Edit Note
• Right-click and choose Edit Note
• Open the Notes section of the Format Toolbox and press the
Add... button
3. Type your preferred text in the text box and select OK.
A blue triangle will appear in the upper left of the category indicating that
there is an attached note.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
129
Using Items

Note: To edit an existing note, select the category with the attached
note and follow the steps above. In the Notes section of the Format
Toolbox, press the Edit... button instead of Add...

To delete a note:
• Select the category.
• Choose Edit > Delete Note or right-click and choose Delete Note.
You can view the note when you hover the cursor over the triangle.

Tip: Select View > Show Notes to reveal the blue triangle in all elements
that contain notes. By selecting View > Show Notes again, you can hide all
notes.

To learn about printing notes, see Figure 10-7 on page 310.

Using Items
Each item and item group in your model belongs to one category. When
your model includes more than two categories, Quantrix may display each
item or item group in more than one location. See also “Understanding
Item Instances” on page 115.
Items are represented as row and column headings that you can add,
modify, and delete.

Adding Items
When you add a category, Quantrix automatically adds the first item that
belongs to the category. You then explicitly add more items to the category,
and Quantrix automatically displays the correct number of instances of each
item.
To add an item to a category, follow these steps:
1. Click to select an item in the category to which you want to add a
new item.
2. Add an item in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Item button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Item.
• Press ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
130
Using Items

Quantrix inserts the item below the selected item when it labels a
row, and to the right of the selected item when it labels a column.
Quantrix labels the item with the category’s name, followed by the
next available sequential number.

Tip: To insert an item above or to the left of an item, select the item, and
then press SHIFT+ENTER. To insert multiple items at once, right-click on
the preceding item in your matrix and choose Insert items..., then type the
desired number into the Number of items field and press ENTER.

Tip: You can use the name and position of items in your formulas. See
“Using Item Names and Positions in Formulas” on page 186.

Renaming Items
To change the name of an item, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the item that you want to rename.
2. Type a new name, and then press ENTER.

Tip: For clarity, give items and item groups singular names. See also
“Naming Structural Elements” on page 117.

Automatic Naming
If you change an item to one of several names (or patterns) that Quantrix
recognizes, then add a new item after that item, Quantrix supplies the new
item with a name logically in sequence with the previous item. The
following is a list of the automatic name sequences Quantrix supports:
• a,b,c...
• 1,2,3...
• January, February, March...
• Jan, Feb, Mar...
• Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday
• Mon, Tue, Wed...
• 1999, 2000, 2001...
• January 2003, February 2003, March 2003...January
2004, February 2004...
• <name> 1, <name> 2, <name> 3...

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
131
Using Items

Deleting Items
When you remove an item, you also remove all of its cells. You can use
either the Cut or Delete command to remove an item from its category.
When you use Cut, Quantrix places the item on its clipboard so you have
the option of pasting it into another location in the same category. When
you use Delete, Quantrix discards the item so it is not available for pasting.
To remove an item and place it on Quantrix’s clipboard, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item(s) that you want to remove.
2. Cut the item in one of these ways:
• Click the Cut button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Cut.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+X.
To permanently remove an item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item(s) that you want to remove.
2. Delete the item in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Copying and Pasting Items

You can copy an item (and all of its cells) and paste it into a different
location within its category.
To copy and then paste an item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item(s) that you want to copy.
2. Copy the item in one of these ways:
• Click the Copy button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Copy.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+C.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
132
Using Items

3. Click to select the item closest to where you want to paste the copied
item.
4. Paste the item in one of these ways:
• Click the Paste button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Paste.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+V.
Quantrix pastes the item below the selected item when it labels a row, and
to the right of the selected item when it labels a column. Quantrix labels the
pasted item with the copied item’s name, followed by the next available
sequential number.

Note: When you copy data from Quantrix or another program to paste
into a matrix, the new data will automatically take on the format of the desti-
nation area.

Re-ordering Items
You can change the order of items in a category by using the Edit > Move
Up, Edit > Move Down, Edit > Move Left, and Edit > Move Right
menu items. If you wish to reorder items by their names alphabetically,
either in an ascending (A-Z) or descending (Z-A) order, follow these steps:
1. Select the items that you want to sort.
2. Sort the items in one of these ways:
• To sort them from A-Z, choose Edit > Reorder Items >
Ascending (A..Z).
• To sort them from Z-A, choose Edit > Reorder Items >
Descending (Z..A).
• To manually re-order items, select the item you want to reorder,
hold the CTRL key down and use the up ( ), down ( ), left ( ),
and right ( ) arrow keys to move the item.

Formatting Items
You use the standard formatting tools to change the appearance of these
item properties:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
133
Using Items

• background color (See “Adding Colors to Items and Cells” on

page 221.)
• font face, style, size, color, and alignment (See “Customizing Fonts”
on page 206 and “Aligning Text” on page 207.)
• line style (See “Customizing Lines” on page 219.)
Your ability to move category tiles and therefore move the corresponding
items has an impact on item formatting.
Consider the example in Figure 4-8, where, in order to draw attention to
televisions that are supplied by Trends, you changed the background color
and applied bold formatting.

Figure 4-8. Item formatting in a table

Say you want to change the layout of this table by swapping the positions of
the Product and Supplier category tiles.

Figure 4-9. Item formatting after moving category tiles

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
134
Using Items

Quantrix retains this context and the appropriate formatting of the cell data.
However, because the Trends item is now in the lefthand column and
applies to all Product items, Quantrix does not apply the formatting to it.
Now consider the example in Figure 4-10 where a thick horizontal line
delineates the border of each Product item.

Figure 4-10. Item formatting to delineate product items

When you move the Supplier category tile to the column tray, the line
delineates the border of each Store item. In this context, the line may or
may not be useful.

Figure 4-11. Item formatting retained, but meaning is changed

When you then move the Supplier category tile into the filter tray, the line
disappears altogether because there is no longer a visual context in the table
for the lines.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
135
Using Items

Figure 4-12. Item formatting removed when context is removed

Item Notes
You can add a note to any item by following these steps:
1. Select the item.
2. Add a note in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Edit Note
• Right-click and choose Edit Note
• Open the Notes section of the Format Toolbox and press the
Add... button
3. Type your preferred text in the text box and select OK.
A blue triangle will appear in the upper left of the item indicating that there
is an attached note. You can view the note when you hover the cursor over
the triangle.
To delete a note:
• Select the item.
• Choose Edit > Delete Note or right-click and choose Delete Note.
For more information about notes, see “Category Notes” on page 128 and
Figure 10-7 on page 310.

Collapsing and Expanding Items

You can collapse or completely hide an item or item group without deleting
it from your model; you can later expand or re-expose it.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
136
Using Items

Collapse Items
To collapse or completely hide an item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item(s) that you want to collapse.
2. Collapse the item in one of these ways:
• Click the Collapse Item button ( ).
• Choose Format > Item > Collapse.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Collapse from the pop-up menu.
Quantrix reduces the item to a thin line.
3. To completely hide the collapsed item, choose View > Hide
Collapsed Items. Quantrix hides the item and places a checkmark
next to this menu command.
To expose all hidden collapsed items, un-select View > Hide Collapsed
Items. Quantrix displays the collapsed items as thin lines, and removes the
checkmark next to this menu command.

Tip: To collapse all but a single item or group of contiguous items, select
the items that you want to keep exposed, right-click a choose Collapse
Other from the pop-up menu.

Expand Items
To expand a collapsed item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the collapsed item(s) that you want to expand.
2. Expand the item in one of these ways:
• Click the Expand Item button ( ).
• Choose Format > Item > Expand.
• Position your cursor over the selected item, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Expand from the pop-up menu.
You can expand all collapsed items in a matrix or view, regardless of cursor
position, by choosing View > Expand All.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
137
Using Items

Hide Empty Rows or Columns

As a convenient way to handle large sparsely populated matrices, Quantrix
can automatically collapse rows and columns that are completely blank or
have only zeros. To set a view to collapse empty rows and columns, follow
these steps:
1. Select the view in which you wish to have empty rows and columns
automatically collapsed.
2. Choose View > Hide Empty > Rows and Columns.
3. Optionally choose View > Hide Collapsed Items.
With this view option set, the view will automatically update as calculated
values change or as new data is input.

Caution: Selecting the Hide Empty option will also collapse rows
and columns with zeros.

Note: If you have the Hide Collapsed Items option on, creating a new
item in that view may not show the newly created item if it is entirely empty.
To show the new item, you must turn off the Hide Collapsed Items option
by choosing View > Hide Collapsed Items again.

Quantrix can automatically collapse only rows or only columns that are
completely blank or have only zeros. Choose View > Hide Empty >
Rows or View > Hide Empty > Columns, to access these options.

Using Summary Items

Quantrix can automatically calculate a summary value for all items in a
category or item group. For presentation purposes, it is often useful to
create a summary item, and then use the Collapse ( ) command to hide
the individual items but keep the summary exposed.
When you add a summary item to your table, Quantrix adds its corre-
sponding default formula to the end of the formula editor. The formula for
this item may be edited and changed if desired.
When you link a category that includes a summary item to another matrix,
Quantrix adds both the item and its default formula to the matrix.
The seven types of summary items are defined in Table 4-1.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
138
Using Items

Table 4-1. Summary item types

Type Calculation

Sum Adds all items and displays the total value

Counts all numerical items and displays the number of
Count
items
Counts all items, including text items, and displays the
Count A
number of items.=
Average Calculates and displays the mean value
Max Compares all values and displays the highest one
Min Compares all values and displays the lowest one
Product Multiplies all values and displays the product

Creating Summary Items

To create a summary item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the category tile or item group name whose items you
want to summarize.
2. Add the summary item in one of these ways:
• Click the Sigma portion of the Summary Item button ( ) to
create a Sum summary item.
• Click the arrow portion of the Summary Item button and then
choose a summary item type from the menu.

• Choose a summary item type from the Insert > Summary Item
rollover menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
139
Using Items

• Position your cursor over the selected category tile or item group,
press the right mouse button, and then choose a summary item
type from the Insert Summary rollover menu in the pop-up
menu.

Deleting Summary Items

When you delete a summary item, Quantrix removes its heading and cells
from your table, and removes its corresponding formula from the formula
editor. To delete a summary item, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the summary item that you want to delete.
2. Delete the summary item in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected summary item, press the
right mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up
menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Using Item Descriptors

Many types of models require that items contain additional descriptive
information. For instance, you might want to display a units of measure for
a Fuel line item. While you could put the units directly into the item name
(e.g. Fuel in liters), Quantrix gives you the option of attaching information
such as this in Item Descriptors. Item Descriptors are additional fields of
information about an item that can optionally be displayed in a Modeling
Matrix or Table View.

Creating Item Descriptors

To create an item descriptor, follow these steps:
1. Select the Category for which you wish to install the Item Descriptor.
2. Choose View > Item Descriptors > Manage Descriptors...
3. Click the Add button.
4. Type a name for the Item Descriptor (e.g. Units of Measure).
5. Click the Done button.
Quantrix will display a column of Item Descriptor fields next to the items in
the selected category.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
140
Using Items

Figure 4-13. New Item Descriptors

Setting Item Descriptor Values

Item Descriptor values can be set by selecting the Item Descriptor field and
typing a new value. To remove a value from an Item Descriptor field, select
the field and type DELETE.
You can also add item descriptors during a DataLink import. See “Setting
Groups and Descriptors in Data Link Wizard” on page 349.

Tip: You can access item descriptor names in your formulas. See “Using
Item Names and Positions in Formulas” on page 186.

Formatting Item Descriptors

Item Descriptors use the format of the items they belong to. You can
override the formatting for an Item Descriptor by following these steps:
1. Select an Item Descriptor value. Note that the entire column of the
Item Descriptor is highlighted.
2. Apply formatting options using the Toolbar or the Format Toolbox.

Showing / Hiding Item Descriptors

You can shown or hide Item Descriptors in each Modeling Matrix, Table
View, or Chart View. To toggle the visibility of an Item Descriptor in a
view, follow these steps:
1. Click on the category containing the Item Descriptor you wish to
show / hide.
2. Choose View > Item Descriptors. Note the list of Item Descrip-
tors in the menu above the Manage Descriptors... menu item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
141
Using Item Groups

3. Select from the View > Item Descriptors menu the name of the
Item Descriptor you wish to show / hide.

Deleting Item Descriptors

You may delete an item descriptor and all of the values it contains by
following these steps:
1. Click on the category containing the Item Descriptor you wish to
delete.
2. Choose View > Item Descriptors > Manage Descriptors...
3. Click on the name of the Item Descriptor you wish to delete.
4. Click the Remove button.
5. Click the Done button when you are finished adding and removing
Item Descriptors.

Using Item Groups

Once you have created several items, you may want to group them without
dividing them into separate categories. For example, say your Revenue
Source category includes five items. When you first add the category and
items your model might look like Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14. Items before grouping

You decide that you’d like to be able to easily differentiate between product
and service revenue, so you create two groups.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
142
Using Item Groups

Figure 4-15. Items after grouping into two item groups

You can also create an item group that contains both items and other item
groups. When items are organized into an item group, you can operate on
them collectively in these ways:
• To refer to the item group in a formula, use the group’s name.
• To select all items in a group, click the group’s name; you can then
choose any command to affect all items in the group.

Tip: Select the group heading only, to apply formatting to only the group
heading and not the subitems or cells contained in the group, by holding the
control key while clicking on the group heading.

You rename, format, collapse, expand, and create summary items for item
groups just as you do items. The following sections describe the unique
ways in which you work with item groups.

Creating an Item Group

To create an item group, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the items that you want in the item group.
2. Create the group in one of these ways:
• Click the Group Items button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Group Items.
Quantrix inserts the item group to the left of the selected items when
it labels a row, and above the selected items when it labels a column.
Quantrix labels the item group with the category’s name, followed by
the next available sequential number.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
143
Using Item Groups

Adding Items to an Item Group

To add items to an item group, follow these steps:
1. Click to select an item in the group to which you want to add a new
item.
2. Add an item in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Item button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Item.
• Press ENTER.
Quantrix inserts the item below or to the right of the selected item.
Quantrix labels the item with the name of the item above or to the
left, followed by the next available sequential item number.

Tip: To insert an item above or to the left of an item, select the item, and
then press SHIFT+ENTER.

You can also add item groups during a DataLink import. See “Setting
Groups and Descriptors in Data Link Wizard” on page 349.

Ungroup Grouped Items

When you ungroup an item group, Quantrix removes the item group but
not the items that it contains. To delete all of the items in an item group, see
“Deleting Item Groups” on page 143.
To ungroup an item group, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item group that you want to ungroup.
2. Ungroup the items in one of these ways:
• Click the Ungroup Items button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Ungroup Items.
• Position your cursor over the selected item group, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Ungroup Items from the pop-up
menu.

Deleting Item Groups

To delete all of the items in an item group, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the item group that you want to delete.
2. Delete the item group in one of these ways:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 4: Working with Structure
144
Comparing Item Groups and Categories

• Choose Edit > Delete.

• Position your cursor over the selected item group, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Comparing Item Groups and Categories

Often you can use categories and item groups to achieve the same goal.
Both of these organizational units let you:
• visually organize related items
• summarize a set of related items by creating a summary item
• build formulas that refer to a collection of items with a single name
When deciding which one to use, consider these differences:

Changing the You can easily change the layout of a category by dragging its
layout category tile within and between layout trays. To change the layout
of an item group you must change the layout of the category to
which it belongs.
Collapsing You can collapse an item group and have no visual effect on other
items categories or items. You can collapse a category, but you often get
the unwanted effect of collapsing other categories at the same time.
Linking
You can link a category across matrices. You can only link an item
between
group across matrices if you link the category to which it belongs.
matrices
Increasing Categories define large dimensions that are very different from each
granularity other. Within a category, you may want to create subsets or group-
ings of like items. Rather than creating new categories for these
groupings, it is often more understandable and efficient to organize
them into item groups.
Automatically When you add a new category, Quantrix expands each existing
adding item category to include all instances of the new category’s items.
instances Quantrix does not expand item groups to include the new items.
Likewise, when you add a new item group, it effects only the
category to which it belongs. See also “Understanding Item
Instances” on page 115.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 5: Working with Data

Chapter 5
Working with Data

About Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Selecting Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Moving Between Cells and Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sorting and Filtering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Quantrix stores your model’s data in cells that belong to items and item
groups. This chapter describes the different types of cells, shows you how
to select and move between cells, and provides detailed instructions on
how to add, modify, and delete cell data.
 Chapter 5: Working with Data
146
About Cells

About Cells
The cells in the table of a modeling matrix, chart view, or table view contain
your model’s data. Each cell belongs to one or more items, and each item
can belong to one or more item groups or categories. For more information,
see “Understanding Structure” on page 74.
Models consist of two cell types:
• Calculated cells contain data that is generated by a formula.
• Input cells contain data that you enter manually.
Cells can contain either numbers or text strings, and you can format the data
in a variety of ways.

Identifying Calculated and Input Cells

To make input cells look different from calculated cells, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the matrix or view whose input cells you want to
identify.
2. Choose View > Show Input Cells. Quantrix adds a small green
triangle to the upper right-hand corner of each input cell, as shown in
Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1. Visually identifying input cells

To remove the triangles, choose View > Show Input Cells again.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
147
About Cells

To check which cells a particular formula calculates, follow these steps:

1. Click to select the matrix in which you are interested.
2. Click to select the formula in the formula editor whose calculated
cells you want to identify. Quantrix highlights those cells.

Note: A particular cell’s data can be calculated by more than one

formula; the calculation order determines which formula calculates the final
value that Quantrix displays. For more information, see “Calculation
Order” on page 191. Quantrix highlights a cell even when its formula is not
the one that provides the final value.

To determine which formula calculates a particular cell’s value, follow these

steps:
1. Click to select the matrix in which you are interested.
2. Click to select the cell whose formula you want to identify. Quantrix
highlights the formula in the formula editor.

Note: When the cell’s value is calculated by more than one formula,
Quantrix highlights only the formula that provides the final value. See also
“Eclipse Notification” on page 194.

Overriding Values in Calculated Cells

To override the value of a calculated cell, you need to construct a new
formula. Often you want to override a single cell’s value. Rather than
changing the general formula that calculates it, you can construct the new
formula by following these steps:
1. Click to select the calculated cell whose value you want to override.
2. Type an equal sign (=). Quantrix creates a new formula field and
starts a formula with the cell’s name as the lefthand side.
For example, if the cell was named J Jax:Stock:Mall:Television,
Quantrix would start the formula like this:
J Jax:Stock:Mall:Television=
3. Complete the formula, and then press ENTER. Quantrix calculates a
new value for that cell only.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
148
Selecting Cells

Using the Cell Pop-Up Menu

You can press the right mouse button to see a pop-up menu when your
cursor is over a cell. The menu contains the following commands:
1. Editing: Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete
2. Formatting: Format Toolbox, Conditional Format..., and
Constrain Input...
3. Tools: Dependency Inspector and Bind to
You can also use the pop-up menu to add notes to cells. For more informa-
tion about notes, see “Category Notes” on page 128 and Figure 10-7 on
page 310.

Selecting Cells
You select a cell to:
• apply a new format to its data
• edit its data
• build a formula that calculates its value
Quantrix lets you select one or more cells by their structure (for example, all
cells that belong to an item) or by their physical location (for example, all
cells in a particular column). To apply a format or edit data, you may select
by either structure or physical location. However, to build general formulas,
you typically select by structure.

Selecting All Cells in a Matrix or View

You can select all of the cells in a Matrix or a View by selecting one cell and
then choosing Edit > Select All. To clear all selection in a Matrix or a
View, choose Edit > Select None.

Selecting Cells by Item or Item Group

To select all cells that belong to a particular item or item group, follow these
steps:
1. Click the item name or item group name. Quantrix selects the name
and all of its cells.
2. If you want to format the cell contents differently from the item or
item group name, you can constrain the selection.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
149
Selecting Cells

• To deselect the name so only the cells remain selected, choose

Edit > Select Cells Only.
• To deselect the cells so only the name remains selected, choose
Edit > Select Item Only.

Tip: To select only an item name, press and hold down the CTRL key,
and then click to select the item.

Selecting Cells by Category

To select all cells in a particular category, click to select the first item in the
category, press and hold down the SHIFT key, and then click to select the
rest of the category’s items. Quantrix selects all item names and their cells.

Selecting a Structural Subset of Cells

You use the SHIFT key to limit a selection to a subset of cells but still
retain the structural information. Consider the matrix in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2. Matrix with no items selected

To select only those Gadgets in the North and South regions, follow these
steps:
1. Click to select Gadget. Quantrix highlights all four instances of this
item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
150
Selecting Cells

Figure 5-3. Selecting all instances of an item

2. To limit the selection to only the Gadgets in North and South,

press and hold down the SHIFT key, and then click North and
South. Quantrix deselects the Gadgets in East and West, and
faintly highlights North and South.

Figure 5-4. Selecting some instances of an item

The general rule is to first select the entire item or item group, and then limit
the selection by selecting other items or item groups.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
151
Selecting Cells

Note: If you later rearrange category tiles so the item or item group that
limited your selection no longer provides enough context, Quantrix discards
any formatting that you may have applied. See also “Formatting Items” on
page 132.

Selecting an Arbitrary Range of Cells

To select a single cell, click the cell.
You can select a contiguous range of cells in one of these ways:
• Press and hold down the mouse button over the first cell, and then
drag to select the others.
• Click the first cell, press and hold down the SHIFT key, and then
click the last cell in the range.
You can extend your selection of cells by using the keyboard shortcuts
shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1. Selecting and extending a range

To: Press these keys:

Extend selection up one cell SHIFT+up arrow ( )

Extend selection to first row SHIFT,ALT+up arrow ( )
Extend selection up one page SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend selection down one cell SHIFT+down arrow( )
Extend selection to last row SHIFT,ALT+down arrow( )
Extend selection down one page SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend selection one left SHIFT+left arrow ( )
Extend selection to the first cell ALT+SHIFT+HOME
SHIFT,ALT+left arrow ( )
Extend selection to first column
or SHIFT+HOME
Extend selection one page left SHIFT,ALT+PAGE UP
Extend selection one right SHIFT+right arrow ( )
SHIFT,ALT+right arrow ( )
Extend selection to last column
or SHIFT+END

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
152
Moving Between Cells and Items

To: Press these keys:

Extend selection one page right SHIFT,ALT+PAGE DOWN

Note: The ALT key is used frequently to select ranges of cells and
move between cells and items. You should press and hold the ALT key
while pressing the key that follows it.

Moving Between Cells and Items

You can change which individual cell is selected by using either the arrow
keys or the TAB key as shown in the table below. To undo an edit to data in
a cell, you can press the ESCAPE key.

Table 5-2. Moving between cells and items

To: Press this key:

Enter value and move down one cell Down arrow( )

Enter value and move up one cell Up arrow ( )
Enter value and move right one cell Right arrow ( ) or TAB
Left arrow ( ) or
Enter value and move left one cell
SHIFT+TAB
Move to first row ALT+up arrow ( )
Move to last row ALT+down arrow( )
Move to first cell ALT+HOME
Move to first column ALT+left arrow ( ) or HOME
Move to last column ALT+right arrow ( ) or END
Move up one page PAGE UP
Move left one page ALT+PAGE UP
Move down one page PAGE DOWN
Move right one page ALT+PAGE DOWN

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
153
Entering Data

Caution: You can also enter a value and move down one cell by
pressing ENTER. To change which item is selected, you can use only the
arrow and TAB keys. If you use ENTER or SHIFT+ENTER, you will insert
a new item.

Table 5-3. Moving or inserting items

To: Press this key:

Insert new item below ENTER

Insert new item above SHIFT+ENTER
CTRL+up arrow ( ) or
Move item up or left
CTRL+left arrow ( )
CTRL+down arrow( ) or
Move item down or right
CTRL+right arrow ( )

Note: Additional keyboard shortcuts can be found in Appendix A.

Entering Data
You can enter data into input cells of any modeling matrix, table view, or
chart view. You cannot directly enter data into a calculated cell; to change its
value, you must change the formula that calculates it. For more information,
see “Identifying Calculated and Input Cells” on page 146 and “Overriding
Values in Calculated Cells” on page 147.
To enter data into an input cell, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the cell.
2. Use the keyboard to type in the data.
3. Press ENTER. Quantrix accepts the data, and selects the next cell so
you can easily enter data into it.

Entering Numbers
You can enter numbers with or without any kind of formatting (such as
decimal places or thousands separators). Quantrix accepts the entry and
doesn’t attempt to apply any formatting; the only exception is that Quantrix
will delete a zero if it is the first character in your entry.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
154
Entering Data

Note: To retain a leading zero, you can either apply the Text format to
your number, use a special format such as zip code, or create a custom
format. For more information, see “Formatting Special Numbers” on
page 214.

Quantrix does not assume that, because you used a thousand separator in
the previous cell, you want one automatically inserted in the current cell.
To ensure consistency, it works well to apply formatting in one of these
ways:
• Before you enter your data, select all of the cells, and use the Format
Toolbox to apply a format to the empty cells. This way, as you enter
your data, Quantrix automatically applies the format that you
selected.
• After you enter your data, select various subsets of cells, and use the
Format Toolbox to apply the specific formats that you want. This
way you can be more selective about your formatting because the
data is already displayed.
For details on formatting numbers, see “Formatting Numbers” on
page 208.

Entering Dates and Times

The fastest way to enter dates is to use the month/day/year format. For
example, you could enter June 9, 2003 in any of these ways:
6/9/03
6/9/2003
When you enter a date of this format into a cell to which you haven’t
applied any special formatting, Quantrix recognizes it as a date for
calculations.
If you have previously applied a special date format to the cell, when you
enter the date as shown above, Quantrix automatically reformats it. For
example, say you have applied a format that includes the day of the week
and spells out the name of the month. You would enter this:
6/9/03
Then Quantrix would convert it to this:
Wednesday, June 9, 2003
The fastest way to enter times is to use the hour:minute:second format.
For example, you could enter 5:30 in any of these ways:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
155
Entering Data

05:30
05:30:00
Like dates, Quantrix accepts this type of entry as a time in cells with no
formatting applied. If you have previously applied formatting to the cell in
which you enter the time, the text you enter will assume the special
formatting.
For details on formatting dates and times, see “Formatting Dates and
Times” on page 213.

Entering Percentages
You can enter a percentage as a decimal or as a whole number followed by a
percent sign. For example, you could enter 25% in either of these ways:
.25
25%
When you use the second format, Quantrix recognizes it as a percentage
and performs its calculations accordingly. To change the percent format, see
“Formatting Percentages” on page 212.

Entering Fractions
You can enter a fraction as a decimal or as a fraction. For example, you
could enter one and one-fourth in either of these ways:
1.25
1 1/4
When you use the second format, Quantrix recognizes it as a fraction and
performs its calculations accordingly. To change the fraction format, see
“Formatting Fractions” on page 213.

Tip: To record a fraction of less than one to an unformatted cell, enter 0

space to return a faction value.

Entering Text Strings and Special Characters

You can enter text strings that include spaces and special characters directly
into cells; you use other special characters for shortcuts. The guidelines are
described below.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
156
Entering Data

Surrounding Special Characters with Single Quotes

In both cells and formulas, you need to surround phrases that Quantrix
should treat as text with single quotes. Specifically, use single quotes around
these types:
• phrases that start with digits, such as ‘401K’
• phrases that contain any of these characters:
!\“#&()*+,-./;<=>@[]^{|}

Using the Equal Sign (=)

When you enter an equal sign (=) as the first character, Quantrix assumes
that you want to build a formula; it adds a new formula field to the formula
editor that starts with the cell’s name. If this is not your desired result, you
must surround the phrase with single quotes.

Using the ESCAPE Key

When you press the ESCAPE key while editing data, Quantrix cancels your
edits and reverts to the previous value.

About Multiple Number Signs (####)

When data is too long to fit in a cell, Quantrix displays a string of number
signs instead. To see the data, you need to resize the cell. See also “Column
Width and Row Height” on page 223.

Constrained Input
You can constrain the type of data or the range of values a user may enter
into a cell by using the Constrain Input feature. By setting a constraint on
the input, you can ensure that the proper type of data and data in the proper
range of values is being inserted into the model.

New: Constrained Input applied to an item will be applied to all associ-

ated views, chart tables, and canvas tables that share the same core matrix.
Matrices and views share logic and structure; constrained input is consid-
ered a structural change.

To constrain input values, follow these steps:

1. Select the cells you wish to constrain. You can either select the cells
directly or select an item to select all of the cells in that item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
157
Entering Data

2. Choose Format > Constrain Input.

3. Select the type of constraint and set the parameters from the panel.
4. Click OK to apply the constraint.
The Input Constraint panel for the List value type looks like what is shown
in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5. Input Constraint Panel

The example above shows a User Defined List which restricts the values in
the selected cells to be month names. You may set one of the following
types of constraints:
Any: You can set any input without restriction. This is the default setting
for cells.

New:

Not Empty: You force the user to enter data in the cell by prohibiting
empty cells.

Figure 5-6. Not Empty constraint is not met

Note: Any matrix that has constrained input cells in an invalid condi-
tion will display a constraint not met indicator. This is shown as an orange
triangle in the corner of the cell and an orange circle on the matrix name in
its tab and in the Model Browser.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
158
Entering Data

Date: You can set a cell to only accept values that are equal to, between,
greater than or less than a user defined date.
List: The acceptable values for the cells are created in a user defined list. If
the Sort list in popup box is checked, the list will be alphabetized within
the input cells drop-down menu.

Tip: When entering data in a cell with a list constraint, Quantrix gives you
the option to automatically complete text from the existing list. Pressing the
TAB key will display the list of possible items. The list is created by the
characters that you have typed up to the point when the TAB key was
pressed. Use the mouse or up and down arrows to select the appropriate
entry from the list and press ENTER.

New:

Category: The acceptable values for the cells are defined by the list of items
from another category in the model. If the Track category item changes
box is checked, Quantrix will automatically change the cell values defined by
the constrained input as changes are made to the source category.
Decimal: You can set the acceptable values for a cell to be a decimal value
that is equal to, between, less than or greater than the specified decimal
value.
Integer: You can set the acceptable values for a cell to be an integer that is
equal to, between, less than or greater than the specified integer value.
Input Constraints may affect the way a cell is edited. If a List or Category
constraint is set, the cell will be edited with a drop-down menu. If a Date
constraint is set, the cell will be edited through a calendar interface.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
159
Editing Data

Editing Data
You can edit data in the input cells of any modeling matrix, table view, chart
view or presentation canvas. You cannot directly edit data in a calculated
cell; to change its value, you must change the formula that calculates it. For
more information, see “Identifying Calculated and Input Cells” on page 146
and “Overriding Values in Calculated Cells” on page 147.
You can edit the data in an input cell in one of these ways:
• Click a cell once to select all the data in the cell. When you enter new
data, it completely replaces the cell’s contents.
• Double-click a cell to get an insertion cursor. You can click to place
that cursor within the current data, and then modify a portion of it
rather than completely replacing it.

Undo and Redo Edits

Immediately after you use an editing command, you can reverse it in one of
these ways:
• Click the Undo button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Undo.
• Press CTRL+Z.
When typing data in a cell, you can revert to the value that was in the cell
before you started editing by pressing the ESCAPE key.
Immediately after using the Undo command, you can reverse it in one of
these ways:
• Click the Redo button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Redo.
• Press CTRL+Y.
You can also manually clear the undo stack by choosing Edit > Clear
undo.

Tip: Hovering the cursor over the Undo ( ) or Redo ( ) button

returns a brief description of the action to be taken.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
160
Editing Data

Deleting Data
You can use either the Cut or Delete command to remove data from a cell.
When you use Cut, Quantrix places the data on its clipboard so you have
the option of pasting that data into another cell. When you use Delete,
Quantrix discards the data so it is not available for pasting.
To remove data and place it on Quantrix’s clipboard, follow these steps:
1. Click or drag to select the cell(s) whose data you want to remove.
2. Cut the data in one of these ways:
• Click the Cut button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Cut.
• Position your cursor over the selected data, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Cut from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+X.
To permanently remove data, follow these steps:
1. Click or drag to select the cell(s) whose data you want to remove.
2. Delete the data in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected data, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press the DELETE key.

Find and Replace

The Find / Replace feature can find text strings and numbers in the entire
model, or just in the current view, and give you the option to replace them
with new values. You can access this command in one of two ways:
• Choose Edit > Find/Replace.
• Press CTRL+F.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
161
Editing Data

The Find/Replace menu looks like this:

Using this menu you can select the parameters of your search. After
entering the text you would like to find and the text you wish to replace it
with, you can use the following categories to narrow or expand your search.
Scope: You can choose to search all of the matrices and views in your
model or only the current view.
Options: The typical search options of case sensitivity, matching the whole
word, and wrapping are available.
Text Types: Here you can specify where Quantrix should search for the
desired text. You can perform searches of cell values, formulas, other text
(such as item descriptors and chart text annotations), notes/comments, and
names; including the names of items, categories, and matrices.

Copying and Pasting Data

You can copy data and paste it into other cells of the same matrix or of a
different matrix. However, if the matrix you are pasting into does not have
enough cells to contain the new data, all of the copied data will not paste.
Create enough items to hold the data before pasting.
To copy data to Quantrix’s clipboard and then paste it into other cells,
follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) whose data you want to copy.
2. Copy the data in one of these ways:
• Click the Copy button ( ).
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 5: Working with Data
162
Editing Data

• Choose Edit > Copy.

• Position your cursor over the selected data, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+C.
3. Select the cell(s) into which you want to paste the data.

Note: If you copied more than one cell, you can select either one cell as
the starting point of the paste, or select exactly the same number of cells
that you copied.

Caution: If you select more than one cell but less cells than you
copied, Quantrix will not paste all of the data.

4. Paste the data in one of these ways:

• Click the Paste button ( ).
• Choose Edit > Paste.
• Position your cursor over the selected data, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
• Press CTRL+V.

Tip: You can paste data into all of an items cells by selecting the item
before pasting as described above.

New: Press CTRL+ALT+V or right-click and choose Paste Values to

paste data into cells as values only without formatting applied.

For pasting cell data as new items, see “Copying and Pasting Items” on
page 131.

Copy/ Paste Uses Cell Formatting

When you copy data from another program to paste into Quantrix, the new
data will automatically take on the format of the Quantrix cells that you are
pasting into.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
163
Sorting and Filtering Data

Sorting and Filtering Data

Sorting Data
You can sort rows of data in a Matrix or View in one of two ways:
1. Select the column you wish to sort on by clicking in the item above
the column and choose Data > Sort Data > Sort Ascending (or
Descending).
2. Right-click on the selected item and choose Sort > Sort Ascending
or Sort > Sort Descending.
Quantrix will sort the rows in the view and indicate to which column the
sort is applied to. If the data changes due to recalculation or data-entry,
Quantrix will resort the view to maintain the sort order you have set. To
clear the sort order you can do one of three things:
• Select the item and choose Sort > Clear Sort from the Tools
menu.
• Right-click on the selected item and choose Sort > Clear Sort.
• Switch the view into Normal or Outline mode - choose View >
Normal or View > Outline.

Note: When you apply a sort to a Quantrix Matrix or View, it automat-

ically switches into Sort mode which appears differently than either Normal
or Outline mode. This allows Quantrix to sort across multiple dimensions in
a multidimensional matrix.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 5: Working with Data
164
Sorting and Filtering Data

Filtering Data
To filter data in a Matrix or View, follow these steps:
1. Select the column you wish to filter by clicking in the item above the
column.
2. Choose Data > Filter or right-click in the selected item and select
Filter from the pop-up menu.
3. Choose the type of filter from the sub-menu:
• Filter Top Ten... - filters the top or bottom 10 (or any number
you specify) values or percent of the values.
• Filter Custom... - filters based on the value of an Expression
See “Expression Concepts” on page 200 for more information
on how to use Expressions in your model.
• Filter Values... - filters to show only selected values.
4. Complete the parameters for the type of filter selected.
You may combine multiple filters if desired to further refine your data. Clear
the filters in one of the following ways:
• Right-click on each filtered column and choose Filter > No
Filter.
• Right-click on any column and choose Filter > Clear All Filters.
If you use the Clear All Filters method, you can restore the filter settings for
the view by right-clicking on any column and choosing Filter > Restore
Filters.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

pter 6: Working with Formulas

Chapter 6
Working with Formulas

About Quantrix Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Using Different Types of Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Understanding and Controlling Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Formulas add logic to the structure of your model and ultimately deliver
answers. This chapter helps you make the conceptual and mechanical
shift to constructing and auditing natural language general formulas . It
includes comprehensive descriptions of all formula types, detailed
examples of Quantrix’s unique syntax, an introduction to the function
library, and tips for troubleshooting and auditing your models.
 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
166
About Quantrix Formulas

About Quantrix Formulas

Traditional spreadsheet applications support only cell-specific formulas, where
one formula calculates the value of one individual cell. You then copy and
paste that formula across various ranges of cells to fill out your model.
When you later want to review or audit the model, you must select
individual cells to reveal, one at a time, the formulas that calculate each cell’s
value; once you have revealed a formula, it is sometimes difficult to under-
stand because it refers to cell coordinates.
Quantrix offers a different approach:
• Using the structure that you created with categories, items, and item
groups, you can build general formulas where a single formula calculates
the values for a logical range of cells.
• Using the meaningful names that you assigned to the structural
elements, you write formulas in a natural language syntax that is easy
to understand.
• Using Quantrix’s formula editor, you enter all formulas in a single
location, and Quantrix keeps this complete list of formulas available
at all times.
• Using Quantrix’s proactive formula status indicators in the Model
Browser and formula editor, you continuously audit and debug your
formulas and their order of calculation.

Understanding General and Cell-Specific

Formulas
General formulas calculate values for more than one cell, while cell-specific
formulas calculate the value for only one cell. Cell-specific formulas have
this format:
=right side
The implicit value of the left side of the formula is the coordinate of the
particular cell whose value is calculated by the right side.
General formulas have this format:
left side = right side
The explicit value of the left side is a range of cells whose values are calcu-
lated by the right side.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
167
About Quantrix Formulas

The right side can include:

• all or part of a category, item, or item group
• numbers
• text
• mathematical operators
• functions
For example, this formula assigns a value of 10 to all of the Widget item’s
cells:
Widget=10
General formulas eliminate the need to copy and paste formulas into
individual cells in order to calculate a range of values. They leverage the
structure of your model and significantly reduce the number of formulas
that you need to write and maintain. The range (left-hand side) of a general
formula includes all or part of a category, item, or item group. Both of the
examples below are general formulas.
Net Income=Gross Income-COGS
Net Income:Year1=Gross Income:Year1-COGS:Year1
The second formula is more constrained because it limits the range on both
sides of the equation to a smaller set of items; however, it is still calculating
values for more than one cell.
Cell-specific formulas may seem more familiar since they are the only type
of formula supported by traditional spreadsheets. When building structured
models, however, you will use them very infrequently.

Formula Syntax Tips

Throughout this chapter you will learn to construct different types of
formulas. Table 6-1 summarizes the special characters and combinations
that you will use. Another good resource for syntax examples are the sample
models that you can access by choosing Help > Sample Models.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
168
About Quantrix Formulas

Table 6-1. Special syntax characters, descriptions, and examples

Character Description Example

Within a range, separates structural

: elements that belong to different Gross Income:Year1:North
categories
Within a range of an intermatrix
formula, separates the name of the
:: Assumptions::Growth Rate:North
matrix from the names of its struc-
tural elements
Alone, refers to all of the items along
: : = 33 // Sets all cells to 33
all dimensions in the matrix
Enclose an external model file refer-
! ! ence in an intermodel formula. !source.model!Matrix1::YTD:Total
“Intermodel Formulas” on page 182
Separates the name of a structural
element (such as an item) from the
. Television.Color
name of its containing element (such
as a category)
Separates the left side from the right
= Net Income = Gross Income - COGS
side
Ends the In clause In Year1, Product=10
, Separates items in a Skip clause Product = 10, skip DVD, CD
Separates function arguments YTD=Sum(Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4)
Order mathematical operations Product=5*(DVD+1)
( )
Enclose function arguments YTD = Sum(Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4)
Enclose recurrence keywords Q1:Year[THIS]= Q4:Year[PREV]
[ ]
Enclose index formula item positions Year[2]:Net = Year[1]:Net*1.1
" " Enclose text strings Name = "Jones"
Enclose special characters (such as a
' ' 'Net-Income' = Gross Income - COGS
hyphen) in item names
.. Specify a contiguous range In Monday..Thursday, Hour=8
Begin a comment at the end of a
// Widget = 10 //Set constant value
formula line

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
169
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Character Description Example

/* */ Enclose a comment within a formula In Friday, Hour/*half day*/= 4

#and# Expand an if statement If(A1 = 1 #and# A2 = 2,1,0)
#or# Expand an if statement If(A1 = 1 #or# A2 = 2,1,0)

Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Each modeling matrix tab includes a formula editor; you enter and audit all
formulas for the matrix in this one location. Quantrix can keep all formulas
visible and proactively alert you to changes in the status of a formula.
This section covers the techniques that you will use to add, change, and
delete formula fields and formulas. For details on composing specific
formulas, see “Using Different Types of Formulas” on page 177.

Managing Formula Fields

In a new modeling matrix, the formula editor has one formula field. You
add a new field for every new formula that you want to construct. You can
edit, delete, and change the order of the fields at any time.

Inserting a New Formula Field

To insert a new formula field, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the formula field below which you want to add the
new field.
2. Insert the field in one of these ways:
• Press ENTER.
• Click the Insert Formula button ( ).
• Position your cursor over the selected field, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Insert Formula from the pop-up menu.
Quantrix inserts the new field, assigns it a field number that is one greater
than the field below which you inserted it, and renumbers the fields below it
so they are sequential.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
170
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Note: Quantrix uses the field’s number to determine calculation order.

See also “Calculation Order” on page 191.

Editing Formula Fields

To edit an existing formula, follow these steps:
1. Make the field editable in one of these ways:
• Double-click the formula field.
• Click to select it and start typing; when you type the first character,
Quantrix replaces the entire formula.
2. Edit the formula in one of these ways:
• To replace the entire formula, drag to select it, and then enter a
new formula.
• To edit part of the formula, click to place your insertion cursor,
and then either type or click buttons in the formula toolbar.
• To add a new line to the formula, click to place your insertion
cursor, and then press CTRL+ENTER.

Note: The formula editor uses different colors to highlight parts of the
formula. This syntax highlighting makes formulas easier to read while you
are editing them.

See “Auto Complete” on page 48 to learn how auto complete can save you
time when you have several formulas that use the same function, item, or
category.

Deleting Formula Fields

To delete formula fields, follow these steps:
1. Click and drag with your mouse to select the formulas to be deleted.
2. Delete the selected formulas in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected field, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press DELETE.
Quantrix deletes the formula fields, and renumbers the remaining fields so
they are still sequential.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
171
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Reordering Formula Fields

You change the order of formula fields when you want to change the order
in which Quantrix calculates the values. For details, see “Calculation Order”
on page 191.
To reorder one or more formulas, follow these steps.
1. Click to select the formula whose order you want to change.
2. Choose Edit > Move Up or Edit > Move Down as many times as
necessary to move the formula to the correct location.

Tip: As a shortcut, you can press CTRL+up arrow to move it up, and
CTRL+down arrow to move it down. For more shortcuts, see
Appendix A.

Adding Formulas, Functions, and Comments to

Formula Fields
You use both the mouse and keyboard to add formulas, functions, and
comments to formula fields.

Using the Formula Toolbar

The formula toolbar lets you access the Quantrix function library, and
provides shortcuts to typing many of the formula syntax elements.
To insert a function, follow these steps:
1. Make the formula field editable by double-clicking it, and then click
to place the insertion cursor where you want the function to appear.
2. Click the Function... button to see the Functions tab. The
Functions tab appears in the lower left.
3. In the Functions tab, choose a function, and then click OK.
Quantrix inserts the function.
For more details on inserting and using functions, see “Using Functions” on
page 188 and Appendix B.
To insert a syntax element, follow these steps:
1. Make the formula field editable by double-clicking it, and then click
to place your insertion cursor where you want the element to appear.
2. Click a syntax button on the formula toolbar. Quantrix inserts the
element at the insertion point.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
172
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Specifying Ranges
It is typically easier to use the mouse when specifying ranges of categories,
items, or item groups on either the left-hand or right-hand side of your
formula. You can add ranges to a formula using the mouse in one of these
ways:
• Select the range of categories, items, or item groups whose value you
want to calculate, and then press the = key. Quantrix adds a new
formula field that begins with the name of the selection.
• Double-click an existing formula to make it editable, place your inser-
tion cursor at the appropriate location within the field, and then use
the mouse to select the range.
If you choose to type in the ranges, be sure to:
• Spell the names exactly as they appear in the modeling matrix, other-
wise Quantrix will not recognize them and will report an error.
• Order the names so they’re easy to understand. For example, some
people prefer to go from general to specific—first the category, then
the item group, then the item.

Adding Comments
You can include comments in each formula field, either within or after the
end of a formula. Quantrix always displays the comments, but ignores them
when it performs calculations.
To add a comment within a formula, follow these steps:
1. Make the formula field editable by double-clicking it, and then click
to place your insertion cursor within the flow of the formula.
2. Begin the comment by typing /*
3. Type the comment.
4. End the comment by typing */
In the example below, the comment is half day.
In Friday, Hour/*half day*/=4

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
173
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

To add a comment after the end of a formula, follow these steps:

1. Make the formula field editable by double-clicking it, and then click
to place your insertion cursor at the end of the formula.
2. Begin the formula in one of these ways:
• To keep the comment on the same line as the formula, type //
• To add a new line for the comment, press CTRL+ENTER, and
then type //
3. Type the comment. You do not need to explicitly indicate the end of
the comment.
In the example below, the comment is Set constant value.
Widget=10 //Set constant value

Adding Notes
You can add a note to any formula by following these steps:
• Select the formula.
• Choose Edit > Edit Note or right-click and choose Edit Note.
• Type your preferred text in the text box and select OK.
A blue triangle will appear in the upper left of the formula indicating that
there is an attached note. You can view the note when you hover the cursor
over the triangle.
To delete a note:
• Select the formula.
• Choose Edit > Delete Note or right-click and choose Delete Note.
For more information about notes, see “Category Notes” on page 128 and
Figure 10-7 on page 310.

Using Mathematical Operators

Quantrix recognizes all standard mathematical operators. Table 6-2 lists the
operators and the order in which Quantrix applies them.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
174
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Table 6-2. Precedence and descriptions of mathematical operators

Precedence Operators Description

1 - Negation (operates on value to the right)

2 % Percent (operates on value to the left)
3 ^ Exponentiation
4 *,/ Multiplication and division
5 +,- Addition and subtraction
Equal, not equal to, less than, greater
6 =, <>, < , >
than
Less than or equal to, and greater than or
7 <= , =>
equal to
8 & Concatenation

Circular References
Consider this matrix:

Notice that formula 1 references A2 to calculate A1, while formula 2 refer-

ences A1 to calculate A2. This is an example of a circular reference. When
Quantrix detects a circular reference, it places a yellow warning diamond
next to the formulas involved, next to the matrix name in the tab, and

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
175
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

displays the error message “This formula is involved in one or more circular
references.”
In most cases, you will encounter a circular reference because there is a
mistake in your model. When that happens, you can study the formulas in
the matrix to determine the source of the error. One useful debugging
technique is to delete one formula at a time (using Edit > Undo to reverse
each deletion) to see if there is a particular formula that is causing the
circular reference.
In certain cases circular references are useful. A simple example is shown in
Figure 6-1 that iteratively calculates a square root using circular references.

Figure 6-1. Matrix showing Square Root Circular Reference

In a model without any circular references, automatic recalculations happen

whenever you make a change to the model. However, when a circular
reference is present, Quantrix may perform additional recalculation
iterations. To control how Quantrix handles circular reference
recalculations, choose Tools > Calculation > Calculation Settings...
from the menu. The following dialog appears as shown in Figure 6-2:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
176
Constructing Formulas in the Formula Editor

Figure 6-2. Quantrix Calculation Settings

Maximum iterations specifies the maximum number of times Quantrix

recalculates.
Value change is less than specifies the minimum amount that cells
affected by a circular reference must change between successive iterations in
order for recalculation iterations to continue.

Empty Cells
Quantrix allows you to specify how it should treat empty cells during calcu-
lation. Most spreadsheets treat empty cells as zeros in simple arithmetic
operations. In that case, 2 + <empty> will result in 2. However, in some
cases it is valuable to treat empties as if the data is missing - so 2 +
<empty> will result in <empty>, indicating that the result is also missing.
To configure your model to treat empty cells as missing, perform the
following steps:
1. Choose Tools > Calculation > Calculation Settings... from the
menu
2. Ensure the Treat empty cells as missing values checkbox is
checked

Tip: This setting can be used in large, sparse matrices to improve memory
utilization of the application. If you have calculations that would result in
zeros where the matrix is sparse, Quantrix will use less memory if those
zeros were empties instead. Another way to accomplish this is to use the
clearzero function in your formulas.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
177
Using Different Types of Formulas

Using Different Types of Formulas

Quantrix supports many different types of special formulas. This section
describes and provides examples of each type.

Constant Value Formulas

A constant value formula assigns a specific value to a range of cells. The
example formula below assigns a value of 8 to each item in the category
Hour.
Hour=8
While you could have entered this value manually into each item’s cell
instead, using a constant value formula (also known simply as a constant)
has these advantages:
• Because Quantrix assigns the value to every item in the Hour
category, there is no possibility of human data entry errors.
• If you want to change the value at a later time, you can do so in a
single location.

Constrained Formulas Using In and Skip

A constrained formula calculates a value for a range of cells that does not
include all items in a category or item group. There are two ways to
constrain a range:
• Use the In instruction on the left-hand side of the formula to specify
an inclusive, contiguous range.
• Use the Skip instruction on the right-hand side of the formula to
exclude one or more categories or items.
You can achieve the same result with either method; at times one method
yields a more readable formula. The first formula below is somewhat easier
to understand than the second.
In Year1, Sales:Quarter[THIS]=Sales:Quarter[PREV]*2
Sales:Quarter[THIS]=Sales:Quarter[PREV]*2 skip Year2..Year5
This example illustrates another difference between Skip and In. If you
later add Years 6-8 to your model, the first formula remains valid, while the
second does not.
In some cases, the constrained formula follows an unconstrained general
formula, and has the effect of creating an exception; it also creates an eclipse
condition.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
178
Using Different Types of Formulas

In the example in Figure 6-3, the general constant value formula assigns a
value of 8 to all items in the Hour category, and then the constrained
formula uses the In instruction to make Friday an exception.

Figure 6-3. Using the In instruction in a constrained formula

To achieve the same result, you can use the constrained formula with a Skip
instruction first, and then use the constant value formula second as shown
in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4. Using the Skip instruction in a constrained formula

Note that you need a comma (,) after the In clause. You do not need to
precede the Skip clause with a comma, but if your Skip instruction includes
a list of items, you must separate them with commas.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
179
Using Different Types of Formulas

Using the Insert Skips Command

The Insert Skips command automates the process of using the Skip
keyword to constrain formulas. To use the Insert Skips command, perform
the following steps:
1. Select one or more formulas that either eclipse or are eclipsed by
another formula (as described in the previous section).
2. Right click your mouse to display the pop-up menu and click on
Insert Skips.
Quantrix inserts the necessary Skip clauses to stop any eclipsing occurring in
the selected formulas. In doing so, Quantrix preserves the calculation order
in effect before you performed the Insert Skips command.

Recurrence Formulas
A recurrence formula is a general formula that references specific items (and
therefore their cells) by using their position relative to other items. Consider
this recurrence formula:
Quarter[THIS]= Quarter[PREV]*Growth Rate
It tells Quantrix to calculate the value for all cells in a given quarter by multi-
plying the previous quarter’s value by a growth rate. This formula will
calculate the values forward over all of the quarters in your model.
You can also use recurrence formulas to establish relationships between
categories and item groups. Consider the example below, where Year is a
category, and Q1 is an item that belongs to the Quarter category.
Year[THIS]:Q1=Year[PREV]:Q4*Growth Rate
It tells Quantrix to calculate the value for the first quarter of this year by
multiplying the previous year’s fourth quarter value by a growth rate. This
formula will calculate the values forward over all of the years in your model.
With this type of forward calculation, you always need to provide an initial
value because the first item doesn’t have a previous item. In the example
above, you could precede your recurrence formula with a constrained
formula like this one:
In Year 1, Q4=4800
You often use recurrence formulas when calculating growth, where the
value of one time period is a function of another time period. Recurrence
formulas are also convenient when calculating running totals.
Quantrix recognizes the recurrence keywords shown in Table 6-3.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
180
Using Different Types of Formulas

Table 6-3. Keywords for recurrence formulas

Keyword Definition

THIS The value that Quantrix is currently calculating

The corresponding item value before THIS (either to
PREV the left in a row or above in a column) in the category
or item group
The corresponding item value after THIS (either to
NEXT the right in a row or below in a column) in the
category or item group
FIRST The first item value in the category or item group
LAST The last item value in the category or item group

You can increase the flexibility of recurrence formulas by modifying the

keywords. By including a plus or minus sign inside the square brackets, you
can increment or decrement a keyword. For example, to specify the cell that
comes before the cell that PREV references, you’d type [PREV-1].
When using the keywords, follow these guidelines:
• Enclose each keyword in square brackets, e.g [NEXT].
• To speed up formula construction, use the THIS, PREV, NEXT,
FIRST, and LAST buttons in the formula toolbar.
• These keywords are not case sensitive, however, Quantrix will
automatically capitalize them.

Tip: You can leave out the category name and the[THIS]keyword if it
makes your formulas easier to read. Quantrix will assume [THIS] if it is
not present in the formula. For instance: Total Income = Total
Income:Period[PREV] + Income

Note: Recurrence formulas can only be applied to categories, not items.

Soft Recurrence
You can force a calculation of an item, when no previous or next value
exists, by using a soft recurrence formula. You create a soft recurrence by
adding a tilde (~) in front of the keyword, e.g. [~PREV]. Quantrix will
assume a value of zero when calculating the first or next item.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
181
Using Different Types of Formulas

Intermatrix Formulas
You can construct general and cell-specific formulas across matrices in your
model. Consider the example shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. Intermatrix formulas

The first and second formulas of the Sales Projections matrix use the Rate
from the Assumptions matrix. Note the double colon (::) in the syntax:
Assumptions::Rate
In other words:
matrix name::unique item name
To write a formula that references another matrix, you enter first the matrix
name, then a double colon, and then the items just as you would if they
resided in the current matrix.
When matrices share a linked category (Region in the above example),
Quantrix automatically matches its items across the two matrices. Your
formula simply refers to Rate, and Quantrix takes care of the rest. For more
information, see “Using Linked Categories” on page 125.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
182
Using Different Types of Formulas

Intermodel Formulas
You can construct formulas that refer to data in models contained in other
Quantrix model files using intermodel formulas. Consider the example
shown in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6. Intermodel formulas

The first formula in Destination.model’s Yearly Summary matrix refers to

the Source.model file using exclamation-marks around the relative file
name:
!Source.model!Sales Projections::YTD
or, in other words

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
183
Using Different Types of Formulas

!path to source file!matrix name::item names

You can specify the path to the source file either as a relative path to the
path of the destination model or as an absolute path.

Tip: You should first save the source and destination files before entering
the intermodel formula. This allows Quantrix to more exactly locate the
source file with which to establish the link.

Updating Links
To update the links you established with an intermodel formula, choose
Tools > Calculation > Update Links...
If more than one additional model is being accessed by an intermodel
formula, a dialog box will appear that will allow you to select which links
you wish to update. In a complex model with many links this process may
take a minute or two.

Index Formulas
You use index formulas to override Quantrix’s automatic item-matching.
Rather than letting Quantrix automatically match the first item of each
category with the first item of all other categories, you can explicitly specify
which items to match by using their absolute position numbers. Consider
this example:
Net Income=Gross Income-COGS
If you wanted Quantrix to calculate the values only for the first year, you
could use this index formula:
Year[1]:Net Income=Year[1]:Gross Income-Year[1]:COGS
To calculate the second year’s COGS value to be 105% of the first year’s,
you could use this index formula:
Year[2]:COGS=Year[1]:COGS*1.05

Summary Formulas
You use summary formulas to perform calculations which summarize data
along a dimension. The results of these calculations should not be included
in further summary calculations along that dimension.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
184
Using Different Types of Formulas

Figure 6-7. Group Summary Example Matrix

For instance, if you wanted to show the sum of the groups, you could write
formulas like this:
Group 1.Total = sum(summary(Group1))
Group 2.Total = sum(summary(Group2))
This would calculate the cells in the Total items underneath the Group1 and
Group2 to be the sum of the items in the groups. Then, if you wanted to
calculate the sum of all groups, you could write
All Total = sum(summary(Member))
Quantrix will automatically filter the group Total items because they are
calculated by summary formulas. This gives you more control to avoid
double-counting summaries in your calculations.

Tip: You can quickly and easily create summary formulas for groups or
categories by selecting the group or category and choosing Insert >
Summary Item then selecting the type of summary to create. This will
automatically create an additional item in the selected group or category and
insert a default summary formula in every matrix to which the category is
linked.

Using/As Formulas
You can utilize Using/As clauses in formulas to relate values that reside in
cells with item values that reside in dimensions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
185
Using Different Types of Formulas

For example, a Using/As formula can summarize a list of transactions into

distinct groupings. In Figure 6-8, Using/As is used to take transactional data
and summarize the sales figures into regions.

Figure 6-8. Using/ As

The Using/As formula is used on the right-hand side of a formula and can
be broken into three parts:
• sum(Sales Data::Amount) is the value you want to return. In this
case, the formula returns the values in the ‘Amount’ item in the Sales
Data matrix. Since the formula will return multiple values, the item is
wrapped in a Sum function to get the total for each region.
• USING Sales Data::Region defines the key to be matched against
the specified category in the Using/As clause.
• AS Region specifies Region as the category used to differentiate the
sales data.
The formula evaluates each line of the Sales Data Matrix, uses each transac-
tion’s Region item to summarize by the appropriate region. As in other
Quantrix formulas, when any item or matrix name referenced by the
formula is changed in the model, the formulas will change accordingly and
automatically. To view this model, choose Help > Sample Models from
the menu and pick the UsingAs.model.

Note: Using / As statements must come at the end of the formula. This
is true even when the Using / As statement only applies to part of a formula
containing many functions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
186
Using Different Types of Formulas

Tip: You can use multiple Using / As statements in a formula. The

proper syntax for this type of clause is: using Item1 as Category1,
Item2 as Category2

To see a more advanced Using/As example, open the sample model

Cinema Seating.model. This model utilizes Using/As to calculate cinema
seat bookings by a standard, luxury and disabled seat type. The model also
incorporates the favorite seat of a cinema club patron and categorizes by the
seat type. Choose Help > Sample Models from the menu to review this
model.

Using Item Names and Positions in Formulas

In model building, it is often useful to return the name or the position of the
item to the cells you are writing formulas for. To do this, you can use the #
and @ operators in your formulas. An example is shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9. Using # and @ in Formulas

The @ operator returns the textual representation of the item name to the
cell. The # operator returns the position of the item name in the category to
the cell.

Note: The operator @@ can be used in a formula to return the

category name.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
187
Using Different Types of Formulas

Tip: If an item descriptor is attached to a category, the item descriptor

can be accessed in a formula by using the syntax of
@categoryName{descriptorName}.

Table 6-4. Syntax for using names in formulas

Description Function

Returns the value of the item descriptor for DescriptorName @descriptor(Category,

for items along a Category in the current matrix. DescriptorName)
Concatenate the descriptor DescriptorName from Category1
@descriptor(Category1, Descriptor-
with the minimum unique name along Category2. These
Name) & @id(Category2)
functions can be mixed and matched.
Returns the minimum unique name for the item in its
@id(Category)
category.
Returns the category unique name for items along Category
(may not be unique in Matrix2, but guaranteed to be unique @id(Matrix2::Category)
in category).
Returns the item names along Category in the current matrix. @item(Category)
Returns the item name along Category1 concatenated (with a
@item(Category1) &
: separator) with the item name along Category2 in the
@item(Category2)
current matrix.
Returns the item names for all items in Category of Matrix2. @item(Matrix2::Category)
Returns the permutations of all items in Category1 concate- @item(Matrix2::Category1) & @item
nated with item in Category2 of Matrix2. (Matrix2::Category2)
Returns the group names one level above the items along
@level(Category,1)
Category in the current matrix.
Returns the group names (including the item name itself, but
@level(Category,*)
not the category name) along Category in the current matrix.
Returns the dot separated group names between 3 and 1
@level(Category,3,1)
levels above the items along Category in the current matrix.
Returns the group names one level above the items in
Matrix2 for the given Category, one entry for each items, may @level(Matrix2::Category,1)
repeat group names.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
188
Using Functions

Using Functions
Quantrix includes a library of functions that perform well-understood and
often complex calculations.

Adding Functions to a Formula

Every function accepts various arguments (such as numbers or text strings)
that it needs in order to have enough information to calculate and return a
value. Functions have this format:
function name(function argument, function argument)
For example, the round function requires two arguments: a value and a
number of decimal places. In the example below, it rounds the Profit value
to two decimal places.
round(Profit, 2)
You can add a function to a formula either by typing it into the formula
field, or by selecting it using the Functions tab. The Functions tab lists all
available functions by category, provides syntax and detailed information on
using each function, and provides a pointer to a sample model that shows
the function in action.
To add a function using the Functions tab, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the formula field to which you want to add a function.
2. Click the Function... button in the formula toolbar. Quantrix
displays the Functions tab.
3. Click to select from the Category list, and then click to select from
the Function list. Double-click the function name or click Insert
Function and Quantrix inserts the function and empty parentheses.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
189
Using Functions

Figure 6-10. Select Function dialog box

Library of Quantrix Functions and Sample

Models
For a full list and usage examples of Quantrix functions, go to Tools >
Functions to open the Functions tab. For more detailed information, see
Appendix B. To access the sample models that show the functions in action,
choose Help > Sample Models.

Select Function
The Select function is unique to Quantrix and can add very powerful
capabilities to your model. Select formulas are database-like formulas that
allow you to quickly select a range of data based on a key list. The proper
syntax for using the SELECT function is select(value_list,
key_list, lookup_value). The SELECT function is utilized in
Figure 6-11 and has 3 arguments.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
190
Using Functions

Figure 6-11. Select Function

1. Value List - The range of values the function can return. In this case,
the sales data located in the Year dimension of the Sales Data Matrix.
2. Key List - The lookup ‘keys’ associated with the values. In this case
the category for each item number in the Key Matrix.
3. Lookup Value - The lookup value to be used when evaluating the
key list.
In this example, the entire select statement is wrapped in a sum function
that summarizes sales figures for each category.
Variations of the SELECT function include selectbetween, selectlessthan, select-
greaterthan, selectlist and selects. See Appendix B for more information on these
functions.

Tip: You can often utilize Using/As instead of the SELECT function to
make your formulas more readable. See page 184 for more information
about Using/As.

Both the SELECT function and Using/As statements are demonstrated in

the Management Summary sample model found with your Quantrix installa-
tion. Choose Help > Sample Models from the menu to access the
Management Summary.model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
191
Understanding and Controlling Calculations

Understanding and Controlling Calculations

A core function of Quantrix is to combine formulas and values to perform
calculations. This section describes the order in which calculations occur,
when automatic recalculations happen, how to turn automatic recalculation
off and on, and how to perform a manual recalculation.

Calculation Order
The formula editor displays your formulas in the order in which Quantrix
performs calculations. Quantrix first calculates formula 1, followed by
formula 2, and so on. In a case where more than one formula is responsible
for calculating the value for a cell, the formula with the highest number (that
is, the last formula that calculates the cell’s value) wins. In this situation, the
winning formula is said to eclipse the other formula, and Quantrix alerts you
to this condition as shown in Figure 6-12.

Figure 6-12. Matrix with Eclipse Condition

To change the calculation order, you need to change the order of the
formula fields. See “Reordering Formula Fields” on page 171.

Calculation Time Indicator

Hover the cursor over the Calculation Icon in the lower, right-hand corner
to display the last calculation time in seconds as shown.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
192
Understanding and Controlling Calculations

When Automatic Recalculations Occur

Quantrix automatically recalculates all formulas each time you add, edit, or
delete one of the following matrix elements:
• a formula
• data in an input cell
• an item
• a category

Toggling Automatic Calculation

To toggle automatic calculation, choose Tools > Calculation > Auto
Calculation from the Quantrix menu. A check mark next to the menu item
indicates whether automatic calculation is currently on or off.
Note that it is a good idea to leave automatic calculation on, except when
performing calculation intensive actions such as importing a large amount
of data.
Even if automatic calculation is off, Quantrix continues to monitor whether
it needs to recalculate. Quantrix indicates that a recalculation is needed
(perhaps because you made a change to the model) by blinking the purple
Calculation icon at the lower right corner of the Quantrix application
window, as shown in the following figure:

Calculation
Icon

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
193
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Performing a Manual Recalculation

To perform a manual recalculation of only those cells affected by changes
and edits, choose Tools > Calculation > Recalculate from the Quantrix
menu, or press F9 on the keyboard.
To perform a manual recalculation of all cells, choose Tools > Calculation
> Recalculate All from the Quantrix menu, or press Shift-F9 on the
keyboard.

Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

The formula editor of each modeling matrix displays every formula that the
matrix uses. You use it to perform most of your troubleshooting and
auditing.

Formula Status Conditions

Quantrix proactively monitors all formulas, and reports its findings in both
the formula editor and the Model Browser. In the formula editor, Quantrix
displays a sigma ( ) next to formulas that you created by inserting a
summary item, and reports on four conditions:

Table 6-5. Formula status conditions

Condition Icon / Message Cause(s)

Formula contains no errors or

OK
warnings
Formula contains an eclipse
Notification and a message
condition
Formula contains a size
Warning and a message mismatch, circular reference, or
invalid constraint warning
Formula contains either a syntax
Error and a message
or naming error

In the Model Browser, Quantrix changes the matrix icon ( ) to report

warning and error conditions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
194
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Eclipse Notification
When more than one formula calculates the value for the same cell,
Quantrix displays an Eclipse notification message on a new line in the
formula field of each formula that is involved. Consider the example in
Figure 6-13.

Figure 6-13. An eclipse notification

Formula 2 eclipses formula 1. This means that Quantrix uses the values
calculated by formula 2 and ignores those calculated by formula 1. You do
not need to eliminate the eclipse; Quantrix notifies you about the condition
in case you created it inadvertently.
For information on changing the calculation order, see “Calculation Order”
on page 191. For information on using the Insert Skips command, see
“Using the Insert Skips Command” on page 179.

Size Mismatch Warning

The range that you specify on the left-hand side of the formula must be the
same size (include the same number of cells along each category that you
reference) as the range that you specify on the right-hand side. When the
sizes don’t match, the formula is unbalanced. Quantrix displays a warning
message on a new line in the formula’s field, and changes the matrix’s icon
in the Model Browser to report the warning condition.
When one side is larger than the other in a formula, Quantrix reports errors
for the cells whose values it cannot calculate.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
195
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Figure 6-14. A size mismatch warning

You should correct the mismatch to ensure the validity of your formula.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
196
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Table 6-6. Common Warning Messages

Error Message Cause:

An invalid expression or an error in the expres-

#EXPRESSION!
sions syntax.
A calculation error has occurred, contact
#ERROR
[email protected] for assistance.
#VALUE! The wrong type of argument or operand is used.
A value is not available to a function or formula.
Possible causes:
X Missing data or an omitted argument
#NA! X
search_list and value_list in a lookup
function are not the same size
X
search_list, in a lookup function, is not
in ascending order
Invalid numeric values in a formula or function.
Possible causes:
X
Using a non-numeric argument
#NUM! X
In a function that iterates (irr, rate), the
function cannot find a result
X
The formula produces a number that
is too large or small to be displayed
The size of two arrays created in a formula do
#MISMATCH!
not have the same size.
The range argument does not resolve to a valid
range (due to an improperly defined range or
#INDIRECT! renaming of an item in a previously valid range).
When an indirect function doesn’t return a
value due to a syntax error in the formula.
The value_list and key_list in a select function
have different sizes. The value_list could be 10
#SIZE!
long, and the key_list could be 5 long, but it
could not be 10 and 7.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
197
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Too few arguments means that you have used a function that requires
multiple arguments, but not all of the argument values have been filled in.
Use the function help in the formula toolbar for help with function
arguments.

Errors
When Quantrix cannot interpret your formula, it displays a red X ( ) in
the status column, along with a message to help you find the error. It also
changes the matrix’s icon in the Model Browser to reflect the error condi-
tion ( ). You must correct the error before Quantrix can calculate the
rest of the formulas.

Syntax Errors
Syntax error messages report the last point in the formula (surrounded by
single quotes) that Quantrix could interpret. The messages have this form:
syntax error after ','
This means there is a problem in the text that follows the comma. For
formula syntax information, see “Formula Syntax Tips” on page 167.

Note: Whenever a syntax error appears in a formula, a small red arrow

( ) will point to the problem spot. Usually the problem is a missing paren-
thesis or comma.

Naming Errors
Naming error messages report that either the name you specified doesn’t
exist, or your model contains more than one category or item with the same
name. The messages have this form:
There is no element named 'Growth' in matrix 'Sales'.
There are multiple elements named 'Total' in matrix 'Sales'.
When there are multiple elements, you need to provide more specific infor-
mation about the one element that you want to include in your formula. You
can either prepend the element’s name with this information (see “Naming
Structural Elements” on page 117), or you can click the element that you
want and Quantrix inserts the full name for you.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
198
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Illegal Range Errors

Illegal range error messages report that you have specified a range that is not
sequential. The messages have this form:
Illegal range: Week2..Week1

Troubleshooting Tips
To check which formula is calculating a particular cell, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell.
2. Inspect the formula editor; Quantrix highlights the formula that
calculates the cell.
To check which cells a particular formula calculates, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the formula.
2. Inspect the table; Quantrix highlights the cells that the selected
formula calculates.
To distinguish calculated cells from input cells, follow these steps:
1. Choose View > Show Input Cells.
2. Inspect the table; Quantrix displays a small green triangle in the
upper righthand corner of each input cell.
3. To remove the triangles, choose View > Show Input Cells again.
To resolve a warning or error condition, be sure to read Quantrix’s message
carefully. It attempts to point you toward a solution.

Using the Dependency Inspector

You can navigate the formulas of your model using the Dependency Inspector.
This tool allows you to follow the dependencies between calculated cells to
see how the calculations flow through your model. To use the Dependency
Inspector, click on the cell you wish to examine and choose Tools >
Dependency Inspector from the menu.
The Dependency Inspector tab will open in the lower left corner of the
model window. You can detach the Dependency Inspector, as you would
any tab, by selecting the Detach button ( ) next to the title. You can re-
attach the Dependency Inspector, at any time by selecting the Attach
button ( ). The tab will be re-inserted in its original position.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
199
Troubleshooting and Auditing Formulas

Figure 6-15. Dependency Inspector

In Figure 6-15, the Dependency Inspector is showing that the Gizmo:Q2

cell is calculated from the Gizmo:Q1 cell and the Assumptions::Rate cell.
You can also see that the Gizmo:Q3, Gizmo:YTD, and Total:Q2 cells all
depend on the Gizmo:Q2 cell. The corner-flag of the Assumptions::Rate
box which indicates that the cell is an input cell.
With the Dependency Inspector you can:
• Examine a precedent or dependant cell by clicking on the cell’s
box in the Dependency Inspector tab. The new cell will highlight
in its Matrix and will move to the middle of the Dependency
Inspector.
• Use the arrow-buttons at the bottom of the Dependency Inspector
tab to navigate backwards and forwards through a chain of
dependencies.
• Examine a different cell’s dependencies by clicking on a different
cell in the table view.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
200
Expressions

Expressions
Expression Concepts
Several features in Quantrix Modeler make use of Expressions. Expressions
are a lot like Formulas except they do not have a left-hand range. Expres-
sions are used as a general way to provide access to data inside the model
for presentation or display purposes.

Table 6-7. Expression use in Quantrix Modeler

Activity Use

To specify the conditions under which a partic-

Conditional Format
ular cell format will be used
To specify the condition under which a given row
Custom Filter
will be filtered / hidden
Chart Series / Point To specify custom labels for series or points in a
Labels chart
Chart Annotations To present data from the model alongside a chart
Page Setup Headers To present data from the model and the print job
/ Footers in a header or footer
To implement a dynamic variable in a SQL
DataLink
statement
DataLink Data To specify dynamic connection variables for a
Sources DataLink data source

For example, if you wanted to use Conditional Format to highlight cells

whose value was less than a threshold value, you could write an expression
like:
: < Assumption::Threshold
A single colon is used in expressions to show that the current cell is being
evaluated. So in this case, the expression returns true (or 1.0) if the current
cell’s value is less than the value in the Assumption table’s Threshold field.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
201
Expressions

Note: When used inside of text blocks, expressions are surrounded with
curly braces, {}, this tells Quantrix to evaluate the text between the braces
as an expression and insert the result into the text.

Embedded Expressions
When using expressions in Headers, Footers, Chart Titles or on the Presen-
tation Canvas, the syntax for embedding an expression into text looks like
this:
{expression}
The expression is surrounded by curly-braces, {}. When you are done
editing the text, Quantrix will calculate the expression’s value and insert the
result into the surrounding text. You can also, optionally, use the number
formatting codes to specify how the result should be formatted. The syntax
for applying a number format is as follows:
{expression | number-format}
After the expression, you type a vertical-line (pipe) character, |, then the
number format string. See “Creating Custom Number Formats” on
page 214 for more information on number formatting syntax.
For example, if you wanted to include the maximum value from the cells in
the Value range of the matrix, you could use an embedded expression like
this:
Maximum value achieved: {max(Value)}
Which could yield something like this:
Maximum value achieved: 6.875
If you desired to show only one decimal place of precision, you could
format the result like this:
Maximum value achieved: {max(Value) | #.#}
Which might yield:
Maximum value achieved: 6.9
Any function or formula can be used as an expression. A list of common
expressions and the correct syntax associated with each, can be found in
Table 6-8.

For an example of expressions in use, choose Help > Sample Models

from the menu and open the LoanAmortization_Presentation.model. You will
see expressions utilized on the Matrix Snap Demonstration Canvas. The

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 6: Working with Formulas
202
Expressions

heading of the presentation is utilizing expressions. Double-click the

heading to see the expression of {$ViewName} which refers to the view
name of the Canvas as it appears in the Model Browser and Title Bar.

Table 6-8. Embedded Expression Syntax

Type: Description: Use Syntax:

Category Item Inserts the Name of the Category {@CategoryName}

Comments Inserts any comment associated with the view {$ViewComments}
Date Inserts today’s date {now()|mmmm d, yyyy}
File Inserts the model’s file name {$FileName}
Formula Inserts the results of a formula you specify {formula}
Functions Inserts the results of a function you specify {function}
In filtered tables, inserts the item name on each
Item {$PageItem}
filtered page
Page # Inserts the number of the current page {$Page}
Page Category: In filtered tables, inserts the category and item
{$PageCategoryItem}
Item name on each filtered page
Page Count Inserts the total number of pages {$Pages}
Inserts the model’s file name and location on the
Path {$FilePath}\{$FileName}
computer
Time Inserts the current time {now()|h:mm am/pm}
User Name Inserts the name of the user computer {$UserName}
View Name Inserts the category name on each page {$ViewName}

Note: An invalid expression or an error in the expressions syntax will

result in an #EXPRESSION! error.

Expressions can be used in headers and footers, on charts, on the presenta-

tion canvas, and in constrained input cells.
Syntax guidelines for creating custom number formats can be found in
Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
rmatting a Model

Chapter 7
Formatting a Model

About the Formatting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Customizing Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Aligning Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Formatting Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Customizing Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Adding Colors to Items and Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using Conditional Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Column Width and Row Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setting the Financial Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Using the Outline Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hiding the Default Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Quantrix includes several formatting tools and techniques that you can
use to enhance the appearance of your models. This chapter introduces
the tools and provides instructions on how to use them.
 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
204
About the Formatting Tools

About the Formatting Tools

You use the formatting tools to control the fonts, alignment, color, and lines
that appear in the tables of all Quantrix matrices and views. You can apply
formatting to the following items in Quantrix: Cells, Items, Item Groups,
Categories, Formulas, Model Browser Folders, Model Browser Views,
Charts, and Chart Annotations. To apply formatting, you first select the
target you would like to format and then choose a set of options. For infor-
mation on selecting cells in a matrix, see “Selecting Cells” on page 148.

Format Toolbar
The format toolbar provides shortcuts for commands in the Format menu
and in the Format Toolbox. Position your cursor over each button to see
its name.

Figure 7-1. Format toolbar

Format Toolbox
The Format Toolbox controls the appearance and layout of data and
charts. Open the Format Toolbox in one of these ways:
• Choose Format > Format Toolbox
• Click the Format Toolbox button ( )

Figure 7-2. Format Toolbox with Chart Sections Displayed

You can keep the Format Toolbox open at all times; it appears in the tool
area of the model window. When you make a change using the Format

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
205
About the Formatting Tools

Toolbox, Quantrix applies the change immediately; you do not need to click
an Apply or OK button to explicitly apply it.
The Format Toolbox only displays the formatting options that are available
for the element your cursor is focused on. You can hide the Format
Toolbox at any time by clicking the Format Toolbox button ( ) or the
tab close button ( ).
You can detach the Format Toolbox, as you would any tab, by selecting the
Detach button ( ) next to the title. You can re-attach the Format
Toolbox at any time by selecting the Attach button ( ). The tab will be
re-inserted in its original position.

Format Menu
You use the Format menu to:
• open the Format Toolbox
• apply font styles to text
• apply conditional formatting
• constrain cell input
• control the alignment of text
• collapse or expand items
• set financial formatting
• hide default grid lines

Pop-Up Menus
You can press the right mouse button to see a pop-up menu when your
cursor is positioned on an item or cell. Use these menus to open the
Format Toolbox, apply conditional formatting or constrain input.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
206
Customizing Fonts

Customizing Fonts
You can change the appearance of cell data, item labels, chart annotations,
and Model Browser comments.
To change font appearance using the Format Toolbox, follow these steps:
1. Select the text that you want to format.
2. Open the Format Toolbox in one of these ways:
• Choose Format > Format Toolbox.
• Click the Format Toolbox button ( ).
• Position your cursor over the selected text, press the right mouse
button, and then choose Format Toolbox from the pop-up menu.
3. Open the Font section by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
The Font section offers the options shown in Figure 7-3. To set a
default font for all of your new models, see “Setting A Default Font”
on page 68.

Figure 7-3. Format Toolbox with Font formatting options

4. Click to choose the new options; as soon as you choose an option,

Quantrix applies it to your selected text.
5. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.
6. When your changes are complete, you can either click the Close
button to close the Format Toolbox, or leave it open for future use.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
207
Aligning Text

To change font appearance using the format toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Select the text that you want to format.
2. Choose from a drop-down menu or click a button in the format
toolbar to immediately apply a new option.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

To change font appearance using the format menu, follow these steps:
1. Select the text that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Font.
3. Choose one of five font formatting options (Bold, Italic, Under-
line, Increase Size, Decrease Size) from the sub-menu.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Aligning Text
To change the alignment of cell data or item labels, follow these steps:
1. Select the text that you want to align.
2. Choose an alignment in one of these ways:
• Click the Align Left ( ), Align Center ( ) or
Align Right ( ) toolbar button.
• Choose Format > Text Alignment, and then choose from the
sub-menu of six alignment commands (Left, Center, Right, Top,
Middle, Bottom).
• Open the Alignment section of the Format Toolbox by clicking
the Open Section button ( ). Choose the new options for
horizontal and vertical alignment from the drop-down menus. As
soon as you choose an option, Quantrix applies it to your selected
text
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Note: To align numbers with logical accuracy, see “Changing Precision

and Alignment” on page 210.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
208
Formatting Numbers

Formatting Numbers
You can change the precision, alignment, and notation of numbers that
appear in cells. All options for formatting numbers are available under the
Number Format section in the Format Toolbox; some shortcuts are also
available in the format toolbar. By default, Quantrix formats all numbers in
a general way—with no symbols before or after the number and unlimited
precision.
To access all options for formatting numbers, follow these steps:
1. Open the Format Toolbox to the Number Format section in one
of these ways:
• Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section.
• Click the Format Toolbox button ( ), and then click the Open
Section button ( ) of the Number Format section.
• Position your cursor over a cell or item, press the right mouse
button, then choose Format Toolbox from the pop-up menu.
Open the Number Format section by clicking the Open Section
button ( ).
The Number Format section offers the options shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4. Format Toolbox with number formatting options

2. Click each entry in the Type list to see its options.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
209
Formatting Numbers

3. To apply any of the options, select the numbers whose format you
want to change, choose an entry from the Type list, and then change
the options. Quantrix applies the changes immediately.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.
5. When your changes are complete, you can either click the Close
button to close the Format Toolbox, or leave it open for future use.
To change number formatting using the format toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to change.
2. Click one of the six number buttons in the format toolbar: Currency
( ), Accounting ( ), Number Format Drop-down ( ),
Percent ( ), Increase Decimal ( ), or Decrease Decimal
( ).
The following sections describe specific ways to format numbers.

Using the Number Format Drop-down Menu

New: To quickly change the formatting of numbers, use the Number

Format Drop-down menu ( ) from the formatting toolbar. The menu
provides easy access to commonly used number formats including custom
number formats that are added by the user. More information about each of
the formats available is given in the following sections.

Figure 7-5. Number Format Drop-down Menu

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
210
Formatting Numbers

Changing Precision and Alignment

You use the Format Toolbox or format toolbar to control precision and
alignment. To control the characters that Quantrix uses for the thousands
and decimal separators, see “Choosing Currency Symbol and Separators”
on page 65.
To increase or decrease the number of decimal places, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Change the precision in one of these ways:
• Click the Increase Decimal button ( ) or the Decrease
Decimal button ( ); each click changes the precision by one
place.
• Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Number
from the Type drop-down menu and then highlight the number of
Decimal Places and type the number desired.

Note: Even if you shorten the number of decimal places displayed, full
precision is maintained and the cell value is stored in the model with all the
decimal points.

To add a thousands separator , follow these steps:

1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Number
from the Type drop-down menu and click the Show Thousands
Separator checkbox.
To use accounting alignment, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Number
from the Type drop-down menu and click the Use Accounting
Alignment checkbox.

Tip: To automatically set the Number format with two decimal places
and Using Accounting Alignment and Show Thousands Separator
options turned on, choose one of these methods:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
211
Formatting Numbers

• Select Custom > Accounting from the Number Format drop-down

menu ( )
• Click the Accounting ( ) button in format toolbar

Using Scientific Notation

To use scientific notation, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Number
from the Type drop-down menu and click the Use Scientific
Notation checkbox.

Tip: Selecting Custom > Scientific from the Number Format Drop-
down menu ( ) will automatically set the Number format with two
decimal places and Using Scientific Notation turned on.

Formatting Currency
The default format for currency is determined by the locale settings in your
computer operating system. For instance, in the United States, these settings
include a US dollar sign, thousands separators, and two decimal places; for
example: $12,456.00. To change the default currency symbol, thousands
separator, and decimal separator, see “Choosing Currency Symbol and
Separators” on page 65.
To format currency and use accounting alignment, select the cell(s) that you
want to format and use one of the methods described below:
• Click the Currency button ( )
• Select Currency from the Number Format drop-down menu ( )
Both methods will automatically set the Currency format with two decimal
places and Using Accounting Alignment and Show Thousands
Separator options turned on.
To format currency using different options, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Number
from the Type drop-down menu.
3. Change the currency style in one or more of these ways:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
212
Formatting Numbers

• Choose a different symbol from the Currency drop-down menu.

• Increase or decrease precision by selecting the number of
Decimal Places shown and typing the number desired.
• Remove the commas by clicking the Show Thousands Separator
checkbox.

Note: Quantrix changes the currency formatting for the selected cells,
but it does not change the default currency format.

Formatting Negative Numbers

The default format for a negative number is to display it in the same font
face, size, and color as a positive number, and to precede it with a negative
sign (-); for example: -124.
To change the appearance of negative numbers, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, and then choose a
format from the Display Negative Numbers drop-down menu.

Note: Quantrix changes the negative number formatting for the

selected cells, but it does not change the default negative number format.

Formatting Percentages
To control the precision of percentages, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Percent from
the Type drop-down menu, and then increase or decrease precision
by selecting the number of Decimal Places and typing the number
desired.
You can also use the Format Toolbox to apply the following formats to
percentages:
• Add or remove commas by checking the Show Thousands
Separator checkbox.
• Display in scientific notation.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
213
Formatting Numbers

• Change the appearance of negative numbers. See “Formatting

Negative Numbers”.

Tip: Selecting Percent from the Number Format Drop-down menu ( )

will automatically set the Percent format with two decimal places and
Standard option for displaying negative numbers.

Formatting Fractions
To control the precision of fractions, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Fraction from
the Type drop-down menu.
3. Use the Format Code drop-down menu to choose how you would
like the fractions to appear.

Note: Quantrix rounds up fractions. For example, when a cell contains

1/4 as its data and you apply the Halves format to it, Quantrix rounds it up
to 1/2.

Tip: Selecting Custom > Fraction from the Number Format Drop-
down menu ( ) will automatically set the Fraction format with Up to
One Digit formatting turned on.

Formatting Dates and Times

Quantrix can display and format dates and times separately or collectively.
For example, say your cell contains this information:
Saturday, December 1, 1998 12:00AM
The cell contains both a date and time, but you can choose to only display
one or the other; you can also apply different formats to each. By default,
Quantrix uses English names and number formats.
To change formatting for dates and times, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Date Time
from the Type drop-down menu.
3. Change the date and time in one or more of these ways:
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
214
Formatting Numbers

• To view the formatting options that are available for different

locations, choose from the Locale drop-down menu.
• To change the format of the date and/or time, choose from the
options that are displayed in the Date and Time lists.

Tip: Selecting Date/Time from the Number Format drop-down menu

( ) will let you choose from twenty common date formats.

Formatting Special Numbers

Quantrix includes special number formats (such as Zip Code) that vary by
location. To apply special number formats, follow these steps:
1. Select the cell(s) that you want to format.
2. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Special from
the Type drop-down menu.
3. Change the format in one of these ways:
• To view the formatting options that are available for different
locations, choose from the Locale drop-down menu.
• To change the format, choose from the options that are displayed
in the Format Code list.
If the special type that you need is not available, you can add your own
custom type; see “Creating Custom Number Formats” for more
information.

Creating Custom Number Formats

To create you own custom number formats, select the cells to be formatted
and create the format in one of these ways:

New: Using the Format Toolbar:

1. Select More... from the Number Format drop-down menu ( ) to

display the Edit Custom Number Format panel as shown in Figure 7-
6. Proceed with Step 3 on page 215.
Using the Format Toolbox:
1. Choose Format > Format Toolbox, choose the Open Section
button ( ) of the Number Format section, choose Custom from
the Type drop-down menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
215
Formatting Numbers

2. Click the (...) button, next to Format Code, to display the Edit
Custom Number Format panel as shown in Figure 7-6. Proceed
with Step 3 on page 215.

Figure 7-6. Edit Custom Number Format Panel

3. At this point you can use an existing saved custom format, delete an
existing format or create a new one.
• To use an existing saved format, click on the saved format to select
it, and then click OK.
• To delete a custom format, click on the desired format and then
click Remove.
• To build a new custom format, enter the format code in the text
box provided, and then click Add. You will be prompted to add an
optional description for the custom format.

Note: If you assign a description to your own custom formats, they will
appear in the Number Format drop-down menu under Custom.

Tip: If you want to build a custom format that is similar to an existing

custom format, click on the saved format and then edit the format in the
Format Code text box. You can view a preview of the format in the
Preview box in the panel. See Table 7-1 and Table 7-2 for more help.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
216
Formatting Numbers

Table 7-1. Customizing dates and times

To Display Code Result

m 1-12
mm 01-12
Months mmm Jan-Dec
mmmm January-December
mmmmm J-D (first letter of each)
d 1-31
dd 01-031
Days
ddd Sun-Sat
dddd Sunday-Saturday
yy 00-99
Years
yyyy 1900-9999
h 0-23
Hours
hh 00-23
m 0-59
Minutes
mm 00-59
s 0-59
Seconds
ss 00-59
AM/PM (use the 12- AM/PM AM or PM
hour clock) A/P A or P
h AM/PM 4 AM
Time h:mm AM/PM 4:36 PM
h:mm:ss A/P 4:36:03 P
[h]:mm 25:02
Elapsed time [mm]:ss 63:46
ss :46

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
217
Formatting Numbers

.
Table 7-2. Customizing spacing, significant digits, conditionals, text, and colors

Description Code Result

To display both text and numbers,

$0.00 "Total" $12.00 Total
enclose text in double quotes.
To display only significant digits,
round to the number of digits in the
####.# 1234.59 is displayed as 1234.6
format, or exclude insignificant zeros,
use the pound sign.
To display insignificant zeros when a
number has fewer digits than there are 00.00 2.67 is displayed as 02.67
zeros in the format, use a zero.
To add spaces for insignificant zeros
on either side of a decimal point or
???.??? 44.398, 23.1, 6.35 align at decimal
division sign (for good alignment with
???/??? 5 1/4, 5 3/10 align at division sign
a fixed width font), use a ? (question
mark).
#.000 8.9 is displayed as 8.900
To create a hybrid customization,
0.# .631 is displayed as 0.6
combine #, 0, and ? (question mark).
0.0# 12 is 12.0, 1234.568 is 1234.57
To use a format only when a number
[red][<=100]; Numbers that are less than or
meets certain conditions, separate the
[blue][>100] equal to 100 are red, and numbers
conditions with a semicolon, and use
greater than 100 are blue.
square brackets and a comparison
operator. The default conditions are
$0.00 "Surplus"; $135.00 Surplus
positive; negative as shown in
$-0.00 "Shortage" $-135.00 Shortage
the second example.
Adds spaces the width of open
To add a space that is the width of a
_($0.00_); and closed parentheses to the
certain character, use an underscore
(-$0.00) positive format to align it with the
followed by the character.
negative format.
To fill empty spaces with a repeating
character, use an asterisk followed by 0*- 12----
the character.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
218
Formatting Numbers

Table 7-2. Customizing spacing, significant digits, conditionals, text, and colors

Description Code Result

To use a different color, enclose the

[black] #.## 6.73 (in black)
color’s name in square brackets.
To display numbers as a percentage of .08 is displayed as 8%
%
100, include the percent sign. 2.8 is displayed as 280%
To display a comma as a thousands
separator, use a comma in the appro- #,### 12000 is displayed as 12,000
priate location.
To scale a number by a multiple of
#, 12000 is displayed as 12
1000, use a comma at the end.

Custom Formats

New: The Number Format drop-down menu ( ) comes pre-

populated with seven popular custom formats. To access these custom
formats, press the Number Format button and choose Custom. The
following options are available:

Custom Format Name Code Result

Decimal 0.00 1 is displayed as 1.00

Scientific 0.00E+00 1000 is displayed as 1.00E+03
Engineering ##0.###E+00 1000 is displayed as 1E+03
Thousands #,##0,.0"K" 1000 is displayed as 1.0K
Millions #,##0,,.0"M" 100000 is displayed as 0.1M
Fraction # ?/? 0.123 is displayed as 1/8
Tenths # ??/10 0.123 is displayed as 1/10

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
219
Customizing Lines

Using Extended Formats

Quantrix includes extended number formats to handle additional format-
ting tasks. These formats cannot be represented using the format strings
described above. The following extended formats are included with
Quantrix Modeler:

Table 7-3.

Extended
Use
Format

To format date values in terms of a fiscal year, you can

specify the start month of the fiscal year and the way
Fiscal Year
in which you would like to display the quarters and
years.
To format numerical values into custom bins, you can
specify a number of names with min values and max
Custom Bin values. Quantrix will present the name of the first bin
in the list which min and max values contain the cell’s
value.

Customizing Lines
You can customize the horizontal and vertical lines of your model’s tables by
controlling their color, pattern, thickness, spacing, and by adding graphical
elements (such as an arrowhead) to each end.
When you select a row and then customize it, Quantrix always applies your
line changes to the horizontal line on the bottom of the item and its cells;
when you select a column, Quantrix applies the changes to the right-hand
side.
To customize lines using the Format Toolbox, follow these steps:
1. Select the line(s) in one of these ways:
• To select the bottom horizontal line that begins at a row item and
ends at that item’s last cell, click the row item.
• To select the right-hand vertical line that begins at a column item
and ends at that item’s last cell, click the column item.
• The header line is the first line separating the cells from the items
in either the row or column and can be formatted separately.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
220
Customizing Lines

Note: You cannot customize the line style of a single cell or item; line
styles apply to the entire row or column, including the item name.

2. Open the Format Toolbox to the Line section by clicking on the

Format Toolbox button ( ) and choosing the Open Section
button ( ) of the Line section and the Header Line section.
These sections offer the options shown in Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7. Format Toolbox with line formatting options

3. To apply any of the options, choose from the drop-down menus or

check the appropriate boxes. Quantrix applies the changes
immediately.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.
5. When your changes are complete, you can either click the Close
button to close the Format Toolbox, or leave it open for future use.
To change line appearance using the format toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Select the line(s) that you want to change.
2. Using one of the four line buttons in the format toolbar, either
Line Color ( ), Line Thickness ( ), Line Pattern ( ), or
Line Spacing ( ), apply a change in one of these ways:
• Click the button to apply the option shown on the button.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
221
Adding Colors to Items and Cells

• Click the button’s arrow and then choose a different option from
its menu.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Tip: To introduce additional whitespace into your model, you can use a
large double-line. If more space is desired, you can grab the bottom or left
line of a large double-line and stretch the spacing inside the double-line.

Adding Colors to Items and Cells

To change the background color of items and cells, follow these steps:
1. Select the item(s) or cell(s) whose color you want to change.
2. Open the Format Toolbox by clicking on the Format Toolbox
button ( ) and choosing the Open Section button ( ) of the
Background section.
The Background section offers the options shown in Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8. Format Toolbox with color options

3. Apply a color change in one of these ways:

• Click a color in the standard color palette.
• Click the More button in the standard palette and choose a new
color from the Colors dialog box, and then click OK.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
222
Using Conditional Formatting

5. When your changes are complete, you can either click the Close
button to close the Format Toolbox, or leave it open for future use.
To change colors using the format toolbar, follow these steps:
1. Select the item(s) or cell(s) that you want to change.
2. Apply a color change in one of these ways:
• Click the Fill Color ( ) button to apply the color shown on its
button.
• Click the button’s arrow and then choose from its color palette. To
choose a custom color, click the More button in the palette,
choose a new color from the Colors dialog box, and then click
OK.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Using Conditional Formatting

You can specify certain formatting options which will apply only if specified
conditions in the model are met. For instance, you may want to highlight
regions where sales have declined in red and regions where sales have
increased in green.
To apply conditional formats to your model, follow these steps:
1. Select the cells or items you wish to conditionally format.
2. Choose Format > Conditional Format... from the menu.
3. Enter the condition you wish to highlight:
• Select the Cell Value is radio button, select the conditional opera-
tion from the drop-down menu and enter your parameters into the
fields at the right.
OR
• Select the Logical Expression radio button and enter a logical
Expression into the field provided. See “Expressions” on page 200
4. Click the Format... button to set the background color, text color, or
font attributes you want to use when the condition is met.
5. If necessary, click the Add button to add additional conditions to
evaluate and return to step 3.
6. To remove a condition you no longer want, click the Remove button.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
223
Column Width and Row Height

7. To edit an existing condition, click on the condition line in the box at

the top of the Conditional Format window. Once selected, you can
change the condition and format by following steps 3 & 4.
8. Sort the conditions into the order you would like them evaluated, top
to bottom, using the Up and Down buttons.
9. Click OK to set the conditional formats.
10.Click Cancel to abort your changes.
Figure 7-9 shows the Conditional Format window with a condition to apply
the fill color of green to the cell if the value is greater than 1.

Figure 7-9. Conditional Format window

Column Width and Row Height

Changing Column Width and Row Height
You can change the height and width of items and item groups, which in
turn changes the height and width of their corresponding cells. You cannot
change the height or width of an individual cell.
To change the width of a column, follow these steps:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
224
Column Width and Row Height

1. Position your cursor over the righthand edge of the item so the
cursor changes to a resize arrow ( ).
2. Drag the edge to resize the column. Quantrix changes the size of all
columns that contain an instance of the item.
While re-sizing a column or row in this manner, you will see a Tool Tip box
showing the measurement of the column or row as it changes.
To change the height of a row, follow these steps:
1. Position your cursor over the bottom edge of the item so the cursor
changes to a resize arrow ( ).
2. Drag the edge to resize the row. Quantrix changes the size of all rows
that contain an instance of the item.

Tip: To resize a subset of items, select only those items that you want to
resize, position your cursor at the bottom or right-hand edge of an item, and
then drag to resize all selected items.

Automatic Resize
To automatically resize items, select items that you want to resize, position
your cursor at the bottom or right-hand edge of an item, and then double-
click to automatically resize all selected items to the proper size.

Setting Column Width and Row Height

If you wish to have a uniform size for a set of columns and rows, you can
set the width and height to be a specific measurement.
To set the width of a column, follow these steps:
1. Select the column(s) you wish to set the width for.
2. Right-click and choose Column Width.... from the pop-up menu.
To set the height of a row, follow these steps:
1. Select the row(s) you wish to set the height for.
2. Right-click and choose Row Height.... from the pop-up menu.
Use the Column Width or Row Height panel to set the desired width or
height, and click OK. Click Auto-Resize to have the width or height
automatically set for you.
You can set the desired measurement of inch, centimeter, or point by
choosing Tools > Options > International > Units of Measure.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
225
Setting the Financial Format

Setting the Financial Format

You can change the layout of a table in a modeling matrix or table view to a
format common for presenting financial statements.
To display a table with financial formatting applied, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the tab that contains the matrix or table view that you
want to format.
2. Choose Format > Set Financial Formatting. Quantrix changes the
the table to a common format used for financial presentations.
Figure 7-10 shows a matrix with Financial Formatting applied.

Figure 7-10. Matrix with Financial Formatting

To remove financial formatting from a table, follow these steps:

1. Click to select the tab that contains the matrix or table view that you
want to format.
2. Choose Format > Set Standard Formatting. Quantrix changes the
the table back to the standard default formatting.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 7: Formatting a Model
226
Using the Outline Format

Using the Outline Format

You can change the layout of a table in a modeling matrix or table view so it
communicates the hierarchical relationship of your model’s structural
elements.
To display a table as a hierarchical outline, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the tab that contains the matrix or table view that you
want to format.
2. Choose View > Outline. Quantrix changes the layout of the table
and automatically left justifies all of your items for categories on the
row tray.

Hiding the Default Grid Lines

You can change the layout of a table in a modeling matrix or table view so
that the lines separating the cells are hidden.
To display a table with grid lines hidden, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the tab that contains the matrix or table view that you
want to format.
2. Choose Format > Hide Default Grid Lines. Quantrix changes the
layout of the table to hide the grid lines separating the cells.

Clear All Cell Formats

New: You can simultaneously remove all of the formatting, including
number formatting, that has been applied to the cells in a matrix, or view, to
revert to the raw data.

To clear all cell formats in a matrix or view, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the matrix or view in the Model Browser.
2. Right-click and select Clear Cell Formats from the pop-up menu.
This action will clear all formatting that has been applied to the cells only.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 8: Charting a Model

Chapter 8
Charting a Model

About Chart Views and Charting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Understanding Chart Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Creating and Managing Chart Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Common Chart Formatting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Chart Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

You can create a chart from any modeling matrix, and then customize it
by changing its type, size, color, orientation, and data series layout.
 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
228
About Chart Views and Charting Tools

About Chart Views and Charting Tools

You can create one or more chart views from any modeling matrix. Each
chart view appears in its own tab, and Quantrix shows each chart view
below its matrix in the Model Browser.

Figure 8-1. A chart view, labeled

chart view

chart

legend

charting
table

A chart view, like a table view, is permanently linked to its matrix by its
structure, logic, and data; for details, see “About Views” on page 32.

Tip: To display a tooltip summary of what the chart data series represents,
hover the cursor over the chart data.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
229
About Chart Views and Charting Tools

Charting Table and Category Tiles

You use the charting table similar to how you use the table in a matrix or
table view; for details, see “Using the Table” on page 43. When you
rearrange category tiles in the chart, you change the layout of the chart and
the charting table; you do not change the layout of the modeling matrix to
which it is linked.
On the chart, you rearrange categories by using the following trays:
• Filter: To display items in a drop-down menu, allowing the associated
data to be displayed separately.
• Series: To display items as columns on the charting table and on the
Y axis of the chart.
• Points: To display items as rows on the charting table and on the X
axis of the chart.

Tip: To hide a series from a chart, collapse the corresponding column in

the charting table.

Professional Edition:

• Row: To display each item’s chart in a separate row on the chart grid
and items as rows on the charting table.
• Column: To display each item’s chart in a separate column on the
chart grid and items as columns on the charting table
See “Chart Grid” on page 257 for more information.

Format Toolbox
You control the appearance of charts and legends using the various sections
of the format toolbox. When you click on the Format Toolbox you will see
only the options available for the item you are formatting.
Figure 8-2 shows the Format Toolbox chart options with series on a 2D bar
chart selected.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
230
About Chart Views and Charting Tools

Figure 8-2. Format Toolbox Options Example

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
231
Understanding Chart Types

Understanding Chart Types

For all chart types, Quantrix uses the category tiles in the column tray to
create each data series and the legend; the legend displays the name and
color of each series. Depending on which chart type you choose, Quantrix
uses the row / category tiles and the data in different ways. Quantrix gener-
ates four basic types of charts, in one or more variations.

Table 8-1. Variations of the four basic chart types

Type Variations

Area (2D)
Bar (2D)
Bar (3D)
Box/Whisker (2D)
Combination (2D)
Line (2D)
grid Ribbon (3D)
Stacked Area (2D)
Stacked Bar (2D)
Statistical Bar (2D)
Statistical Line (2D)
Statistical Plot (2D)
Surface (3D)
Plot (2D)
scatter Scatter (2D)
Scatter (3D)
pie Pie (2D)
Area Radar (2D)
Bubble (2D)
radar
Polar (2D)
Radar (2D)

For 2D grid charts, Quantrix plots each data series on the X-axis; it uses the
category tiles in the row tray to plot the data points, and then labels the Y-
axis according to the values as shown in Figure 8-3.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
232
Understanding Chart Types

Figure 8-3. Default plotting for a 2D grid chart

For 3D grid charts, Quantrix plots the data series on the X-axis, the points
on the Y-axis, and the value on the Z-axis as shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4. Default plotting for a 3D grid chart

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
233
Understanding Chart Types

For 2D scatter charts, Quantrix groups successive columns to create x, y

pairs as shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5. Default plotting for a 2D scatter chart

For 3D scatter charts, Quantrix groups successive columns to create x, y, z

triplets as shown in Figure 8-6.

Figure 8-6. Default plotting for a 3D scatter chart

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
234
Creating and Managing Chart Views

Creating and Managing Chart Views

When you create a chart view, Quantrix adds it to the Model Browser,
below the matrix to which it is linked. You can then use the Model Browser
to open, rename, move or delete the chart view.

Creating a Chart View

To create a chart view, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the modeling matrix tab from which you want to
create a chart view.
2. Create the view in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Chart View button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Chart View.
Quantrix opens a chart view tab that contains a bar chart and a
legend, and adds the view to the Model Browser.
You can now choose from a number of standard chart types, and customize
them in many ways. For details, see “Common Chart Formatting
Techniques” on page 236.

Professional Edition: When a chart is created from a matrix

that has three or more categories, the chart will appear as a Chart Grid. See
“Chart Grid” on page 257 for more information.

Creating Views from Canvas Objects

You can copy a chart view created on the presentation canvas to the Model
Browser of the same model as a new chart view. Create a chart view from a
presentation canvas table in one of these ways:
In layout mode on the Presentation Canvas, click to select the chart view to
copy.
• Right-click on the chart view and choose Chart > Insert Chart
View. A new chart view is created in the Model Browser under the
associated matrix.
• Hold the CTRL key and drag the chart view to the desired location in
the Model Browser.

Mac OS X: Hold down the ALT key while dragging the chart view to
the Model Browser.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
235
Creating and Managing Chart Views

Opening and Closing a Chart View

To open a chart view, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, double-click the chart view’s icon ( ).
To close a chart view, click its close button ( ).

Renaming a Chart View

To rename a chart view, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, double-click the name of the chart view that
you want to rename.
3. Type a new name, and then press ENTER. Quantrix renames the
chart view in both the Model Browser and the chart view’s title bar.

Deleting a Chart View

To delete a chart view, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, click to select the chart view that you want to
delete.
3. Delete the chart in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Position your cursor over the selected chart view, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Press the DELETE key.
Quantrix removes the chart view tab and the chart view entry from
the Model Browser.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
236
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Quantrix’s charts remain linked to the modeling matrix from which you
generated them. When you manipulate a chart, Quantrix combines the data
in the charting table with your chosen chart type and customization to
display an up-to-date graphical representation of the data.
Newly created charts have default initial settings. This section describes
some common formatting techniques that you can apply to your chart
views.

Setting the Chart Type

Quantrix has a number of chart types that you can customize; for details,
see “Understanding Chart Types” on page 231.
To choose a chart type, follow these steps:
1. Click to select the chart view tab.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).Open the Chart section in the Format Toolbox by
clicking the Open Section button ( ) and select the type from the
Chart Type drop-down menu.

Specifying Chart Data Locations

You can assign the points and series of your chart to different axes, and can
also reorder them along their current axis.

Choosing the Data Series

When you create a chart view, Quantrix uses the category tiles in the column
tray to create each data series and the legend. The category will appear in the
Series: tray of the chart.
To choose a different category for the series, move it to the series tray. For
more information, see “Moving Categories to Change the Layout” on
page 123.
For example, consider the standard 2D bar chart shown in Figure 8-7.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
237
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Figure 8-7. Data series generated from a tile in the column tray

When you swap the positions of the category tiles, it looks like Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8. Data series regenerated after moving category tiles

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
238
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Moving the Data Series to a Different Axis

To change the location of the data series on a 2D chart, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).Open the Chart section in the Format Toolbox by
clicking the Open Section button ( ).
2. Change the location of the series by choosing either X-axis or Y-axis
from the Orientation drop-down menu.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Reordering Data Along an Axis

You can change the order of a point or series along an axis by dragging it to
a new location in the chart. For a series only, you can change its order by
dragging it to a new location in the legend.
To change the order of a point or series using the chart, follow these steps:
1. Position your cursor over a label in the chart.
2. Drag the label to a new location on the same axis. Quantrix applies
the change immediately to both the chart and the legend.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.
To change the order of a series using the legend, follow these steps:
1. Position your cursor over a label or box in the legend.
2. Drag it to a new location. Quantrix applies the change immediately to
both the legend and the chart.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Excluding Data from a Chart

To exclude items or item groups from a chart, collapse them by selecting
them and clicking the Collapse button ( ) on the standard toolbar. For
more information see “Collapsing and Expanding Items” on page 135.
To exclude a category and its items from a chart, move its category tile to
the filter tray. Quantrix updates the chart so it represents a subset, or filtered
view, of your model. For more information on filtering, see “Filtering Based
on Categories” on page 124.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
239
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Enhancing the Chart Data Display

You can add labels and change graphical properties of your chart to enhance
the data display.

Setting a Chart Title

Quantrix can display a title at the top or bottom of the chart. This title can
be plain text, or utilize expressions that renders text based on variables in
the model. For more help with expressions, see “Embedded Expressions”
on page 201 for more information.
To add a chart title, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ). Open the Title section in the Format Toolbox by
clicking the Open Section button ( ).
2. Enter the desired title in the Expression text box.
3. Set the title to appear either at the top or the bottom of the chart by
using the Position drop-down menu.
4. Set the text alignment by choosing left, right, center, or automatic
from the Alignment drop-down menu.
5. Open the Font section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the Open
Section button ( ) to set the font color, font face and font size of
the title.

Manipulating the Chart Legend

New: The chart legend appears in its own designated area of the chart
view. Quantrix can show the chart legend vertically, horizontally, or hide it
from view.

To show the legend, follow these steps:

1. Click to select the chart view tab.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ). Open the Chart Legend section in the Format
Toolbox by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
3. Choose the desired orientation from the drop-down menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
240
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

You can adjust the size of the legend area when visible by hovering the
cursor between the chart and legend until a resize arrow ( ) appears.
Drag to re-size the legend as desired.

Adding Data Labels

On all 2D charts, you can add data labels that show the name, value, and/or
percent. To add one or more of these data labels, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ). Open the Chart Labels section in the Format Toolbox
by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
2. Place a check mark in the Name, Value, Percent and/or Expres-
sion checkboxes. An expression is a way to enter a custom label. See
“Embedded Expressions” on page 201 for more information.
Quantrix creates one label that contains all of the items that you
selected.

Figure 8-9. Data series with Name data labels

Tip: A double-click on a series data item will select the data point and
highlight the corresponding cell in the table view.

Choosing Graphical Elements

You can add several graphical elements to your chart.
• Scatter lines (3D) connect data points to an axis. This often improves
the legibility of line charts.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
241
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

• Percentage stacks (2D only) display the data as a percentage of 100;

in other words, they communicate the same information as pie
charts.
• Contours (3D only) are grid lines on the graphical object that repre-
sent the data series (such as a bar in a bar chart). They help you
compare the values of the data.
• Zones (3D only) are color codes that help you differentiate between
low and high values. The color range starts with blue on the low end,
progresses through green, yellow, and orange, and ends with red on
the high end. They work well in surface charts.
• Solid surfaces (3D only) connect a surface to an axis. They work well
in ribbon and 3D surface charts.
To choose one or more of these options, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ). Open the Chart or 3D Chart section in the Format
Toolbox by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
2. Click to place a checkmark in the checkbox next to the option(s) that
you want. Quantrix applies the option(s) immediately.

Customizing Fonts, Colors, Grids, and Series

You use the Format Toolbox to control the appearance of your chart’s
fonts, colors, series and grids.

Changing the Chart Background Color

To change the color of the chart’s background, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
2. Change the background color by doing one of the following:
• For 2D charts, open the Chart section in the Format Toolbox by
clicking the Open Section button ( ) and choose a color from
the Background Color drop-down. To choose a custom color,
click More... in the palette, choose a new color from the Colors
dialog box, and then click OK.
• For 3D charts, open the 3D Chart section in the Format Toolbox
by clicking the Open Section button ( ) and choose a color
from the Background Color drop-down. To choose a custom

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
242
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

color, click More... in the palette, choose a new color from the
Colors dialog box, and then click OK.

Changing Font Face, Size, and Style

To change the font face, size, or style for a chart axis, follow these steps:
1. Select the axis by clicking on the chart axis line. The axis is selected
when a small circle shows at both ends of the axis.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
3. Open the Font section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the Open
Section button ( ).
4. Change the font face, size and style using the Font select boxes and
Bold and Italic checkboxes.

Note: Changing the font color also changes the color of its axis.

Changing Font and Axis Colors

Axes and their labels are always the same color. To change the font and axis
color, follow these steps:
1. Select the axis by clicking on the chart axis line. The axis is selected
when a small circle shows at both ends of the axis.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
3. Open the Font section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the Open
Section button ( ) and choose a color from the Foreground
Color drop-down menu. To choose a custom color, click More... in
the palette, choose a new color from the Colors dialog box, and then
click OK.

Showing and Hiding Grids

For all charts, you can choose to show or hide the background grid.
To customize the grid, follow these steps:
1. Select the axis by clicking on the chart axis line. The axis is selected
when a small circle shows at both ends of the axis.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
243
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

3. Open the Chart Axis section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the
Open Section button ( ).
4. Place a checkmark in the Show Grid Lines (and/or Show
Secondary Grid for 3D charts) checkbox. Hide the grid lines by
clicking to remove the checkmark(s).

Customizing a Data Series

You can customize the color, type, pattern, and point symbol for each data
series.
To customize a data series, follow these steps:
1. Select the series in one of these ways:
• Click one box in the legend, or hold down the SHIFT key and
click to select more than one.
• Click one data representation in the chart (such as a bar), or hold
down the SHIFT key and click to select more than one.
2. Customize the series in one or more of these ways:
• If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
• Open the Chart Series section in the Format Toolbox by clicking
the Open Section button ( ).
• Change the style by choosing from the Type drop-down menu
(2D combination charts only).
• Change the type and size of the symbol that represents points in
line and scatter charts by choosing from the Symbol and Size
drop-down menus (2D and 3D).
• Explode a pie slice by checking the Exploded checkbox (Pie
charts only).

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
244
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Figure 8-10. Chart Series tab with data series selected

Note: If you have not selected a data series, the Chart Series and Chart
Series Style sections of the Format Toolbox do not appear.

Details on 2D Charts
When you change the spatial settings of a 2D bar, combination, or pie chart,
Quantrix gives the chart a 3D appearance. Changing the spatial settings of
other 2D chart types does not change their appearance. You control the
spatial settings in the following ways:
• The Rotation value controls how far Quantrix rotates the chart
around its Y-axis (to the left).
• The Elevation value controls how far Quantrix tilts the chart
forward or backward around its X-axis.
• The Depth value controls how thick, front to back, Quantrix makes
the data series of the chart.
• The Cluster Spacing value controls how much space Quantrix
inserts between each set of bars that represent a point.
To change the settings of a 2D chart, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ) and open the Chart section in the Format Toolbox by
clicking the Open Section button ( ).

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
245
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

2. Choose values from the Rotation, Depth, and Elevation drop-

down menus. Quantrix applies the changes immediately.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo. To return the
chart to its standard orientation, set the Rotation and Elevation
values to 0 and the Depth value to 10.
Often you will need to change all three values to achieve your desired effect.
For example, consider the standard 2D bar chart shown in Figure 8-11.

Figure 8-11. 2D bar chart with default orientation

When you change the Rotation to 15, you see some depth.

Figure 8-12. 2D bar chart with a rotation value of 15

When you change the Elevation to 10, you can see all dimensions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
246
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Figure 8-13. 2D bar chart with an elevation value of 10

Now when you change the Depth to 30, you can see the effect immediately.

Figure 8-14. 2D bar chart with a depth value of 30

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
247
Common Chart Formatting Techniques

Details on 3D Charts
Quantrix presents 3D charts within a gridded cube, where the X-axis
contains the data series, the Y-axis contains the data points, and the Z-axis
contains the values as shown in Figure 8-15.

Figure 8-15. 3D bar chart with default orientation

You can change the orientation of a 3D chart in two ways:

• Use the Format Toolbox to enter specific rotation values for each
axis.
• Drag the chart until you are satisfied with its appearance.
To change the orientation using the Format Toolbox, follow these steps:
1. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ) and open the 3D Chart section in the Format Toolbox
by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
2. Change the orientation by rotating the cube around one or more of
its axes. Change the X Rotation, Y Rotation, or Z Rotation values
by either choosing from the drop-down menu or entering a new
value. Quantrix applies the change immediately.
3. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo. To return the
chart to its standard orientation, set the X Rotation and Z Rotation
values to 45 and the Y Rotation value to 0.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
248
Understanding the Chart Formatting

To change the orientation by dragging the chart, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold down the CTRL key.
2. Position your cursor over the grid within the chart’s cube; do not
position it over the data.
3. Drag to rotate the cube until you are satisfied with its appearance.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo. To return the
chart to its standard orientation, use the Format Toolbox to set the
X-axis and Z-axis rotation values to 45 and the Y-axis rotation
value to 0 as described above.

Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls

Using the Format Toolbox, Quantrix gives you the ability to apply fine-
grained formatting to charts.

General Chart Settings

The following table describes chart settings applicable to all chart types:
Table 8-2. Common Chart Settings

Setting Description

Background Controls the color of the chart background.

Chart Type Specifies the chart type.
Chart Legend Controls whether the chart legend is displayed
horizontally, vertically, or not at all.
General Controls the name of the chart view that displays in
the tab title bar and model browser.
Title Specifies a title to display for the chart.

Note: The title can display at the top or bottom of

the chart by using the Position drop-down.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
249
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls

2D Chart Settings
The following table describes chart settings applicable only to 2D chart
types:
Table 8-3. 2D Chart Settings

Setting Description

Turning on any of the following settings displays a

label for the chart graphic associated with each data
point. To set the background color or font for a
Chart Labels
label, first select the label with your mouse. Then
choose from the Background and Font sections of
the Format Toolbox, respectively.
Name Displays the item name in the label.
Value Displays the data value in the label.
Percent Displays the percentage of the total.
Expression Displays the user-entered expression. See
“Embedded Expressions” on page 201 for more
help on Expressions.
Chart Settings that control how the chart displays data.
Chart Type Specifies the type of chart being displayed.
Orientation Specifies which chart axis is the data axis.
Series Label Displays the user-entered expression for the series
label. See “Embedded Expressions” on page 201
for more help on Expressions.
Point Label Displays the user-entered expression for the point
label. See “Embedded Expressions” on page 201
for more help on Expressions.
Cluster Spacing Sets the spacing between series clusters on bar
charts.
Percentage Displays data as a set of stacked percentages that
Stacking add up to 100%.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
250
Understanding the Chart Formatting

Table 8-3. 2D Chart Settings

Setting Description

Other Slice For pie charts, the label display for the ‘other’ pie
Label slice.
Slice Offset For pie charts, specifies how much to offset an
exploded pie chart.
Threshold (%) For pie charts, specifies the minimum percentage
value before a slice gets collapsed into the ‘Other’
slice.
Box/Whisker Specifies the data summary set to use for the
Option whisker chart. Choosing the Min, Q1, Q3, Max
option means that the Min will be taken from first
column of data, the first quartile from the second
column of data, etc. Your data should be set up
correctly for the option you choose.
Statistical Specifies what points to use for the range of the
Option statistical bars.
Use Error Bars Controls the display of the cross whiskers on the
statistical bar & box/whisker chart.
Rotation Controls how far Quantrix rotates the chart around
its Y-axis (to the left).
Elevation Controls how far Quantrix tilts the chart forward
or backward around its X-axis.
Depth Controls how thick, front to back, Quantrix makes
the data series of the chart.
Points are On a 2D plot, specifies to use a numeric row item
Domain Values value as the domain axis.
Interpolate On a 2D plot, draws a line between missing series
Missing Values values.
Hide Empty Will not plot any item with empty values in the
Points rows of the table view associated with the chart.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
251
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls

Table 8-3. 2D Chart Settings

Setting Description

Hide Empty Will not plot any item with empty values in the
Series columns of the table view associated with the
chart.
Axis Scaling Specifies the axis scaling option for charts in a
Chart Grid. For more information on the various
scaling options, see “Scaling Options” on
page 261.

Statistical Options in 2D Charts

Statistical Options in 2D Charts consist of the following:
• Delta: the chart will show a hi/lo bar indicating +/- delta. Delta is
taken from the last data column for the series.
• High Only: an error value is added. A bar is drawn at the height of
the data column plus the error value.
• Low Only: an error value is subtracted. A bar is drawn at the height
of the data column minus the error value.
• High/Low: the two columns following the data column are taken as
the high and low error values respectively.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
252
Understanding the Chart Formatting

3D Chart Settings
The following table describes chart settings applicable to 3D chart types:
Table 8-4. 3D Chart Settings

Setting Description

3D Chart Settings that control how the chart displays data.

Grid Color Sets the color used for axis lines and axis text.
Controls how far Quantrix rotates the chart about
X Rotation
its X-axis.
Controls how far Quantrix rotates the chart about
Y Rotation
its Y-axis.
Controls how far Quantrix rotates the chart about
Z Rotation
its Z-axis.
Contoured Displays contour lines in the chart.
Solid surface Adds depth to the Surface and Ribbon 3D chart
types.
Zoned Uses color to paint “zones,” or contour regions, in
the chart.
Show Drop Specifies whether Quantrix draws a line from the
Scatter Lines data point to a side of the chart cube.
Background Sets the color used to fill the interior of the 3D
Color grid.
Chart Settings that control how the chart displays data.
Controls how much relative space Quantrix inserts
Series Spacing between each set of elements that represent a
series. Possible values: 0 to 100.
Controls how much relative space Quantrix inserts
Point gap between each set of elements that represent a
point. Possible values: 0 to 100.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
253
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls

Chart Series Settings

To customize series settings, perform the following steps:
1. Select the series you want to customize in either of two ways:
• Click a chart element (a bar for example) that is part of the series.
• Click the box within the chart legend that represents the series. (To
make the chart legend visible, put a check in the Legend Visible
checkbox in the Chart Legend section of the Format Toolbox).
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ) and open the Chart Series section in the Format
Toolbox by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
The following table describes the various chart series settings.
Table 8-5. Chart Series Settings

Setting Description

Color Sets the color of the series.

Outline Color Sets the outline color for the series.
Outline Thickness Sets the outline thickness for the series.
Symbol If applicable, sets the symbol used to display the
series.
Symbol Size If applicable, sets size of the symbol used to display
the series.
Symbol Color If Applicable, sets the color of the symbol used to
display the series.
Exploded If applicable, allows the pie slice to be in a normal or
exploded state.
Series Type For Combination (2D) charts only, specifies the type
of chart graphic with which to represent the series.
This is found in the Chart Series section of the
Format Toolbox.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
254
Understanding the Chart Formatting

Set Default Series Styles

Once you have customized chart series settings, use Set Default Series
Styles to ensure that all new series added to the chart continue with those
customizations.
To set a default series style, follow these steps:
1. Customize the chart series as desired, as described in “Chart Series
Settings” on page 253.
2. Right-click on the chart, select Set Default Series Styles from the
pop-up menu as shown in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-16. Set default series with three items

Any items that are added to the chart series after setting the default will
follow the same pattern of formatting as shown in Figure 8-17.

Figure 8-17. Series with items added

The default settings are set for the current chart only.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
255
Understanding the Chart Formatting Controls

Tip: To make these settings available for multiple charts, save the model
as a template. See page 61for more information on templates.

Chart Axis Settings

To customize chart axis settings, perform the following steps:
1. Select the chart axis you want to customize by clicking on it.
2. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ) and open the Chart Axis section in the Format
Toolbox by clicking the Open Section button ( ).
The following table describes the various chart axis settings.
Table 8-6. Chart Axis Settings

Setting Description

Color Sets the color of the chart axis.

Show Grid Lines Choose to display the grid for a 2D chart type. For
3D chart types, you can also choose to display the
secondary grid.
Label Rotation Sets the rotation of the chart labels.
Scale On 3D chart types, sets the relative size of the
selected axis.
Minimum Sets the minimum value the axis displays.
Maximum Sets the maximum value the axis displays.
Grid Spacing Sets the spacing between grid lines that are perpen-
dicular to the axis.
Number Spacing Sets the distance between numbers shown on the
axis.
Tick Spacing Sets the distance between tick marks on the axis.
Origin Sets the origin for bar charts. That is, Quantrix
begins drawing the bar at the location specified by
origin.
Logarithmic Sets the chart axis format to Logarithmic.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
256
Understanding the Chart Formatting

Table 8-6. Chart Axis Settings

Setting Description

Log Tick Labels Sets the logarithmic format to Base 10(10^4),

Exponential (1e4) or Decimal (10000)
Axis Associates the selected series with a vertical axis.
Initially, all series are associated with the left axis.
Since Quantrix only displays vertical axes that are
associated with at least one series, initially only the
left axis is displayed.
Using more than one axis results in a clearer presen-
tation of information in cases where the data in one
series has a different scale from data in another
series. When using more than one axis, you should
select the Combination (2D) chart type, and apply
different series types to your series, for best results.
Quantrix allows for 5 left axis and 5 right axis for
each series.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
257
Chart Grid

Chart Grid
Professional Edition: It is often desired to create a visual
representation of the individual components of your data table. With chart
grid, you can display your data in multiple charts to be viewed simulta-
neously. Quantrix Professional users have the ability to create a Chart Grid
that simulates a table with a chart created for each cell value.

Creating a Chart Grid

To create a Chart Grid you must first add a chart view using the desired
matrix or table view. For more information on adding a chart view, see
“Creating a Chart View” on page 234.
To create a chart grid from a chart view, drag a category to the row or
column tray from the series, points, or filter trays as shown in Figure 8-18.

Figure 8-18. Move category column tray to create a Chart Grid

Your chart will appear in a Chart Grid whenever there is more than one item
in the row or column tray of the matrix or table view used to create the
chart.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
258
Chart Grid

Figure 8-19. Chart Grid with row and column charts

Using Chart Grid

Chart Grid Rows and Columns

Rows and columns in chart grid act like items in any matrix or table view.
You can perform many of the same actions as you would items in matrices
and table views. As with a table or chart view, changes to the structure or
data will be reflected in the original matrix and all of its related views. Any
changes to the presentation will only apply to the chart grid.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
259
Chart Grid

Table 8-7. Chart Grid row and column actions

Actions that effect Actions that effect

presentation: structure:

Resize row or column Add or delete items

Collapse row or column Rename items
Hide collapsed items Reorder items
Format item header Group items

Drill-down on Chart Data

By clicking on a column or row header in the chart grid, only the data
associated with that row or column will be displayed in the chart table. A
chart drill-down on YTD Sales is shown in Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20. Chart Grid drill down on YTD sales

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
260
Chart Grid

Expand a Chart
Double-clicking on a chart in the chart grid will expand that chart to fill the
entire charting canvas as shown in Figure 8-21. Click on the close chart icon
( ) to return to the Chart Grid.

Figure 8-21. Chart Grid with Widget.YTD chart expanded

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
261
Chart Grid

Formatting a Chart
Formatting changes in a Chart Grid will be applied to all charts in the grid.
For more information on formatting charts, see “Common Chart Format-
ting Techniques” on page 236.
In Figure 8-22, formatting was applied to both axes in the Widget.YTD
chart. Quantrix automatically applies those same changes to all of the charts
in the grid.

Figure 8-22. Chart Grid with formatting applied to Widget.YTD chart

Scaling Options

New: Quantrix has five options for the axis scaling of charts in a Chart
Grid. The options available are:

• Data Items: charts within the same data item use a common scale
• Individual Chart: each chart’s axis is scaled independently as shown
in Figure 8-23.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
262
Chart Grid

Figure 8-23. Chart Grid with individual chart scaling

• Row: charts in a row share a common scale

• Column: charts in a column share a common scale
• All Charts: all charts share a common scale based on the data with
the largest range

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
263
Chart Grid

Chart Grid Data Item

Many times items in a matrix contain data with vastly different ranges.
Comparing these items on a chart yields unsatisfactory results. With
Quantrix Chart Grid, you can make the category a Data Item Category.
The chart grid in Figure 8-24 shows sales units and dollars. By default,
Quantrix displays these two items with the same axis range which is deter-
mined by the item with the largest range.

Figure 8-24. Chart Grid without Data Item Category

When you make the category a Data Item Category, Quantrix will display
each item in the chart grid with an independent axis, as shown in Figure 8-
25 on page 264.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
264
Chart Grid

Figure 8-25. Chart Grid with Data Item Category

To make a category a Data Item Category:

1. Right-click on the desired category.
2. Select Data Item Category from the pop-up menu to place a check
mark next to Data Item Category.
To remove the Data Item Category formatting, repeat the steps above to
remove the check mark.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
265
Chart Grid

Manipulating the Page Layout

Page breaks can be displayed in the chart grid and moved to new positions.
To view and manipulate page breaks, follow these steps:
1. In File > Page Setup, click the Scale to 100 percent radio button.
As long as scaling is turned on, the percentage can be set as desired.
2. Choose View > Show Page Breaks from the Quantrix menu. The
page breaks will be represented by blue dashed lines on the chart.

Setting Page Breaks in a Chart Grid

You can manually determine where new pages will begin in chart grids by
inserting page breaks. To insert a manual page break follow these steps:
1. Click on the row or column item after which you wish to start a
new page.
2. Insert a page break in one of these ways:
• Choose Insert > Page Break.
• Right-click on the selected item and select Page Break.
Quantrix will begin a new page after each occurrence of that item in the
matrix. Page breaks that have been positioned by the user are represented by
a solid blue line.
To delete a manually set page break, right-click on the item and select Page
Break from the pop-up menu to remove the checkmark. For more informa-
tion, see “Using Page Breaks” on page 316.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 8: Charting a Model
266
Chart Grid

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 9: Presenting a Model

Chapter 9
Presenting a Model

About the Presentation Canvas and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Creating and Managing Presentation Canvases. . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding Table and Chart Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . 293

You can create dynamic, interactive presentations by combining charts,

matrices, and other elements. With text annotations, formatting, and
snap alignment, you can print out presentations in a neat, organized
fashion. Interactively view 'what if' scenarios with unique slider and
binder modes.
 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
268
About the Presentation Canvas and Tools

About the Presentation Canvas and Tools

You can create one or more presentations from any modeling matrix. Each
presentation canvas appears in its own tab, and Quantrix adds the presenta-
tion canvas to the Model Browser.

Figure 9-1. A presentation canvas, labeled

presentation
view
toolbar
filter tray

presentation
canvas

Objects on a presentation canvas, like a table view, are permanently linked to

the original matrices by structure, logic, and data; for details, see “About
Views” on page 32.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
269
Creating and Managing Presentation

Presentation Canvas
The presentation canvas contains one presentation and all of the views,
charts and custom objects that you add to it.
You use the canvas table or chart components just as you use the table in a
table or chart view; for details, see “Using the Table” on page 43. When you
rearrange category tiles in a chart or table, you change the layout of the chart
or table; you do not change the layout of the modeling matrix to which it is
linked.

Presentation Toolbar
The presentation toolbar in the presentation canvas tab provides formatting
and drawing tools that are unique to presentations; you use them to
customize and manipulate objects on the presentation canvas. Any format-
ting changes made on the presentation canvas do not affect the formatting
of the components to which they are linked. Other formatting tools are
available in the Format Toolbox and in the format toolbar in the model
window.

Figure 9-2. Presentation toolbar

Creating and Managing Presentation

Canvases
When you create a presentation canvas, Quantrix adds it to the Model
Browser. You can use the Model Browser to open, rename, move or
delete the presentation canvas.

Creating a Presentation Canvas

You can create a presentation canvas in one of these ways:
• Click the Insert Presentation Canvas button ( ).
• Choose Insert > Presentation Canvas.
Quantrix opens a blank presentation canvas tab and adds a corresponding
canvas entry to the Model Browser.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
270
Creating and Managing Presentation

You can add table views, charts and annotations to the canvas and
customize them in many ways. To get started, see “Adding Table and Chart
Views” on page 271.

Opening and Closing a Presentation Canvas

To open a presentation canvas, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, double-click the presentation canvas icon
( ).
To close a presentation canvas, click its close button ( ).

Renaming a Presentation Canvas

To rename a presentation canvas, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, double-click the name of the presentation
canvas that you want to change.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER. Quantrix renames the presen-
tation canvas in both the Model Browser and the presentation
canvas title bar.

Deleting a Presentation Canvas

To delete a presentation canvas, follow these steps:
1. If the Model Browser tab is closed, open it by clicking the Show
Model Browser button ( ).
2. In the Model Browser, click to select the presentation canvas that
you want to delete.
3. Delete the presentation in one of these ways:
• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Press the DELETE key.
• Position your cursor over the selected presentation canvas, press
the right mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up
menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
271
Adding Table and Chart Views

Quantrix removes the presentation canvas tab and the presentation canvas
entry from the Model Browser.

Adding Table and Chart Views

You can add table and chart views to the presentation canvas and format
them in different ways. Table and chart views are permanently linked to the
original matrices by structure, logic, and data; for details, see “About Views”
on page 32.

Adding Table Views

Add a table view to the presentation canvas in one of these ways:
• Highlight the desired matrix or table view in the Model Browser, click
and drag the view to the Presentation Canvas.
• Click the Insert Canvas Table View button ( ) in the presenta-
tion toolbar and follow these steps:
1. From the Insert Canvas Table View dialog box, select the
desired view and click OK.
2. Position the cursor over the desired location on the canvas and
click to place the selected view.

Tip: When using the Insert Canvas Table View button ( ) to place
the selected table view on the canvas, you can click and drag to create a
custom sized space for the view. The view will have scroll bars turned on,
allowing you to scroll through the view, if the window is smaller than the
view’s size.

Adding Chart Views

You can add an existing chart view to the canvas or create a new chart view
based on an existing table view. Add a chart view to the presentation canvas
in one of these ways:
• Highlight the chart view in the Model Browser, click and drag the
view to the Presentation Canvas.
• Click the Insert Canvas Chart View button ( ) in the presenta-
tion toolbar.
1. From the Insert Canvas Chart View dialog box, select the
desired view or chart and click OK.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
272
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

2. Position the cursor over the desired location on the canvas and
click to place the chart on the canvas.

Note: The Insert Canvas Chart View dialog box lists all table views
and chart views in the model. Choosing an existing chart will insert the chart
in its existing format. Choosing an existing table view will create a new chart
based on the table view chosen.

Professional Edition: You can add or create a new chart

view, that is formatted in the chart grid format, to the presentation canvas.
As you interact with chart grid, it can expand to be quite large. To avoid
spacing issues, click and drag to create a custom sized space for the chart
grid view. The view will have scroll bars turned on, allowing you to scroll
through the view. See “Chart Grid” on page 257 for more information.

Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

You can interact with canvas tables and charts as you would with a regular
chart and table view. Adding views and charts to the canvas is like adding a
table view or chart to the model. You now have the ability to work with
these different views in one presentation canvas.

Interacting with a Canvas Table View

To interact with a canvas table view, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Interaction ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar
drop-down.
2. Click on the desired table view on the canvas.

Note: When Layout ( ) mode is active in the presentation

toolbar drop-down, you can switch to interaction mode by double-clicking
on the desired table view on the canvas.

A blue box will be drawn around the view and a gray shading will highlight
the view that can be interacted with as shown in Figure 9-3.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
273
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

Figure 9-3. Single Canvas Object Interaction in Layout Mode

In Interaction mode, you can interact with the table view on the canvas as
you would in an individual view. You can add, delete or rename items; edit
cell values; format cells or items; hide, unhide and manipulate category tiles.
For more information on working with table views, see “About the Table
View” on page 54.

Interacting with a Canvas Chart View

1. Choose the Interaction ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar
drop-down.
2. Click on the desired chart on the canvas.

Note: When Layout ( ) mode is active in the presentation

toolbar drop-down, you can get into interaction mode by double-clicking on
the desired chart on the canvas.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
274
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

A blue box will be drawn around the chart and a gray shading will highlight
the chart that can be interacted with.
In Interaction mode, you can interact with the chart as you would in an
individual chart view. You can select the chart to change the chart type or
format and resize the chart; select a series to format; select an axis to format;
select a legend to make visible or invisible.
For more information on working with chart views, see “About the Chart
View” on page 52.

Professional Edition: You can interact with a chart grid on

the presentation canvas as you would any other chart grid. See “Chart Grid”
on page 257 for more information.

Interacting with a Canvas Chart Table View

Each chart has an underlying table view that controls the chart’s values and
category axis position.
To expose and interact with a canvas chart’s table view, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the desired chart on the canvas and choose Chart >
Show Table View from the menu.
The chart’s table view will be exposed. To interact with the table, see “Inter-
acting with a Canvas Table View” on page 272 and “About the Table View”
on page 54.
To expose or hide the category tiles:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the desired chart on the canvas and choose Table >
Hide Category Tiles from the menu.

Note: Any 2.4 model file with a chart, opened in version 3.0 or higher,
will open the chart in a presentation canvas. The chart’s table will be
exposed and any chart annotations (shapes, text etc.) will be displayed on
the canvas. To turn a canvas chart view back into Model Browser chart
view, see “Creating Views from Canvas Objects” on page 234.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
275
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

To hide the canvas chart’s table view, follow these steps:

1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the desired chart on the canvas and choose Chart >
Hide Table View from the menu.

Interacting with Linked Categories on the

Canvas
When multiple table views are present on a canvas, and the views share a
linked dimension, Quantrix is aware of this linked dimension relationship
among all the views. Specifically, when the linked dimension for multiple
views is on the filter tray, any change to the display item will change the
display on all the corresponding views on the canvas.
To see how this works, choose Help > Sample Models from the menu and
choose the file named IntegratedFinancials_Presentation and open the Finan-
cial Statements Report Presentation Canvas as shown in Figure 9-4.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
276
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

Figure 9-4. Presentation Canvas with Linked Category in Filter Tray

In this example, the Year category is linked between the Balance Sheet,
Income Statement and Key Income Statement Items chart. By
clicking on the Year category drop-down arrow in the filter tray, and
changing the item to a different Year value, the data will change in the three
linked views to the information for the new year.
To move a category to the canvas filter tray, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the desired chart or table view on the canvas to select it.
3. If the category tiles are not visible, Choose View > Hide Category
Tiles or right-click Table > Hide Category Tiles to un-check this
menu choice and expose the category tiles for the view.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
277
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

4. Click and drag the category tile from the view to the presentation
canvas filter tray, located under the canvas toolbar.
The same steps can be performed for other views on the canvas that share
the linked dimension. The dimension will merge into the existing category
on the filter tray. Any changes to the category’s item in the filter tray will
affect all views that have their linked category tiles on the canvas filter tray.

Note: You can move category tiles to a different axis in the view, or link
them to another view on the canvas. Choose View > Hide Category Tiles
to expose the category tiles for the view. Then click and drag the category
tile to the desired location.

Snapping Table Views Together

When two table views on a presentation canvas share a common dimension
along the same axis, they can be snapped together so that both views act as
one.
To see how this works, choose Help > Sample Models from the menu
and choose the file named LoanAmortization_Presentation.model and open the
Matrix Snap Demonstration presentation canvas as shown in Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5. Matrix Snap Demonstration Canvas

In this case, the Loan Years dimension is shared between the two canvas
table views. To snap the views together on the canvas, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Ctrl-click each view to select both objects.
3. Right-click and choose View Snap > Snap View Vertically from
the context menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
278
Interacting with Canvas Tables and Charts

4. Use the checkboxes to hide the column headers and collapse the
spacing as desired, as shown in Figure 9-6, then click Finish.

Figure 9-6. Configure View Snaps

At this point, the views will be snapped together. You can move the views
and format the items and cells in one action.
To unsnap the views, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the snapped view and choose View Snap > Remove
Snaps from the context menu.
At this point, the views on the canvas are independent of each other and can
be moved and formatted individually.

Professional Edition: Table views and chart grids that share a

common dimension can be snapped together on the presentation canvas.
The shared dimension needs to be in the row or column tray of the chart
grid that corresponds with the dimensions location in the table.

For more information on Chart Grid, see page 257.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
279
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Quantrix allows you to create text, lines, and shapes on the presentation
canvas, and then lets you format them in different ways. You can also
import graphical objects that were created using another application.

Adding Text Annotations

To add text to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Click the Insert Text button ( ) in the presentation toolbar.
2. Click the location on the presentation canvas where you want the text
to appear. Quantrix creates an empty, editable text box.
3. Type your text, and then press ENTER.

Tip: When typing in the text, you can force a new line by pressing the
CTRL and ENTER keys at the same time.

You can format this text using the Format Toolbox or format toolbar; for
details, see “Customizing Fonts” on page 206. You can manipulate the text
like all other objects on the presentation canvas; for details, see “Manipu-
lating Objects on the Presentation Canvas” on page 293. You can set
variable text parameters in a text annotation by utilizing Expressions; for
details, see “Using Expressions in Presentation Annotations” on page 292.

Adding Objects that Control Value of Cell

Connecting Sliders to Cell Values

You can add a Slider object to the canvas that controls the value of a table
view’s cell. By moving the slider position, you can change the value of the
cell without having to type a new value in the cell. The value in a cell, linked
to a slider, is controlled by setting the slider’s bounds.
To add a slider to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in a view and select Bind to > Slider
from the context menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
280
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

4. Use the Setup Slider window, as shown in Figure 9-7, to set the
slider properties. See Table 9-1 for definitions of slider property
settings.

Figure 9-7. Setup Slider

5. Place the slider object on to the canvas by clicking the desired

location.
6. Adjust the cell value(s) by clicking and dragging the slider handle.

Tip: To bring up the setup panel on an existing object, choose the

Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar, right-click the object,
and choose Properties from the context menu. Formatting options for the
object can also be accessed in the Format Toolbox.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
281
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Table 9-1. Setup Slider Settings

Setting Description

Minimum Sets the minimum bounds of the slider range.

Maximum Sets the maximum bounds of the slider range.
Major Tick Sets the numeric value for the spacing of the major
Spacing (longer) ticks.
Minor Tick Sets the numeric value for the spacing of the minor
Spacing (shorter) ticks.
Snap to Ticks Snaps the slider position to the closest tick value.
Invert Flips the order of the slider values.
Show Labels Displays numeric labels for the slider position.
Show Ticks Displays graphical ticks for the slider position.
Orientation Show the slider horizontally or vertically.

Adjusting Slider Display Settings

Sliders already established on your canvas have a variety of settings that can
be adjusted to meet the needs of your presentation.
To adjust the settings of a slider on your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas slider to select it.
3. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
4. Open the Slider section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the Open
Section button ( ).
5. Change the slider format values as desired. See Table 9-2 for slider
format setting information.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
282
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Table 9-2. Slider Format Settings

Setting Description

Show Labels Displays numeric labels for the slider position.

Show Ticks Displays graphical ticks for the slider position.
Orientation Show the slider horizontally or vertically.
Invert Flips the order of the slider values.
Major Tick Sets the numeric value for the spacing of the major
Spacing (longer) ticks.
Minor Tick Sets the numeric value for the spacing of the minor
Spacing (shorter) ticks.
Snap to Ticks Snaps the slider position to the closest tick value.

Adjusting the Slider Bounds

You can also adjust the minimum and maximum bounds for an existing
slider on the canvas.
To adjust the bounds for a slider on the presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas slider to select it.
3. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
4. Open the Bounds section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the
Open Section button ( ).
5. Change minimum and maximum bounds to the desired value.

Tip: If you want the minimum and maximum bounds to represent a

percentage you need to enter the decimal representation. To enter 5% as a
bounds value, enter .05.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
283
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Connecting Drop Down Menus to Cell Values

You can add a Drop-down Menu object to the canvas that controls the input
for a table view’s cell. The drop down menu appears as a cell that you can
place anywhere on the canvas and adjust several properties, such as font and
color. A user can then choose the value of the cell based on the list provided
in the drop down menu and therefore affect the output of your model.
To add a Drop Down Menu to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in a view and select Bind to > Drop
Down Menu from the context menu.
4. Use the Setup Drop Down Menu dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-
8, to set the drop down properties.

Figure 9-8. Setup Drop Down Menu

5. Place the drop down object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Connecting a Toggle Switch to Cell Values

You can add a Toggle Switch. object to the canvas to change a cell’s value
between two pre-set values. Choose from four switch types: Toggle Switch,
Light Switch, Power Switch, and Push Button. Choose the position of the
label and the values for the on and off positions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
284
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

To add a Toggle Switch to your presentation, follow these steps:

1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in the view and select Bind to >
Toggle Switch from the context menu.
4. Use the Toggle Switch Setup dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-9, to
set the properties.

Figure 9-9. Toggle Switch Setup

5. Place the toggle switch object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Connecting Radio Buttons to Cell Values

You can add a Radio Button object to the canvas that enables the cell value to
change between one or more pre-set values. You can apply meaningful
labels to each value.
To add a Radio Button object to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in the view and select Bind to >
Radio Buttons from the context menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
285
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

4. Use the Radio Button Setup dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-10, to
set the properties.

Figure 9-10. Radio Button Setup

5. Place the radio button object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Connecting Checkboxes to Cell Values

You can add a Checkbox object, that controls the value of a table view cell, to
the canvas. A checkbox is useful in mimicking an on-off switch in a model.
The checkbox places a one (1) in the cell when on, and a zero (0) in the cell
when off.
To add a checkbox to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell and select Bind to > Check Box from
the context menu.
4. Drop the checkbox object on to the canvas by clicking on the desired
canvas location.
5. Click the checkbox to turn it either on or off. This action places a 1
or 0 in the cell.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
286
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Adding Objects that Show Status of Cell

Use objects that show the status of a cell as an indicators for calculated cells,
to visually demonstrate if the value is where you would like it to be.

Connecting a Dial Gauge to Cell Values

You can add a Dial Gauge object to the canvas that reflects the range of a
value in a table view’s cell.
There are four types of dial gauges available: Circular, Semi-circular,
Horizontal Scale Meter, and Vertical Scale Meter. Set a range and color for
normal, warning, and critical levels as desired. You can also choose a
standard or pin style needle.
To add a Dial Gauge object to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in the view and select Bind to > Dial
Gauge from the context menu.

Figure 9-11. Dial Gauge Setup

4. Use the Dial Gauge Setup dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-11, to
set the properties.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
287
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

5. Place the dial gauge object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Connecting a Thermometer to Cell Values

You can add a Thermometer object to the canvas that reflects the range of a
value in a table view’s cell. You can set colors for ranges and sub-ranges of
values as well as a desired font and number format.
To add a Thermometer object to the presentation canvas, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell in the view and select Bind to >
Thermometer from the context menu.

Figure 9-12. Thermometer Setup

4. Use the Thermometer Setup dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-12,

to set the properties.
5. Place the thermometer object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
288
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

Connecting a Status Light to Cell Values

You can add a Status Light object to the canvas that visually demonstrates
when a cell value is more than, less than, or equal to a specified value.
To add a Status Light to your presentation, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click on the desired canvas table view to switch into interac-
tion mode.
3. Right-click on the desired cell and select Bind to > Status Light
from the context menu.
4. Use the Status Light Setup dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-13, to
set the properties.
5. Place the thermometer object on to the canvas by clicking the desired
location.

Figure 9-13. Status Light Setup

Connecting Annotations to Objects

You can connect text annotations to any other object on the presentation
canvas with a line. If you later move the object or the annotation, Quantrix
retains the connection and the line moves with the object. You can also
connect annotations to specific data points on a chart. When objects are
connected, you can move them and Quantrix retains the connection.
To connect one object to another, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
289
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

2. Create the object(s) that you want to connect to another object.

3. Click the Insert Line button ( ).
4. Click the first object, or click a specific data point on a chart.
5. Click the second object. Quantrix draws a line that connects them
and ends the line.
To delete the connecting line, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click to select the line.
3. Press DELETE.

Adding Graphics
There are three types of lines that can be added to a canvas.
• Straight Line - Inserts a straight line at each point.
• Curved (bezier) Line - Inserts a curved line at each point.
• Rectilinear Line - Inserts right angled lines at each point
To add a line, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click the arrow next to the Insert Line button ( ) in the presenta-
tion toolbar and select the desired line from the drop-down menu.
3. Click the location in the presentation canvas where you want the line
to begin.
4. Move the mouse and the line will start to draw on the canvas. Click
the mouse button once to set a line point. Continue to set additional
line points by moving the cursor to the desired location and clicking
the mouse button again.
5. To end the line at the desired point on the canvas double-click the
mouse button.

Tip: To remove a point from a line with multiple points, press and hold
the ALT key while clicking on the point.

Note: To create a line that connects two graphics, see “Connecting

Annotations to Objects” on page 288.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
290
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

To add a shape to the presentation canvas, follow these steps:

1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click the arrow next to the Shapes drop-down menu in the presenta-
tion canvas toolbar and choose the shape you want to insert. There
are several different shapes to choose from in five categories.
• 3D Shapes
• Arrows
• Basic Shapes
• Brackets
• Quantrix Symbols
3. Add and size the graphic by positioning your cursor over the location
in the presentation canvas where you want to place the object, press
and hold down the mouse button, drag until the object is the desired
size, and release the mouse button.

Tip: Double-click on an object to attach a text label.

To delete an object, click to select it, and then press DELETE.

Adding Images from Other Applications

You can add a picture or logo directly to the presentation canvas in one of
these ways:
• In the other application, select and copy the image. Right-click on the
presentation canvas and choose Paste from the menu.
• In the other application, select the image and hold the SHIFT key
down. Drag the image from the other application to the presentation
canvas.
To add a picture or logo to the background of a canvas object, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Insert a rectangle, circle, or text box as explained above.
3. Position your cursor over the object, press the right mouse button,
and select Set Background Image... from the drop-down menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
291
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

4. In the file browser, navigate to and select the image file you want to
import.
5. The image appears on the presentation canvas where you can re-size
it as needed.
To delete an image, click to select it, and then press DELETE.

Tip: Once the image is imported, you can automatically resize the annota-
tion to the proper size. Right-click the image and choose Resize to Image
from the pop-up menu.

Changing Colors and Styles of Custom Objects

You can use either the format toolbar or Format Toolbox to change the
colors and styles of custom objects.

Changing Fill Colors

To change the fill color of a custom object using the format toolbar, follow
these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click to select the object.
3. Apply a color change in one of these ways:
• Click the Fill Color button ( ) in the format toolbar to apply
the color shown on its button.
• Click the Fill Color button’s arrow and then choose from its color
palette. To choose a custom color, click More... in the palette,
choose a new color from the Colors dialog box, and then click
OK.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Tip: The same color options are available on the Background section of
the Format Toolbox.

Changing Line Colors and Styles

To change the line style of a line, circle, or rectangle, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
292
Adding and Formatting Custom Objects

2. Click to select the object.

3. Use one of the three active line buttons in the format toolbar, either
Line Color ( ), Line Thickness ( ), or Line Pattern ( ), to
apply a change in one of these ways:
• Click the button to apply the option shown on the button.
• Click the button’s arrow and then choose a different option from
its menu.
4. To undo an unwanted change, choose Edit > Undo.

Tip: The same color and style options are available in the Line section of
the Format Toolbox.

Using Expressions in Presentation Annotations

You can enter text into most presentation objects by following these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Double-click the object you wish to annotate and an editable text
field will appear.
3. Type to enter the desired text.
4. Press ENTER to complete editing, or ESC to revert your typing.
The text entered will stay embedded within the graphical object. You can
use Expressions - see “Expressions” on page 200 - to add calculated values
to your presentation annotations. To do this, type the annotation and
surround your expression with curly-braces, {}. For example, you could
type “Sales: {Income Statement::Q1:Sales / 1000} thousand”. This expres-
sion would insert the value of the Q1:Sales cell divided by 1000 from the
matrix named Income Statement in the model.
See “Expressions” on page 200 for more information about using
expressions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
293
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Canvas
You can manipulate charts, legends, and custom objects using the presenta-
tion toolbar and the Format Toolbox.

Interact with Canvas Objects

You can interact with canvas objects as well as canvas table views and
charts. To interact with a canvas object, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Interaction ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar
drop-down.
2. Click on the object you wish to interact with.
When Layout ( ) mode is active in the presentation toolbar drop-
down, you must change to interaction mode by using the presentation
toolbar drop-down in order to interact with objects such as sliders and
checkboxes.
For more information on how to interact with canvas objects, see “Inter-
acting with Canvas Tables and Charts” on page 272.

Layout Canvas Objects

When manipulating canvas objects, you will need to be in Layout mode.
When in this mode, clicking on a canvas object selects the entire object
allowing you to perform the manipulation techniques outlined in this
section (move, resize, etc.).

Moving Objects
To move an object, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Position your cursor over the object that you want to move, and then
press and hold down the mouse button so your cursor changes to a
move icon ( ).
3. Drag the object to a new location.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
294
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Move to Front
To bring an object that is behind another object to the front, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click the object on the presentation canvas that you want to move to
the front.
3. Click the Move to Front button ( )in the presentation toolbar.

Move to Back
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click the object on the presentation canvas that you want to move to
the back.
3. Click the Move to Back button ( )in the presentation toolbar.

Resizing Objects
To resize an object, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click to select the object; Quantrix displays resize handles on each
corner and in the center of each side of the object.
3. Drag a handle to resize the object.

Note: To resize a table view on the canvas, turn on scroll bars for the
object by opening the Table View section of the Format Toolbox and
placing a check in the Use Scroll Bars checkbox.

Note: It is possible to re-size multiple objects simultaneously, and

maintain their size relative to each other, by first grouping the objects.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
295
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Copying Objects
To copy an object on the same canvas, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the object and choose Copy from the menu.
3. Right-click on the canvas in the desired location and choose Paste
from the menu.
To copy an object to a different canvas, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the object and choose Copy from the menu.
3. Click on the new canvas to bring it into view. Right-click on the
canvas in the desired location and choose Paste from the menu.
To copy an object to an outside application, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Right-click on the object and choose Copy from the menu.
3. Click on the outside application to bring it into view. Access the Edit
menu of the application and choose Paste from the menu.

Note: You can copy multiple canvas objects at once. Prior to copying,
hold the SHIFT key down and click and select the multiple objects or hold
the mouse cursor down on an empty canvas location and draw a selection
box around all of the objects.

Tip: A shortcut for copying an object or group of objects is after

selecting, hold the CTRL key down (ALT key on OS X) and drag the group
of objects to copy to the new location. The new location can be the same
canvas, a different canvas or an outside application.

Deleting Objects
To delete an object, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click to select the object.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
296
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

3. Delete the object in one of these ways:

• Choose Edit > Delete.
• Press the DELETE key.
• Position your cursor over the selected object, press the right
mouse button, and then choose Delete from the pop-up menu.

Rotating Objects
Canvas objects’ orientation can be rotated on the canvas. To rotate a canvas
object, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas object you would like to rotate.
3. Click on the rotate handle ( ) and drag until the desired rotation is
reached.
4. Or, use the Rotate Canvas Object drop-down arrow ( ) in the
presentation toolbar to set the rotation degrees. To rotate multiple
objects, drag to select all of the objects that you want to rotate.

Group and Ungroup Objects

Objects on the canvas can be grouped together. To group canvas objects,
follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Drag to select the objects that you want to group.
3. Click the Group button ( ) in the presentation toolbar.

Tip: You can interact with individual objects in the group by double-
clicking the group while in Layout ( ) mode.

To ungroup an object, follow these steps:

1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click to select the object that you want to ungroup.
3. Click the Ungroup button ( ) in the presentation toolbar.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
297
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Viewing the Page Layout

Page breaks can be displayed on the presentation canvas and moved to new
positions. To view and manipulate page breaks, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Choose View > Show Page Breaks from the Quantrix menu. The
page breaks will be represented by blue dashed lines on the canvas.
3. Set a new page break in one of the following ways.
• Move your cursor over a page break line and the resize cursor will
appear. Hold the mouse key down and move the page break to the
desired location.
• Right-click on the canvas where you want the page break to
appear. Choose Page Breaks > Add Horizontal Page Break or
Page Breaks > Add Vertical Page Break.

Note: System generated page breaks are represented by a dashed blue

line. Page breaks that have been positioned by the user are represented by a
solid blue line.

To delete a manually set page break on the presentation canvas, follow these
steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Delete the page break in one of the following ways.
• Hold the CTRL key down and right-click on the page break to
delete it.
• Right-click on the page break and choose Page Breaks >
Remove Page Break from the pop-up menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
298
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Using the Drawing Grid

You use the drawing grid to position charts, legends, and custom objects.

Showing and Hiding the Drawing Grid

When you choose to show the drawing grid, Quantrix displays it on the
presentation canvas and includes it when you print the presentation.
To show the drawing grid, click the Show Grid button ( ) in the presen-
tation toolbar. To hide it, click the Show Grid button again.

Changing the Size of the Drawing Grid

To increase or decrease the spacing between grid lines, follow these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas to select it.
3. If the Format Toolbox is not open, click the Format Toolbox
button ( ).
4. Open the Canvas section in the Format Toolbox by clicking the
Open Section button ( ).
5. Type in a new value for the Grid Size section and press ENTER.

Drawing Grid Nudge Tools

You can nudge objects on the presentation canvas by following these steps:
1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas object you want to nudge.
3. Click on the Draw drop-down in the presentation toolbar and
choose Nudge Up, Nudge Down, Nudge Left or Nudge Right
to move the object.

Tip: You can use keyboard shortcuts to nudge objects on the presenta-
tion canvas. After selecting the object you want to nudge, use Alt+Up
Arrow, Alt+Down Arrow, Alt+Left Arrow, or Alt+Right Arrow to move
the object in the desired direction.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
299
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Using Snaps to Align Canvas Objects

Snaps are visual tools that help you align objects precisely on a presentation
canvas. There are four types of snaps that can be used as described in
Table 9-3.

Table 9-3. Presentation Canvas Snaps

Setting Description

Aligns the object to the canvas drawing grid. See

Grid Snaps “Using the Drawing Grid” on page 298 for instruc-
tions on how to use the drawing grid.
Aligns the object’s resize points to the other object’s
Point Snaps
resize points.
Aligns a point on a line with another line on the
Line Snaps
canvas.

To use presentation canvas snaps to align objects, follow these steps:

1. Choose Layout ( ) mode in the presentation toolbar drop-
down.
2. Click on the canvas object you want to align by selecting it.
3. Click on the Snaps drop-down in the presentation toolbar and
choose the appropriate snap setting you would like to use.
4. Click on the desired canvas object and drag. Use the visual snap
indicators to precisely align the object to the desired location on the
canvas.

Tip: You can have more than one snap setting active at the same time.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 9: Presenting a Model
300
Manipulating Objects on the Presentation

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 10: Printing a Model

Chapter 10
Printing a Model

About Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Previewing Model Components Before Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Printing Using Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Printing Multiple Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Changing Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

You can print all or part of your model, and can customize its printed
appearance in a variety of ways.
 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
302
About Printing

About Printing
Models often include many different matrices and views, each of which may
be filtered in one or more ways. You can print one matrix or view at a time
or you can print groups of matrices and views. Depending on the type of
component you choose to print, Quantrix offers different options for
printing some or all of it.
• For matrices, you can print the table, the formulas, and/or the notes.
• For chart views, you can print the chart, the charting table, and/or
the notes.
• For a presentation canvas, the entire canvas can be printed on one or
multiple pages.
• When a matrix or view includes a filtered table (where there are
category tiles in the filter tray), you can print only the current page or
all pages.
For example, say you have a chart view that has two category tiles in the
filter tray of its charting table, and each category contains 5 items. If you
choose to print all results (5 items * 5 items, or 25 results) for both the chart
and the charting table, Quantrix will print 50 pages.

Note: For more information on filtered tables, see “Filtering Based on

Categories” on page 124.

To print a component, follow these general steps:

1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix, view or canvas that
you want to print.
2. Preview your selection in one of these ways:
• Click the Print Preview button ( ).
• Choose File > Print Preview (Mac OS X users, use Preview
button on print panel).
3. Change printing options in one of these ways:
• In the Print Preview window, click the Page Setup button, select
options from the Page Setup dialog box, and then press ENTER.
• Choose File > Page Setup, click the Page Setup button, select
options from the Page Setup dialog box, and then press ENTER.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
303
Previewing Model Components Before

4. When your customization is complete, print the component in one of

these ways:
• Click the Print button ( ), choose printing options from your
printer’s dialog box, and then press ENTER.
• Choose File > Print..., choose printing options from your
printer’s dialog box, and then press ENTER.

Previewing Model Components Before

Printing
To preview model components before printing them, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Preview your selection in one of these ways:
• Click the Print Preview button ( ).
• Choose File > Print Preview.
Quantrix replaces the tool area and the work area of your model
window with the Print Preview controls.

Figure 10-1. Print Preview controls

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
304
Previewing Model Components Before

3. Inspect the preview in these ways:

• To change the number of pages you can preview at a time, choose
from the drop-down menu that is to the right of the Page Setup
button. In the example above, 9 is chosen, so the window displays
nine pages.
• To move between preview layouts, click the First Page, Previous,
Next, and Last Page buttons.
• To include or exclude the top or bottom portion of a matrix or
chart view, click to add or remove the checkmark next to the Print
Table, Formulae, or Notes checkboxes. See also “Including and
Excluding Tables, Formulas, and Charts” on page 307.

Note: The preview window does not indicate the total number of pages
that Quantrix will print. After you click the Print button, you will be able to
check this in your printer’s dialog box.

4. If you are satisfied with the preview, print the file by clicking the
Print button. Otherwise click Page Setup to change printing
options; for details, see “Changing Printing Options” on page 307.
5. To close Print Preview and return to the standard model window,
click the Close button.
You can print multiple table or chart views on the same page by creating a
presentation. For more information on the presentation canvas see
“Presenting a Model” on page 267.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
305
Printing Using Default Options

Printing Using Default Options

Quantrix prints components with these default options:
• Include only the top section of the matrix or view (for a matrix, only
the table; for a chart view, only the chart)
• Use a portrait orientation for matrices and presentation canvases; use
landscape orientation for charts
• Print only the current page
• Scale to 100%
• Empty headers and footers
• Do not repeat row and column headings
To print a component using these default options, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Click the Print button ( ).
3. In your printer’s dialog box, review or change printing options.

Note: Be sure to check the number of pages in the print job; if you are
printing a filtered matrix or view, this number may be very high. See also
“About Printing” on page 302.

4. When your customization is complete, press ENTER to print the

component.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
306
Printing Multiple Views

Printing Multiple Views

You can print all of the table views, chart views, and presentation canvases
inside an organizational folder at the same time by following these steps:
1. Arrange the views inside of an organization folder in the model
browser in the order you would like them to print. See “Using the
Model Browser” on page 38.
2. Click on the folder icon containing the views you want to print.
3. Choose File > Page Setup to set the printing options. See
“Changing Printing Options” on page 307 for more information
on print options.
4. Choose File > Print or File > Print Preview to continue the
printing process.

Note: The Header / Footer, Margins and Notes options set on the
folder will override those settings on the views only when printing the entire
folder.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
307
Changing Printing Options

Changing Printing Options

You use the Page Setup dialog box to change the default printing options.
This dialog box offers different options depending on whether you are
printing all or part of a matrix, presentation canvas, chart view, or table
view.

Figure 10-2. Page Setup dialog box for a matrix

Including and Excluding Tables, Formulas, and

Charts
Matrices and chart views each consist of two distinct sections; a matrix has a
table and a formula editor, and a chart view has a chart and a charting table.
When you print a matrix or chart view, Quantrix gives you the option of
printing one or both sections.
To specify whether to include or exclude tables, formulas, and charts, follow
these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or chart view that
you want to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. Specify sections to include or exclude in one or more of these ways:
• To include the table of a matrix or chart view, click the Table icon
to select it, and then click to place a checkmark in the Print table
checkbox as shown in Figure 10-3.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
308
Changing Printing Options

Figure 10-3. Page Setup dialog box for a matrix, table selected

• To include the formulas of a matrix, click the Formulas icon to

select it, and then click to place a checkmark in the Print formulas
checkbox.

Figure 10-4. Page Setup dialog box for a matrix, formulas selected

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
309
Changing Printing Options

• To include the chart of a chart view, click the Chart icon to select
it, and then click to place a checkmark in the Print chart
checkbox.

Figure 10-5. Page Setup dialog box for a chart view, chart selected

• To print a presentation canvas, click the Presentation Canvas

icon to select it, and then click to place a checkmark in the Print
Presentation Canvas checkbox.

Figure 10-6. Page Setup dialog box for a presentation canvas

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
310
Changing Printing Options

• For matrices, table views and chart views, you can also elect to
print the Notes for that view, or not, by clicking the Notes icon to
select it and by placing a checkmark in the Print Notes checkbox.

Figure 10-7. Page Setup dialog box for a table view, notes selected

• Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Tip: You can also include and exclude these sections using the Print
Preview window; for details, see “Previewing Model Components Before
Printing” on page 303.

Changing the Page Orientation

You can print your model components in either a portrait or landscape
orientation. If you are printing more than one section of a matrix or chart
view, you can specify a different orientation for each section.
To choose the page orientation, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. For each section that you are printing, choose the orientation.
• Click to select the icon for the appropriate section (Table,
Formulas, Notes, Chart, or Presentation Canvas).
• Click either the Portrait or Landscape radio button.
4. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
311
Changing Printing Options

Printing One or All Variations of a Filtered

Table
When the matrix, view, or presentation canvas that you are printing includes
a filtered table (i.e., where the table has category tiles in the filter tray), you
can choose to print either the variation that Quantrix is currently displaying
or all variations that you can generate by choosing from the drop-down
menus in the filter tray. For more information, see “About Printing” on
page 302.
If you are printing more than one section of a matrix or chart view, you can
specify a different number of variations for each section. To print one or all
variations, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. For each section, choose to print one or all variations.
• Click to select the section’s icon (Table, Formulas, Notes,
Chart, or Presentation Canvas).
• To print only the variation that Quantrix is currently displaying,
click the Print current result radio button. To print all variations,
click the Print all results radio button.
4. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Changing the Scale

You can change the size of tables, formulas, charts, and presentation
canvases by either scaling them by a specific percentage, or by indicating
how many pages across and down they should occupy.
To change the scale, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. For each section that you are printing, choose a scale.
• Click to select the section’s icon (Table, Formulas, Notes,
Chart, or Presentation Canvas).
• To scale it by a specific percentage, click the Scale to radio button
and then choose a value from its drop-down menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
312
Changing Printing Options

• To scale it to fit on a certain number of pages, click the Fit on

radio button and then enter the number of pages across and down
that it should occupy.
4. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Tip: When scaling to fit on a certain number of pages, you can set just
one of the page across or down settings. If a 1 is entered in the page across
and the page down is left blank, the print will fit on one page across and the
system will determine the proper number of pages to print down.

Adding Column and Row Headings

When you are printing large tables that span more than one page, you may
want to repeat the column and/or row headings on each page. To add or
remove these repeated headings, follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the matrix or view that you
want to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. Click to choose the Table icon.
4. To include the column names on each page, click to place a check-
mark next to Repeat column items. To include the row names,
click to place a checkmark next to Repeat row items.
5. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Using Headers and Footers

You can create and save headers and footers, and then include them on
every page when you print components.

Adding and Deleting Headers and Footers

To control whether a header or footer appears on all pages of a print job,
follow these steps:
1. In the Model Browser, click to select the component that you want
to print.
2. Choose File > Page Setup... to open the Page Setup dialog box.
3. In the Page Setup dialog box, click the Header/Footer tab.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
313
Changing Printing Options

Figure 10-8. Page Setup dialog box, Header/Footer tab selected

4. Change the header and footer options in one or more of these ways:
• To remove headers and footers from all pages, choose (none)
from both of the Select drop-down menus.
• To add a header or footer to all pages, choose one from the Select
drop-down menu; Quantrix displays the one you choose so you
can preview it.

Note: To add to or change the headers and footers that appear in the
drop-down menus, see “Customizing Headers and Footers” on page 314.

5. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
314
Changing Printing Options

Customizing Headers and Footers

The Header/Footer tab of the Page Setup dialog box includes drop-
down menus that list available header and footer formats. You can add new
formats to this list and then customize them, and they will be available to all
matrices and views within your model file.
To add new formats or edit existing ones, follow these steps:
1. Open the Page Setup dialog box to the Header/Footer tab in one
of these ways:
• Choose File > Page Setup... and then click the Header/Footer
tab.
• In the Print Preview window, click the Page Setup button, and
then click the Header/Footer tab.
2. Add a new format or edit an existing one.
• To add a new format, click the Add... button.
• To edit an existing format, choose it from the Select drop-down
menu, and then click the Edit... button.
You see a dialog box that lets you edit the new or existing format.

Figure 10-9. Dialog box for editing headers and footers

3. Name (or rename) the format by entering text in the Name field.
When you have completed your customization, this name will appear
in the drop-down menu of the Header/Footer tab.
Quantrix gives you the ability to insert images into your headers and footers,
see “Image” on page 315.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
315
Changing Printing Options

4. Add elements by clicking in the Left, Center, or Right field, and

then entering text or clicking one or more of the Insert buttons.
• Page # inserts the number of the current page. For example, to
make the header or footer read Page 1, first type the word Page,
and then click the Page # button.
• Page Count inserts the total number of pages in the print job. For
example, to make the header or footer read Page 1 of 20, type
the word Page, click Page #, type the word of, and then click
Page Count.
• Date inserts today’s date.
• Time inserts the current time.
• Path inserts the model’s file name and location on your computer.
• File inserts only the model’s file name.
• View Name inserts the category name on each page.
• Comments inserts any comments associated with the view.
• Category:Item works only with filtered tables; it inserts the
category name and item name on each filtered page.
• Item works only with filtered tables; it inserts the item name on
each filtered page.
• User Name inserts the name of the user computer.
• Image... allows you to insert an image that was created in another
application using the file browser.

Note: If the image is too large, it may print over your matrix. This can
be corrected by adjusting the margins in File > Page Setup..> Margins.
See “Setting Page Margins” on page 318 for more information.

• You can also use an expression to insert calculated values into the
header or footer. The expression must be surrounded with curly-
braces, {}, and can optionally include a number format code. See
“Expressions” on page 200 for more information about
expressions.
5. Delete unwanted elements by selecting them and then pressing the
DELETE key.
6. When your customization is complete, click the OK button.
7. Preview the customization on the Header/Footer tab; to make
more edits, click the Edit... button.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
316
Changing Printing Options

8. Include the customized header or footer on every page of your print

job by choosing its name from the Select drop-down menu.

Note: To use the same Page Setup options across multiple views,
charts, and matrices see the note under “Printing Multiple Views” on
page 306.

Using Page Breaks

You can view where new pages will begin when you print a table view or
presentation canvas by choosing View > Show Page Breaks. Page breaks
will be indicated in the following ways:
• Blue dashed lines indicate places where a new page must begin based
on the current page setup settings.
• Blue solid lines indicate manually inserted page breaks.

Setting Page Breaks in a Table View

You can manually determine where new pages will begin in table views and
chart grids by inserting page breaks. To insert a manual page break follow
these steps:
1. Click on the row or column item after which you wish to start a
new page.
2. Insert a page break in one of these ways:
• Choose Insert > Page Break.
• Right-click on the selected item and select Page Break.
Quantrix will begin a new page after each occurrence of that item in the
matrix.

Note: If you have multiple categories in the filter tray of the item you
wish to break on, you can constrain the page break to occur after a specific
instance of that item by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the
items outside of the target item to constrain the selection before you insert
the page break.

Removing Page Breaks

To remove a manual page break follow these steps:
1. Select the row or column item before the existing page break.
2. Remove a page break in one of these ways:
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
317
Changing Printing Options

• Choose Insert > Page Break.

• Right-click on the selected item and select Page Break to
remove the checkmark.

Page Breaks in the Presentation Canvas

You can manually determine where new pages will begin on the presenta-
tion canvas by moving the predefined page breaks on the presentation
canvas. To create a manual page break follow these steps:
1. Choose View > Show Page Breaks to display the page breaks on
the canvas
2. Position your cursor over the predefined page break (indicated by a
blue dashed line) that you wish to move so it changes into a Resize
cursor ( ).
3. Drag to move the page break to the desired location. The blue
dashed line becomes a blue solid line, indicating a manual page break.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 10: Printing a Model
318
Changing Printing Options

Setting Page Margins

To set the page margins, follow these steps:
1. Open the Page Setup dialog box to the Margins tab in one of these
ways:
• Choose File > Page Setup... and then click the Margins tab.
• In the Print Preview window, click the Page Setup button, and
then click the Margins tab.
The Margins tab looks like the following:

2. Set margins as desired.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 11: Sharing a Model

Chapter 11
Sharing a Model

About Quantrix Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Displaying Models in Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Exporting to Different File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

There are many ways for you to display all or part of a model in a
different application. You can also import from and export to different
file formats, and can copy and paste existing spreadsheet data into
Quantrix model files.
 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
320
About Quantrix Viewer

About Quantrix Viewer

It is easy to share model files with users that do not have the Quantrix appli-
cation. The Quantrix Viewer allows a user to view Quantrix files when no
licensed Quantrix Modeler application is present.

Obtaining Quantrix Viewer

The Quantrix Viewer is automatically installed with all Professional and
Standard editions for Windows. A stand-alone Quantrix Viewer installer can
be downloaded from the Quantrix web site (www.quantrix.com) and does
not require a serial number or activation to run.
Licensed users will be able to access both the modeler and viewer applica-
tions while an unlicensed user will be able to use only the Quantrix Viewer
to view existing models.

Mac OS X: For all OS X versions, Quantrix Viewer requires a

separate download and Quantrix Viewer will be displayed as a separate icon
in the Finder application menu.

Opening Quantrix Viewer

Open the Quantrix Viewer in one of the following ways:
• If Quantrix Modeler Standard or Professional is open, choose File >
Switch to Quantrix Viewer.
• From the Start Menu choose All Programs > Quantrix Modeler >
Quantrix Viewer.
• Double-click the Quantrix Viewer desktop icon.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
321
About Quantrix Viewer

Upon opening the Quantrix Viewer, users will see this Quantrix Launch
Panel.

Using Quantrix Viewer

The options available in Viewer mode are to open an existing model or to
seek assistance through Quantrix Support or the Quantrix Website. Any
edits to the file require a Quantrix license.

Figure 11-1. Model Viewer Menu and Toolbar

The Quantrix Viewer utilizes the Viewer Role in the model and the default
permissions granted to that role, which allows the following interactions:
moving category tiles, resize of columns and rows, zoom, and Formula Pane
open and close. Additional manipulation of category tiles can be granted by
selecting Allow Show / Hide in the Viewer Role permissions. For more
information about the Viewer Role see “Viewer Role” on page 358.

Note: Quantrix Viewer can utilize QAPI plug-ins and there are no
restrictions on model size.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
322
About Quantrix Viewer

Upgrading Quantrix Viewer

You can convert the Viewer application to a Modeler application in the
Windows platform by choosing Help > Upgrade... This opens the
Quantrix Store where a Quantrix Modeler license can be purchased.
Upgrading to Quantrix Modeler requires reactivation with a valid Quantrix
Modeler serial number.

Managing Quantrix Viewer

Users of the Quantrix Viewer can open existing models only. The Viewer
application always logs in with the Viewer Role, with all of the restrictions
assigned to that role enforced. The Viewer Role default permissions are
more restrictive than the Quantrix Viewer application as a whole. When the
model is opened, the matrices and views that were open when the model
was saved will be the only views visible, unless Allow Interactions permis-
sions are granted in the Viewer Role. Viewer Role permissions are model
specific. Allow Interactions permissions enable access to the Model
Browser and will allow the Viewer to open and close views. For more infor-
mation on the Viewer Role and Interaction Settings, see“Protecting a
Model” on page 358.
The following table demonstrates the menu options available in the
Quantrix Viewer either by default or with additional permissions granted.

Table 11-1.

Menu: Option: (OS X Menu Choice)

File Open...
Close
Page Setup...
Print Preview
Print...
Restart as Quantrix Modeler*
Exit (Quantrix Modeler > Quit)
Edit Copy
Copy View

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
323
About Quantrix Viewer

Table 11-1.

Menu: Option: (OS X Menu Choice)

Select All
Select None
Select Items Only
Select Cells Only
Find...
View Hide Category Tiles**
Show Input Cells
Show Notes
Show Page Breaks
Model Browser**
Calculator
Model Toolbar
Tools Options... (Quantrix Modeler > Preferences)
Help Contents
Index
Search
Upgrade...
Activate Quantrix
Update Quantrix
Model Statistics
About Quantrix (Quantrix Modeler > About)

*Requires Quantrix Modeler License

**Requires Viewer Role Permission

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
324
Displaying Models in Other Applications

Displaying Models in Other Applications

When you are ready to share your model with others, it is often convenient
to display model components in another application such as a word
processor. You can copy and then paste one or more components into
another application’s file.

Pasting a Model into Other Applications

To copy and then paste data into another application’s file, follow these
steps:
1. Click to select the matrix, view or canvas tab.
2. Select the data that you want to copy.
• To copy the entire table, choose Edit > Copy View.
• To copy only part of the table, use your mouse to select the region,
and then choose Edit > Copy.
3. Start the other application and specify an insertion point.
4. Paste the matrix or view in the format that you prefer.
• To paste it with HTML formatting, in the other application’s
window, choose Edit > Paste.
• To specify a different format, in the other application’s window,
choose Edit > Paste Special..., make a selection (Bitmap is often
an acceptable format) from the file format options list, and then
press ENTER.
The data then pastes into the other application.

Tip: To quickly copy and paste an entire matrix in the view or canvas to
another application in the default image format, simply click and drag the
icon from the model browser to the other application.

Note: When working with a presentation canvas, you can copy and
paste individual canvas objects to the other application. For more details see
“Copying Objects” on page 295.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
325
Exporting to Different File Formats

Exporting to Different File Formats

You can export the table portion of matrices and table views and save them
as different file formats. With the exception of exporting to an Excel file
with formulas, the resulting files contain data only, and as such are useful
for presentation purposes.
You cannot export presentation canvases and charts; however, you can
display them in other application’s files. See “Displaying Models in Other
Applications” on page 324.

Exporting to a Microsoft Excel® Document (.xls)

When you export to a Microsoft Excel® file, Quantrix exports the model
matrices and views you select and places each one on a separate worksheet
within the new Excel document. For filtered tables, Quantrix places all
variations on the same worksheet.

Caution: The Excel document will be protected by default. The Excel

document will not have a password attached and can be unprotected easily
from the Excel Tools menu.

To create a Microsoft Excel® document (.xls), follow these steps:

1. Choose File > Export > Excel Document...
2. The first pane of the Exporting Excel Document dialog contains a
list of the matrices and views contained in the current model. Select
the matrices and views you want to export, then click the Next
button.
3. If you selected more than one matrix or view, the next pane allows
you to specify the order in which to export the selected matrices or
views. Click Next when you are done specifying export order.
4. The next pane allows you to specify whether you want to export
formulas, export only MASTER worksheets, export current page
only, and if you want Excel to be opened when the export is
complete. See below for more information on these selections. Once
you have made your choices, click the Next button to proceed.
5. Click the Finish button to perform the export.
6. In the Save dialog box, type a new name in the File name field and
then press ENTER. To export your model to Excel 2007, in the Save

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
326
Exporting to Different File Formats

dialog box, select Microsoft Excel® 2007 File (*.xlsx) as Files of

type:.
Quantrix closes the Save dialog box when the export is complete and opens
Excel if the box was checked in step 4.

Note: The larger the model, the longer it takes Quantrix to export it.
For very large models, the export may take a few minutes. Models with
columns in excess of 256 can be exported to Excel 2007.

Choosing to export MASTER worksheets only will override any view selec-
tions you made in step #2.
Selecting Export current page only (only if not including formulae) will
export filtered tables in the current filtered state. When you choose this
option, Quantrix will automatically remove any choice to export formulas to
cells.

Exporting to a Web (.html) Document

When you export to a web document Quantrix exports the model matrices,
views, and charts you select to your choice of two web page file formats
readable by Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 5 and later, as well as
Mozilla compatible browsers version 1.7 and later. When you open the
exported document in a web browser, you can view each table individually,
and can still rearrange category tiles to change the table’s layout.
Being able to export a web document is useful when you want to share a
model with someone who doesn’t have Quantrix installed.
To create a web document, follow these steps:
1. Choose File > Export > Web (HTML) Document.
2. The first pane of the Export Web Document dialog contains a list
of the matrices and views contained in the current model. Select the
matrices and views you want to export, then click the Next button.
3. If you selected more than one matrix or view, the next pane allows
you to specify the order in which to export the selected matrices or
views. Click Next when you are done specifying export order.

Mac OS X: Supports export to HTML only. HTML exports as a zip

file that will need to be extracted by the recipient prior to viewing.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
327
Exporting to Different File Formats

4. The third pane looks like the following:

Information on the various options follows below. Click the Next

button once you are done making choices.
Export model as MHT file. Exports the model as a .mht web
archive file. A .mht web archive file is a single file that contains all the
elements needed to display a web page. Microsoft Internet Explorer
is the only web browser that reads .mht files.
Export model as HTML file. Exports model as a HTML (.html)
web document accompanied by an associated folder containing
additional elements referenced in the web document. For example, if
you create a HTML file called sample.html, Quantrix will create sub-
folder sample_files in the same folder where you saved sample.html.
Note: when copying (or moving) sample.html to another folder or
computer, be sure to also copy (or move) sub-folder sample_files along
with it.
Open exported file in browser when finished. Will automatically
open the new file in your systems default web browser when the
export is complete.
Document title. Specifies the HTML document title (to be distin-
guished from the filename.)
Background color. Specifies the HTML document’s background
color.
5. The fourth pane optionally allows you to specify header and footer
text for the exported model. Click Edit to specify the header and

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 11: Sharing a Model
328
Exporting to Different File Formats

footer if desired. When you are done, click the Finish button to
complete the export process.
6. In the resulting Save dialog box, type a new name in the File name
field and then press ENTER. Quantrix closes the Save dialog box
when the export is complete.

Note: Models that contain more than 500,000 cells in total or individual
matrices that are more than 75,000 cells are too large to export to a web
page as it exceeds the web browsers memory capability.

Exporting to a Delimited Text File (.CSV)

To export a Quantrix model to a Delimited Text file, follow these steps:
1. Choose File > Export > Delimited Text File... from the menu.
Click to select the matrix or view’s tab.
2. The first pane of the Export Delimited Text File dialog contains a
list of the matrices and views contained in the current model. Select
the matrices and views you want to export, then click the Next
button.
3. In the next pane, establish the order you want the selected views to
appear in the Delimited Text file, then click the Next button.
4. The last pane displays the following options:
Field Delimiter: Choose the method of text separation: comma (,),
tab (/t), semi-colon (;), or pipe (|).
Include Row Headers. Include row headers in the exported data.
Include Column Headers. Include column headers in the exported
data.
Export formatted numbers. Exports the numbers as formatted in
Quantrix.
Export view names with view. Include the view name above the
exported data.
Export formulas with matrices. Include the text of formulas in the
exported data.
Click Finish to proceed to the Save dialog.
5. In the Save dialog box, type a new name in the File name field and
then press ENTER. Quantrix closes the Save dialog box when the
export is complete.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 12: Integrating Data

Chapter 12
Integrating Data

DataLink Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Configuring DataLink Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Configuring DataLink Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Updating Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
DataLink Drill Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Quantrix Modeler can link disparate sources of data directly into your
models. Using the DataLink feature, you can specify links to queries in
SQL databases, Web Services, XML files, or flat text files. Quantrix
remembers these links for easy, live updating in the future.
 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
330
DataLink Introduction

DataLink Introduction
Quantrix can integrate external data into matrices in your model by using
DataLink. By establishing a DataLink between a matrix and an external
data source, you can easily update the data from the original source - thus
updating your model without recomposing and manually redoing an import.
Establishing a DataLink consists of two phases: configuring the source and
configuring the destination. Quantrix has the ability to pull data from a
number of different sources and integrate it into your model in two
different ways. This chapter will walk you through the two phases and
describe how to update DataLinks once you have them established.

Tip: DataLink is a powerful feature with a number of options and

settings. To make the most of this feature, practice configuring DataLinks
and updating them to understand how best to apply them.

Professional Edition: This feature is only available in

Quantrix Modeler Professional Edition.

The steps to establishing a DataLink are as follows:

1. Choose Data > DataLink > Create DataLink... from the menu.

Figure 12-1. Opening Screen of Data Link Wizard

2. Select the type of data source you would like to configure. Choose
the data source type based upon the location and type of data you
would like to import. You may view a description of each type by
clicking once on the labels in the Data source: list in the Data Link

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
331
DataLink Introduction

Wizard window. To select the data source type, click on the desired
type from the list in the Data Link Wizard window and click Next >.
3. Configure the DataLink Source - See “Configuring DataLink
Sources” on page 332. for the steps to configure each built-in data
source type.
4. Once you have configured the DataLink Source, the Data Link
Wizard will display the grid of data coming from the data source.
Confirm that the data looks like you expect it to, and click Next >.

Figure 12-2. Data Preview Screen of Data Link Wizard.

5. Select the type of data import you would like to perform. Choosing
Two Dimensional Matrix will create a matrix in your model that closely
resembles the two dimensional grid that you are importing. Choosing
Multi-dimensional OLAP Analysis will allow you to configure a
powerful multi-dimensional analysis of your data as it is being
imported into a matrix within your model. You may view a brief
description of each type by clicking once on the label in the Data
destination list of the Data Link Wizard window. See “Configuring
DataLink Destinations” on page 347. for a more detailed description
of each destination type.
6. To select the data destination, click on the desired type from the list
in the Data Link Wizard window and then click Next >.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
332
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-3. Data Destination Screen of Data Link Wizard

7. Configure the DataLink Destination - See “Configuring DataLink

Destinations” on page 347. for the steps to configure each built-in
data destination type.
8. When the DataLink Destination is configured, click Finish to
complete the link and perform the initial update.

Note: Matrices that have a DataLink established will display a linked

icon on the matrix in the Model Browser and Matrix Title Bar ( ).

Configuring DataLink Sources

Using SQL Databases
Quantrix can connect to databases and other data sources using JDBC or,
on Windows operating systems, ODBC. JDBC and ODBC drivers are avail-
able that can connect to all major database technologies and many other
data formats. These drivers are available from your database vendor or third
party developers. Please contact your database administrator or data source
software vendor for information on driver availability. See “Setting
Database Options” on page 69 for more information on adding JDBC
drivers to Quantrix.

Note: JDBC connections generally are faster and more robust than
ODBC connections when used with Quantrix.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
333
Configuring DataLink Sources

Note: To use an ODBC connection, you must first have configured an

ODBC Data Source on your Windows based computer. Please contact your
database administrator for more information on configuring an ODBC
Data Source.

If you selected to import your data from a JDBC / ODBC Data Source
(Step 2 on page 330) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in
Figure 12-4.

Figure 12-4. JDBC Connection Setup for Data Link Wizard

Follow these steps to configure the DataLink Source:

1. Select the Driver from the drop-down menu of available drivers. To
add additional JDBC Drivers to the system, see “Setting Database
Options” on page 69. To use an ODBC Data Source, select ODBC
Database Connection.
2. Once a driver is selected, the Data Link Wizard window shows
parameters for that driver if Quantrix recognizes the driver. If
Quantrix does not recognize the driver, you will be prompted to
enter the JDBC URL for that driver. See the driver documentation
for details on the URL format for your driver.
3. Optionally test the connection by clicking Test Connection. You will
be prompted for the username / password to associate with this
connection.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
334
Configuring DataLink Sources

4. Click Next > to continue. If you did not test the database connec-
tion, you will now be prompted to enter the username / password
for the database connection.

Note: If you place a check in the Save password checkbox, Quantrix

will save the password for this database connection on your machine.

New: The password will not be in the model file and you will have the
ability to edit the username and password for future connections.

Tip: You can use an Expression to set the Hostname, Server Port and/or
Database name for a DataLink connection. The syntax is {Matrix-
Name::itemName} where the matrix name is the name of the matrix in
which the connection variables are located, and the item name is the specific
item for the connection variable. For more information on Expressions see
“Expression Concepts” on page 200.

5. If the database connection is successful, you will see a screen that

looks like what is shown in Figure 12-5.

Figure 12-5. Columns Tab of Data Link Wizard

On the left of the wizard is a list of the tables available in the

database. Click the plus icon ( ) to the left of the table name to
display the table’s available columns.
6. Add columns to your query by double-clicking the column names in
the list at the left of the window. The columns will show up in the
right-hand side. Quantrix may ask you to help it decide how to link
the tables if it cannot detect the linkage (join) automatically.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
335
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-6. Selecting Columns to Import in Data Link Wizard

7. If necessary, you can manually edit the table joins on the Tables tab
of the Data Link Wizard window as shown in Figure 12-7.

Figure 12-7. Setting Table Joins in Data Link Wizard

Using the Tables tab you can change the table joins in the following
ways:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
336
Configuring DataLink Sources

• Alias - this is the name used elsewhere in the query to refer to the
table. Changing the Alias will automatically update the other refer-
ences to this table.
• Type - this specifies whether a corresponding row in the table
needs to be present for the query to return it. This setting allows
for inner joins, shown as required (default), and left outer joins
shown as optional.
• From - this is the column in the table being used to link or join to
the To column in another table.
• To - this is the column in another table in the query which is used
to compare with the From column to establish the join.

Note: You can establish more sophisticated joins using the SQL tab.
See“Using SQL Expert Mode” on page 337 for more information on using
the SQL tab.

8. If desired, you can add a qualifier to your query to filter only the rows
you would like to analyze using the Qualifiers tab as shown in
Figure 12-8.

Figure 12-8. Setting Qualifiers in Data Link Wizard

To add a qualifier, double-click on the column in the list on the left of

the Data Link Wizard window to add a column qualifier to the qualifier
tab. You can then set the logic of the qualifier using the drop-down
menus and fields in the lower left corner of the Qualifiers tab.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
337
Configuring DataLink Sources

9. To see the resulting SQL at any time during the process of building
your query, you can click on the SQL tab.
10. When you are satisfied with the query, click Next > and continue
with Step 4 on page 331 to complete the DataLink.

Using SQL Expert Mode

The query builder in the Data Link Wizard can help you construct simple
queries with straightforward qualifiers and joins. If you need to execute
more complex queries or if you prefer to enter your SQL manually, you can
click the SQL tab. This will present you with a SQL editor that will allow
you to type your SQL in manually as shown in Figure 12-9.

Figure 12-9. Using SQL Expert Mode in Data Link Wizard

Tip: If you have existing SQL that you would like to use within Quantrix,
you can use the clipboard to paste it directly into the SQL tab of the Data
Link Wizard.

You can use expressions in your SQL statement to point to cells in your
model to set dynamic variables in the SQL command. While in SQL expert
mode, use the curly braces {} to surround your expression statement. To
learn more about expressions, see “Expression Concepts” on page 200.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
338
Configuring DataLink Sources

Scrollable Emulation Driver

The Scrollable Emulation Driver provides a scrollable cursor for any
installed JDBC driver which provides more efficient memory allocation.
Use of the scrollable emulation driver may help prevent out of memory
errors with large data imports. For more information on using the Scrollable
Emulation Driver in your Quantrix DataLinks please contact
[email protected].

Using a Microsoft Excel File as a Database

Quantrix can connect to an Excel file data source using the ODBC
Database Connection Driver that is already configured in your application.
To use an Excel file as a data source you must first define and name a range
of data in the Excel document. It is possible to have several defined ranges
in the same Excel file. For more information, in Excel select Help >
Microsoft Excel Help and search for naming ranges.

Caution: Creating a DataLink to Excel does not convert the Excel

document to Quantrix. DataLink uses the Excel file like a database and
imports the data only.

To create a DataLink with an Excel file, choose to import your data from a
JDBC / ODBC Data Source (Step 2 on page 330).
Follow these steps to configure the DataLink Source:
1. Select ODBC Database Connection from the drop-down menu of
available drivers.
2. Once a driver is selected, you will be prompted to enter the URL
type. Select Microsoft Excel File.
3. Enter the name and location of the file you are connected to or select
the file using the file browser.
4. Optionally test the connection by clicking Test Connection. You
will be prompted for the username and password to associate with
this connection. If the file is not password protected, select OK.
5. Click Next > to continue. If you did not test the database connec-
tion, you will now be prompted to enter the username and password
for the database connection.
6. Continue from Step 5 on page 334 to configure the Excel ranges you
wish to import.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
339
Configuring DataLink Sources

Using XML Files

If you selected to import your data from an XML Data Source (Step 2 on
page 330) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in Figure 12-
10.

Figure 12-10. Opening XML Screen of Data Link Wizard:

Follow these steps to configure the XML Data Source:

1. Use the radio buttons to select the source of the XML data.
• XML file - the file is located on a file system available on your
computer.
• URL - the file is accessible via HTTP or FTP on the Internet.
2. Enter the url or file path into the Source location field. If you
selected XML file, you can click the Browse button to use the file
browser to locate the xml data file.
3. Click Next > to get to a screen like what is shown in Figure 12-11.
The tree on the left represents the structure of the XML document.
You can navigate the structure by clicking the plus icons ( ) to open
elements and expose their children. The list on the right indicates
which fields from the XML you will be importing.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
340
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-11. :Navigating XML Source with the Data Link Wizard

4. Double-click on the elements or fields you wish to import. They will

show up in the right pane.
5. Set the data type for each field using the drop-down menu in the
Data type column.

Figure 12-12. Selecting XML Source Data with Data Link Wizard

6. Click Next > and continue with Step 4 on page 331 to complete the
DataLink.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
341
Configuring DataLink Sources

Using Web Services / SOAP

If you selected to import your data from a Web Services / SOAP (Step 2 on
page 330) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in Figure 12-
13.

Figure 12-13. Opening Web Services Screen of Data Link Wizard

Follow these steps to configure the Web Services / SOAP Data Source:
1. Enter the URL for the Web Services Description file (WSDL).
2. Click Next > to continue to this screen shown in Figure 12-14.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
342
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-14. Selecting Web Services Operation in Data Link Wizard

3. Use the plus icons ( ) in the tree at the left to expose the available
services. Select the service you would like to invoke by clicking on the
label.
4. Click Next > to continue to a screen shown in Figure 12-15.

Figure 12-15. Selecting Web Services Parameters in Data Link Wizard

5. The Data Link Wizard will list the parameters of the Web Services
call you are invoking. Fill these in with the relevant values to
configure the Web Services invocation.
6. Continue from Step 3 on page 339 to configure the XML fields you
would like to import.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
343
Configuring DataLink Sources

Using Delimited Text Files / CSV

If you selected to import your data from a Delimited Text File (Step 2 on
page 330) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in Figure 12-
16.

Figure 12-16. Selecting Text File to Import in Data Link Wizard

Follow these steps to configure this data source:

1. Select the delimited text file (.csv or .txt) by one of the following
methods:
• Click Browse... and use the standard file browser to locate and
select the desired file.
• Type the full path to the desired file.
2. Once a valid file is selected, click Next > to get to a screen shown in
Figure 12-17.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
344
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-17. Setting Text File Delimiters in Data Link Wizard

3. If necessary, change the Field delimiter setting to match your file's

field delimiter by placing a check in the appropriate delimiters'
checkbox. The Data preview grid will update to reflect your changes
as you make them.
4. Set the Delimiter options:
• Coalesce consecutive delimiters, if checked, will cause multiple
delimiter characters in a row to be treated as one. This can
sometimes be used to import fixed-field-width text files.
• Field qualifier is the character that surrounds fields which could
contain delimiter characters.
5. Optionally specify a number of rows or columns to skip in the
import file using the Skip drop-down menus.
6. The File encoding option allows you to choose either US-ASCII
encoding or one of three UTF encoding options that enable Asian
character readability.
7. When you are satisfied with these settings, click Next > to get to a
screen like shown in Figure 12-18.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
345
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-18. Setting Data Types in Data Link Wizard

8. Confirm the data-type for each imported column by clicking on each

column in the Data preview grid and checking the Data type and
Include column in import settings fields. Change these settings if
necessary.
9. Select First row is column header if the first row in the data file is a
header for the columns.
10. Click Next >, and continue with Step 4 on page 331 to complete
the DataLink.

Using Fixed Width Files

If you selected to import your data from a Fixed Width File in the Data Link
Wizard, follow these steps to configure this data source:
1. Select the fixed width file by one of the following methods:
• Click Browse... and use the standard file browser to locate and
select the desired file.
• Type the full pate to the desired file.
2. Once a valid file is selected, click Next > to see the screen shown in
Figure 12-19.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
346
Configuring DataLink Sources

Figure 12-19. Setting Fixed Width File Columns in Data Link Wizard

3. Adjust the blue lines until you are satisfied with the column layout.
Click Next > and proceed with Step 7 on page 344.

Using Other Matrices

If you selected to import your data from Two Dimensional Matrix Data (Step 2
on page 330) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in
Figure 12-20

Figure 12-20. Defining Matrix Source in Data Link Wizard

Follow these steps to configure this data source:

1. Select which matrix to use as the data source using the first drop-
down menu.
2. Select which category to use as columns in the import. This category
will typically be the data or measure category of the matrix and will
define items which will become columns in the DataLink.
3. Click Next >, and continue with Step 4 on page 331 to complete the
DataLink.
Quantrix Modeler User Guide
 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
347
Configuring DataLink Destinations

Configuring DataLink Destinations

Configuring Multi Dimensional Links
If you selected to import the data using a Multi-dimensional OLAP Analysis
(Step 5 on page 331) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in
Figure 12-21.

Figure 12-21. Choosing Matrix Setting in Data Link Wizard

Follow these steps to complete the configuration of the DataLink:

1. Choose the destination for the DataLink by selecting one of the two
radio buttons:
• Create new matrix - this choice will create a new empty matrix
containing the results of the DataLink update.
• Use existing matrix - this choice will prompt you to select an
existing matrix into which the results of the DataLink update will
be placed.
2. Click Next > to continue to the screen shown in Figure 12-22.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
348
Configuring DataLink Destinations

Figure 12-22. Defining Incoming Columns in Data Link Wizard

3. In the column list, configure the columns you are importing:

• Include column - place a check in the checkbox to include that
column in the import.
• Type - There are 4 different types that can be selected for an
import column.
• Select Item if that column represents a data-item or measure of
your imported matrix.
• Select Category if you wish Quantrix to create a dimension
from the data in that column in the import.
• Select Group if the column data represents groupings of an
established category column in the data.
• Select Descriptor if the column describes or labels an estab-
lished category column in the data.
• Sort - If you selected Category for the Type of the column you can
specify if Quantrix should sort the items created. If you do not
specify a sort order, the items will be created in the order they are
found in the imported data.
4. If you are importing into an existing matrix, you can specify existing
categories for the categories you are creating from the import. If you
are creating a new matrix, you will not see that option on the screen.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
349
Configuring DataLink Destinations

5. Place a check in the Blank cells under a category assume

previous value checkbox if you would like the DataLink to assume a
blank cell has the same value as the last non-blank cell in that column
had. This is useful when importing from other applications which
export data using that assumption.
6. If you are importing into an existing matrix, select the appropriate
Category for items using the drop-down box. This is the category
from which the data-items / measures will be created.

New:

7. Place a check in the Suppress item category checkbox to prevent

the creation of a single data item category.
8. Click Next > to continue.
If you selected columns in your data to be groups or descriptors, you will be
presented with the screen shown in Figure 12-23.

Figure 12-23. Setting Groups and Descriptors in Data Link Wizard

9. For any groups specified, select the category the group applies to
using the Group items in Column: drop-down. Use the Descriptor
Category drop-down to indicate which category the descriptor
applies to. Use the Rendezvous Descriptor if you would like to
merge the descriptors into an existing Item Descriptor in the model.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
350
Configuring DataLink Destinations

10. If you selected columns containing numerical data or dates to be

used as categories in the DataLink, you will be presented with the
screen shown in Figure 12-24. If you did not, proceed to step 12.

Figure 12-24. Setting Category Number Format in Data Link Wizard

11. Select each numerical value column listed in the Column list and set
the format to be used to create item names.

Tip: You can use this method to group data. For instance, specifying
YYYY-MM as a date format will group all of the date values by month. You
can use the Extended formats to specify fiscal years and even bin values into
customized bins.

12. Click Next > to continue. The screen will look like what is shown in
Figure 12-25.
13. Select each data-item or measure column and select the summariza-
tion method(s) to be used for that column by placing checks in the
appropriate checkboxes. The Summarization methods column will
update to show the summarization method for each column. If no
summarization method is chosen, the last instance of the imported
data will populate the cell values.
14. Click Next > to continue to the screen shown in Figure 12-26.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
351
Configuring DataLink Destinations

Figure 12-25. Setting Summarization Methods in Data Link Wizard

15. If you selected an existing matrix to configure this DataLink for, the
top grid of this pane would allow you to specify how to handle
categories that are not otherwise mentioned in the DataLink, but
exist in the matrix. You can select to insert data on subsequent
updates into a new item on the un-referenced dimensions, or a
specific item that already exists.
16. Place a check in the Create new category with new item for data
checkbox to have the DataLink automatically create a new category
in which a new item is created for each successive update of the
DataLink.
17. Place a check in the Remove previously imported category items
and data not present in update if you would like the DataLink to
remove items along any dimension in the matrix if those items are
not present in the update. This is useful if you wish the DataLink to
essentially synchronize the data in the matrix with the data in the
latest update.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
352
Configuring DataLink Destinations

Figure 12-26. Specifying Data Locations in Data Link Wizard:

18. Click Finish to complete the DataLink and perform an initial

update.

Configuring Two Dimensional Links

If you selected to import the data into a Two Dimensional Matrix (Step 5 on
page 331) the Data Link Wizard will look like what is shown in Figure 12-
27.

Figure 12-27. Opening 2D Screen for Data Link Wizard:

Follow these steps to complete the configuration of the DataLink:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
353
Configuring DataLink Destinations

1. Place a check in the Use first column as row names checkbox if

you wish to use the first column of the import data as the item names
for the row items in the new matrix.
2. Click Next > to get the screen shown in Figure 12-28.

Figure 12-28. Setting Append or Replace Options in Data Link Wizard

3. Choose how Quantrix will handle data in subsequent updates of the

DataLink by selecting the corresponding radio button.
• Append rows to the existing matrix - this will append all new
data to the existing matrix.
• Replace row/column data from previous import - this will
replace all of the existing data with the data from the update
import.
4. Click Finish to complete the DataLink and perform an initial update.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
354
Updating Links

Updating Links
Editing the DataLink
You can modify a DataLink of a particular matrix by following these steps:
1. Click on the matrix in the Model Browser tab or bring the matrix' tab
to the front.
2. Choose Data > DataLink > Edit Data Link... from the menu.
3. The Data Link Wizard will appear and will be preset to the settings
you specified when you created the DataLink. Step through the
wizard and modify the settings you wish to change.
4. Click Finish to complete the changes and update the DataLink.

Updating One Link

To update the DataLink of a particular matrix follow these steps:
1. Click on the matrix in the Model Browser tab or bring the matrix tab
to the front.
2. Choose Data > DataLink > Update from the menu.

New: Selecting the DataLink Update... ( ) button in the Model

Toolbar gives you the option to update links to all or selected matrices.

Updating All Links

To update all of the DataLinks in a model, choose Data > DataLink >
Update All from the menu.

Deleting a DataLink
Existing DataLinks can be deleted by choosing Data > DataLink >
Remove DataLink from the menu.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
355
DataLink Drill Down

DataLink Drill Down

Once you have created a DataLink that contains summarized data, you can
drill down to see a list of the transactions that make up the data. For more
information on summarized data see step 13 on page 350.
To see the data detail, right-click on the summarized DataLink item and
choose DataLink Drill Down... from the menu.
A list of transactions that make up the DataLink summarized values will be
displayed. The constraints at the top of the DataLink Drill Down Results
window describe the data that is displayed as shown in Figure 12-29.

Figure 12-29. Data Link Drill Down Results

Note: A DataLink Drill Down can be performed on an item, group, or

individual cell.

If desired, you can create a new DataLink based on the drill down data by
selecting Create DataLink... from the bottom right-hand corner of the
DataLink Drill Down Results window. Proceed as you would to create a
new DataLink starting with Step 4 on page 331.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 12: Integrating Data
356
DataLink Drill Down

Figure 12-30. Creating Data Link with Drill Down Results

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Chapter 13
Advanced Topics

Protecting a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Quantrix Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Importing External Legacy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

This chapter provides information about certain advanced topics

including model protection, auditing, and Quantrix plugins.
 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
358
Protecting a Model

Protecting a Model
Roles
User roles and permissions allow you to grant different access levels to your
models for different types of users. Quantrix allows you to protect a model
by assigning a unique role for each potential user. Quantrix has three
predefined roles: Modeler, User and Viewer, with a set of default permis-
sions granted to each. For the best protection it is recommended to set a
password for each role.

Professional Edition: The ability to add, edit and remove

roles is only available with the Professional Edition. The Standard Edition
includes the three default roles which can be activated by assigning a
password to each. Standard users will be able to log into a model that has
roles enabled provided they have the correct password.

Roles and permissions are not designed to provide enterprise class level
security. Roles and permissions are intended to provide an easy way to
manage multiple users accessing the same model file.

Managing Roles

Modeler Role
The default role for a new model is that of Modeler. The Modeler Role is
unrestricted with all permissions granted.

User Role
The User Role default permissions enable all interaction functionality, allow
for datalink updates and model exports, and allow format, chart and layout
edits as well as moving, showing and hiding category tiles.

Viewer Role
The Viewer Role default permissions are much more restrictive than the
User Role. The model will open with only the matrices and views open that
were open when the model was saved. The only model manipulation
allowed is to move category tiles.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
359
Protecting a Model

Passwords
The Modeler role has access to the entire model without limitation. To
protect your model from all other users, set a password for the role of
Modeler. The Modeler is the only user that can access the Manage Roles
dialog box of a protected model, as shown in Figure 13-1.

Figure 13-1. Manage Roles Screen.

Set a password for each role by following these steps:

1. Choose Security > Manage Roles... from the menu. The Manage
Roles dialog is displayed.
2. Highlight the role for which you are setting a password.
3. Press Set Password.
4. Enter and confirm the desired password. Press OK.
5. Press OK again to exit.
When opening a model that is protected this way, a login pane appears as
shown in Figure 13-2.

Figure 13-2. Password Login Screen.

If only the role of Modeler has an associated password, users without the
Modeler password will be able to open the model by choosing another role
from the drop-down menu and pressing Login. They will only be able to
make edits or formatting changes as allowed by the role permissions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
360
Protecting a Model

Note: When a 2.4 model, with protection turned on, is opened for the
first time in version 3.0 or higher, the modeler user role will inherit any
passwords set in the 2.4 version of the model.

Setting a Default Perspective

Quantrix allows you to save your screen layout for a particular model in one
or more perspectives. You can assign one of these perspectives as the
default view for a user role in the model. To learn more about perspectives
see “Perspectives” on page 50.
To assign a perspective to one of your roles, follow these steps:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles... from the menu. The Manage
Roles dialog is displayed.
2. Highlight the role for which you are setting a perspective.
3. Choose the desired perspective from the Default Perspective drop-
down. Press OK.

New: You have the option to Save current layout as the default
perspective. When this option is selected, Quantrix creates a new perspec-
tive with the name RoleName Default Perspective. The new
perspective can be managed as all others.

Creating New Roles

To allow other users to make edits and manipulate data, you can create
unique roles and grant permissions to each one. See “Permissions” on
page 363 for more information on granting permissions.
A role that you create is only available for the current model unless you copy
and paste the role to a new model. For more information, see “Copy and
Paste Roles” on page 362.
Create a new role in one of these ways:
• Choose Security > Manage Roles... to open the Manage Roles
dialog box.
1. Press New Role.
2. Add a meaningful name for the new role in the Name: box.
3. If desired, enter and confirm a password for the new role.
4. If desired, choose a pre-existing perspective or save the current
layout as the default perspective for the role. Press OK.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
361
Protecting a Model

• Choose Security > Create Role to open the Create New Role
dialog box.
1. Add a meaningful name for the new role in the Name: box.
2. If desired, enter and confirm a password for the new role.

New:

3. If desired, place a checkmark in the Copy permissions from

existing role checkbox and choose the role to copy from the
drop-down menu.
4. If desired, choose a pre-existing perspective or save the current
layout as the default perspective for the role.
5. Press OK.

Changing Role Names

To change the name of a previously created role, follow these steps:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles... from the menu. The Manage
Roles dialog is displayed.
2. Highlight the role you wish to rename.
3. Add the new name in the Name: box.
4. Press OK.

Duplicating Roles
It is possible that many users with the same permissions will need access to
the model but require a unique user name and password. Quantrix allows
you to copy the permission settings of a user role and save each with its own
user name and password. To create a duplicate role within the same model
file, follow these steps:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles...
2. In the Manage Roles dialog box, highlight the role that you want to
copy.
3. Click the Duplicate button.
4. Press OK to close the Manage Roles dialog box.
Once the new user role is created you may want to rename the role and set a
new password, see “Passwords” on page 359 and “Changing Role Names”
on page 361 for more information.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
362
Protecting a Model

Copy and Paste Roles

There may be multiple models that require the same user roles to be applied.
It is possible to create a user role, set the appropriate permissions and then
copy the role from one model to another. To copy a user role from one
Quantrix model to another, follow these steps:
In the model containing the desired user role:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles...
2. In the Manage Roles dialog box, highlight the role that you want to
copy.
3. Right -click and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.
4. Press Cancel to close the Manage Roles dialog box.
In the model file that requires the new user role:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles...
2. In the white space of the Manage Roles dialog box, right-click and
choose Paste from the pop-up menu.
3. Press OK to close the Manage Roles dialog box.

Tip: If you have multiple user roles that are used in many of your models,
set up the roles in a blank model and save it as a template or as your default
model. This will ensure that the roles are already in place with each new
model that you build if you start with the default model or template.

Deleting Roles
To disable a previously created role, delete the role from the model by
following these steps:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles... from the menu. The Manage
Roles dialog is displayed.
2. Highlight the role you wish to delete.
3. Press Delete.
4. Press OK.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
363
Protecting a Model

Switching Roles
Once you have logged in to a protected model, you can switch to a different
role. This is important if the Modeler wishes to log in to grant additional
permissions on an open model for a user with limited access. To switch
from one role to another, follow these steps:
1. Choose Security > Switch Role... from the menu.
2. The Login Pane is displayed.
3. Select the correct role from the Role: drop-down menu.
4. Enter the correct password in the Password: box.
5. Press Login.

Permissions
Quantrix allows you to grant specific permissions to each role to control
how the model is used by others.

Professional Edition: The ability to grant permissions is only

available with the Professional Edition.

Note: Setting specific permissions for roles will not be secure unless a
password is set for the Modeler role. See“Passwords” on page 359 for
details on setting passwords. Without the Modeler password, all users will
automatically be logged in as Modeler with unlimited access. If a password
for the Modeler role has been set, users will still be able to open the model
without a password but they will be forced to choose a role other than
Modeler.

Upon opening a new model, the Modeler, User and Viewer roles have pre-
defined permissions established. To edit the permissions for each role,
choose Security > Permissions to open the Permissions tab as shown
below. Use the Expand All ( ) and Collapse All ( ) buttons to reveal
and hide all options as desired.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
364
Protecting a Model

The following tables provide details on the settings at each level.

Edit Structure Settings

These role specific settings apply to the currently active model.

Setting: Description:

Add/Remove Folders Allows insertion or deletion of folders

Allow Deletions: Allows deletion of all or designated

Category categories

Allow Deletions: Groups Allows deletion of groups and items in all or

& Items designated categories

Allow Deletions: Matrix Allows deletion of all or designated matrices

Allow Insertions: Allows insertion of new categories in all or

Category designated matrices

Allow Insertions: Allows insertion of groups and items in all or

Groups & Items designated categories

Allows insertion of new matrices and allows

Allow Insertions: Matrix
editing of newly created matrix

DataLink: Allow Allows creation of a new DataLink

DataLink Creation connection

DataLink: Allow
DataLink Updates Allows updating of established DataLinks

Edit Audit Trail Settings Allows changes to Audit Trail

Edit Formulae: Change Allows changes to calculation settings for

Calculation Settings model

Allows formula editing in all or designated

Edit Formulae matrices

Edit Input Constraints Allows edit of constrained inputs on cells

Allows renaming of all or designated

Edit Names: Category
categories

Edit Names: Group/ Allows renaming of all or designated groups

Item and items

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
365
Protecting a Model

Setting: Description:

Allows renaming of all or designated

Edit Names: Matrix
matrices and views

Allows editing of Notes and Descriptors in

Edit Notes / Descriptors all designated matrices

Enables the File > Export sub-menu

Enable export
features

Edit Presentation Settings

These role specific settings apply to the currently active model.

Setting: Description:

Allows editing of charts in all or designated

Edit Charts chart views and presentation canvases

Edit Folders Allows editing of folders

Allows layout changes and formatting edits

Edit Layout / Format in all or designated matrices, table views and
presentation canvases

Edit Views: Allow Allows deletion of all or designated views

Deletion of Views and presentation canvases

Edit Views: Allow Allows insertion of new views and presenta-

Insertion of Views tion canvases

Allows editing names of all or designated

Edit Views: Names views and presentation canvases, excludes
matrix names

Allows moving, showing and hiding of

Manipulate Category
category tiles in all or designated matrices,
Tiles
views, and presentation canvases

Save / Manage
Perspectives Allows changes in perspectives

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
366
Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy

Allow Interaction Settings

These role specific settings apply to the currently active model.

Setting: Description:

Allow Presentation Allows interaction with all or designated

Interaction presentation canvases

Allows input of data in cells in all or desig-

Edit Input Cells
nated matrices

Allows opening of all or designated folders,

Open Components matrices, views, and canvases

Open Dependency Allows interaction with the Dependency

Inspector Inspector

Open Model Browser Allows interaction with the Model Browser

Turning Off Protection

To turn protection off for the current model, remove the Modeler
password. Without the Modeler password, all users will automatically be
logged in as Modeler with unlimited access.
To remove a password follow these steps:
1. Choose Security > Manage Roles... from the menu. The Manage
Roles dialog is displayed.
2. Highlight the role for which you are removing a password.
3. Press Change Password.
4. Leave both fields blank and press OK.

Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy

Take one or more of the following steps to ensure the accuracy of a
Quantrix model:
• Turn on the Audit Trail feature
• Inspect model structure and formulas
• Inspect input values
The following sections describe these steps in detail.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
367
Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy

Audit Trail
The Audit Trail feature records:
• operations performed on a Quantrix model
• the user who performed them
• the time they were performed

Professional Edition: This feature is only available in

Quantrix Modeler Professional Edition.

Audit Trail is set at the document level; that is, each document has its own
Audit Trail setting. Newly created Quantrix models have the Audit Trail
feature turned off by default.
To turn Audit Trail on and view the operation history, choose Tools >
Audit Trail from the menu. An audit trail tab appears in the lower left of
the model window.

Click the On radio button to begin recording the Audit Trail history for the
document. Click the Off radio button to stop recording.
Click the Clear History button to delete all Audit Trail history entries.
The Maximum number of entries setting limits the number of entries
stored in the model document. You can use one of the predefined values in
the combo box drop-down, or type in your own choice. If the Audit Trail
feature is turned on and the limit is reached, older entries are discarded to
make room for new ones.
To copy existing history entries to the system clipboard for use in another
application, perform the following steps:

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
368
Auditing: Ensuring Accuracy

1. Using your mouse, select the text you want to copy in the Audit
Trail history panel.
2. Click the right button on your mouse to bring up the context menu.
3. Choose Copy to put the selected text onto the clipboard.

Inspecting Structure and Formulas

The matrices that comprise a model are structured. Categories, items and
groups define the structure of each matrix. Reviewing these structural
elements is a good first step toward verifying the model’s accuracy.

Tip: Items or groups may be collapsed in Quantrix. To fully review a

matrix, you may need to expand collapsed elements within the matrix. For
instructions on collapsing and expanding items and groups, see “Collapsing
and Expanding Items” on page 135. A good strategy is to create a new table
view of the matrix you want to inspect, and do your expanding there. That
way you don’t disturb the formatting of the original matrix.

After you have reviewed the structure of a particular matrix, open the
formula pane if it isn’t open already, and read the formulas. Note that the
formulas are written using category, item, and group names. Good
questions to ask at this point are the following:
• Are category, item, and group names used correctly within the calcu-
lations to reflect desired business or accounting practices?
• If numerical constants are part of the formulas, is their use
consistent?

Tip: Factoring numerical constants out of formulas and into an assump-

tions matrix is a good strategy to reduce potential errors. An assumptions
matrix is just an ordinary Quantrix matrix that contains numbers or text
used in more than one place in your model.

Inspecting Input Values

A model’s accuracy depends on the accuracy of its input values. To verify
that input values are correct for a given matrix, select View > Show Input
Cells from the menu, if it is not already selected. A small green triangle
appears in each input cell. An input cell is a cell whose value is not provided
by a formula.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
369
Quantrix Plugins

Quantrix Plugins
The Quantrix plugin facility allows Java developers to write code modules
(plugins) that extend Quantrix functionality.

Professional Edition: This feature is only available in

Quantrix Modeler Professional Edition.

Installing a Plugin
Follow the installation instructions that come with the plugin.
In general, installing a plugin means (1) creating a sub-folder under the
plugins folder contained in the main Quantrix installation folder and (2)
placing plugin module files (*.jar and *.xml files, for example) in this sub-
folder. In most cases, the plugin developer will provide you with a zip file or
a copy of the directory to be placed inside of the plugins folder contained
within the main Quantrix installation folder.

Removing a Plugin
Follow the uninstall instructions that come with the plugin. In most cases,
this will mean removing the plugin’s directory installed in the plugins folder
contained within the Quantrix installation folder.

Note: Be sure to delete only the folder of the plugin you wish to
uninstall.

Developing a Plugin
You develop Quantrix Plugins using the Java programming language and
QAPI, the Quantrix Application Programming Interface. Detailed informa-
tion on using QAPI to write plugins is beyond the scope of this Guide.
Please look on the Quantrix website (http://www.quantrix.com) or contact
Quantrix directly for more information on obtaining and using QAPI.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Chapter 13: Advanced Topics
370
Importing External Legacy Files

Importing External Legacy Files

Supported File Formats
You can import two types of legacy files to Quantrix:
• .imx files that were created with Lotus Improv. To save an Improv file
as .imx, choose File > Save As from the Lotus Improv menu.
• modelFile files that were created with NeXTSTEP Quantrix.

Importing Files
To import an .imx, or modelFile file as a new Quantrix file, follow these steps:
1. Open a new Quantrix file.
2. Choose File > Import.
3. Specify the file that you want to import.
• In the Import dialog box, choose the type of file from the Files
of type drop-down menu.
• Open the folder that contains the file by choosing from the
Look in drop-down menu.
• Open the file by double-clicking it. Quantrix imports the entire
file.
4. Save the new file.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Appendix A: Keyboard Shortcuts

Appendix A
Keyboard Shortcuts

File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Edit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Selection Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

This Appendix provides a list of all keyboard shortcuts within the

application.
 Appendix A: Keyboard Shortcuts
372
File Commands

File Commands
Operation Shortcut

File > Close CTRL + F4

File > New CTRL + N
File > Open CTRL + O
File > Print CTRL + P
File > Save CTRL + S

Edit Commands
Operation Shortcut

Edit > Copy CTRL + C

Edit > Cut CTRL + X
Edit > Delete Delete
Edit > Find CTRL + F
Edit > Paste CTRL + V
Edit > Paste Values CTRL + ALT + V
Edit > Select All CTRL + A
Edit > Redo CTRL + Y
Edit > Undo CTRL + Z

Selection Commands
Operation Shortcut

Extend selection up one cell SHIFT+up arrow ( )

Extend selection to first row SHIFT,ALT+up arrow ( )

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix A: Keyboard Shortcuts
373
Selection Commands

Operation Shortcut

Extend selection up one page SHIFT+PAGE UP

Extend selection down one cell SHIFT+down arrow( )
Extend selection to last row SHIFT,ALT+down arrow( )
Extend selection down one page SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend selection one left SHIFT+left arrow ( )
Extend selection to the first cell ALT+SHIFT+HOME
SHIFT,ALT+left arrow ( )
Extend selection to first column
or SHIFT+HOME
Extend selection one page left SHIFT,ALT+PAGE UP
Extend selection one right SHIFT+right arrow ( )
SHIFT,ALT+right arrow ( )
Extend selection to last column
or SHIFT+END
Extend selection one page right SHIFT,ALT+PAGE DOWN
Enter value and move down one cell Down arrow( )
Enter value and move up one cell Up arrow ( )
Enter value and move right one cell Right arrow ( ) or TAB
Left arrow ( ) or
Enter value and move left one cell
SHIFT+TAB
Move to first row ALT+up arrow ( )
Move to last row ALT+down arrow( )
Move to first cell ALT+HOME
Move to first column ALT+left arrow ( ) or HOME
Move to last column ALT+right arrow ( ) or END
Move up one page PAGE UP
Move left one page ALT+PAGE UP

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix A: Keyboard Shortcuts
374
Other Commands

Operation Shortcut

Move down one page PAGE DOWN

Move right one page ALT+PAGE DOWN

Other Commands
Operation Shortcut

Presentation Canvas: nudge object ALT+arrow keys ( )

Presentation Canvas: scroll presentation canvas arrow keys ( )
Model browser: change order of matrices, chart CTRL+up arrow ( )
views, table views CTRL+down arrow( )
CTRL+up arrow ( )
Formula editor: change order of formulas
CTRL+down arrow( )
CTRL+click & drag category
Matrix and table view: create a linked category
tile
Select existing item or category
Insert new item or category (after existing.)
tile, then press ENTER.
Select existing item or category
Insert new item or category (before existing.)
tile, then press SHIFT+ENTER.
CTRL+up arrow ( ) or
Move item up or left
CTRL+left arrow ( )
CTRL+down arrow( ) or
Move item down or right
CTRL+right arrow ( )
Close all views CTRL + H
Open Help F1
Open and close format toolbox. F3

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

Appendix B
Functions

About Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Alphabetical Summary of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

This Appendix shows you how to add functions to formulas and

provides an alphabetical summary of the Quantrix function library.
 Appendix B: Functions
376
About Functions

About Functions
Quantrix provides a library of functions for use within formulas.
You can add a function to a formula either by typing it into the formula
field, or by selecting it using the Functions tab. The Functions tab lists all
available functions by category, provides syntax and detailed information on
using each function, and provides a pointer to a sample model that shows
the function in action.
To add a function using the Functions tab, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the formula field to which you want to add a function.
2. Click the Function... button in the formula toolbar. Quantrix
displays the Functions tab.

Figure B-1. Functions tab

3. Click to select from the Category list, click to select from the
Function list, and then click OK. Quantrix inserts the function and
empty parentheses into the formula you are editing.

New: Choose the All Category for an alphabetical listing of all available
functions.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
377
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Alphabetical Summary of Functions

The table below lists all Quantrix functions and their input values (known as
arguments), provides a brief description of each function, and indicates the
category to which each function belongs.
The table uses these typographical conventions:
• Literal syntax (the function name and parentheses) appears in
Courier.
• Arguments appear in italics.
• Optional arguments are enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
• Ellipses (...) indicate that the function optionally accepts repetitions
of the argument type that precedes the ellipses.
For example, consider the syntax for the and() function:
and(boolean1,boolean2, ...)
This syntax indicates that and() requires a minimum of two boolean values,
and accepts additional values as desired.

Note: For detailed argument definitions and examples look up the

specific function in the Functions tab.

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

& Joins two or more text strings together. Use Text

between the items to be joined.
@descriptor(Category, Returns the value of the DescriptorName for the Structural
DescriptorName) currently evaluating cell along the specified
Category.
Returns the minimum unique name for the Structural
@id(Category) currently evaluating cell along the specified
Category.
Returns the item name for the currently Structural
@item(Category)
evaluating cell along the specified Category.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
378
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

Returns the name of the group or item that is Structural

the specified number of levels beneath the
Category. The category itself is level 0, the
@level(Category,StartLevel, immediate descendants are level 1, their
[EndLevel]) descendants are level 2, and so on. Level -1
represents the item names and negative numbers
can be used to specify levels up from the item
names.
abs(number) Absolute value of a number. Math
acos(number) Arccosine of a number (between -1 and 1). Trigonometric
Returns value in radians in the range 0 to PI.
acosh(number) Inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number (>=0). Trigonometric
and(boolean1, boolean2, ...) Returns TRUE if all of its boolean arguments are Logical
TRUE. Otherwise returns FALSE.
asin(number) Arcsine (inverse sine) of a number (between -1 Trigonometric
and 1). Returns value in radians in the range -PI/
2 to PI/2.
asinh(number) Inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. Trigonometric
atan(number) Arctangent (inverse tangent) of a number. Trigonometric
Returns the value in radians, in the range -PI/2
to PI/2.
atan2(x, y) Arctangent (inverse tangent) of the angle Trigonometric
between a line from the origin (0, 0) to a point in
the Cartesian plane and the line comprising the
X-axis. Returns value in radians in the range -PI
and PI, excluding -PI.
atanh(number) Inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number (between Trigonometric
-1 and 1).
avedev(number1, [number2], ...) Average of the absolute deviations of data Statistical
points from their mean. It is a measure of the
variability of a data set.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
379
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

average(number1, [number2], Average (arithmetic mean) of its arguments. Statistical

...) Only numbers are included in this calculation.
averagea(value1, [value2], ...) Average (arithmetic mean) of its arguments, Statistical
evaluating text and FALSE in arguments as 0,
TRUE evaluates as 1.
betadist(x, alpha, beta, [A], Cumulative beta probability density function. Probability
[B]) The cumulative beta probability density function Distribution
is commonly used to study variation in a
probability across samples, such as the fraction
of a day people spend commuting.
betainv(probability, alpha, beta, Inverse of the cumulative beta probability Probability
[A], [B]) density function. Distribution
between (value, low, high, Checks that the value of the first argument is Logical
[inclusive]) between the values of the next two arguments.
The fourth argument is an optional boolean
indicating whether to include the two end values
(default is true). The types of the values must be
all numbers (or convertible to numbers) or they
will be compared on their text representation.
Returns 1 if TRUE and 0 if FALSE.
binomdist(number_s, trials, Returns the individual term binomial Probability
probability_s, cumulative) distribution probability. Distribution
case (testvalue, case1, Returns value1 if testvalue is equal to case1, value2 if Logical
value1,[case2, testvalue is equal to case2, etc. If no match is
value2],...[defaultvalue]) found, defaultvalue is returned.
ceiling(number, significance) Rounds number up (away from 0) to the nearest Math
multiple of significance; number and significance
must be same sign.
char(code_number) Returns character specified by code_number from Text
the character set in use on your operating system
platform. Results may vary between different
systems.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
380
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

chidist(x, degree_freedom) Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi- Probability

squared distribution. Distribution
chiinv(probability, Inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi- Probability
degree_freedom) squared distribution. Distribution
chitest(actual_range1, Test for independence: the value from the chi- Probability
expected_range1, squared distribution for the statistic and the Distribution
[actual_range2], appropriate degrees of freedom.
[expected_range2], ...)
choose(index, value1, ...) Chooses a value from a list of values, based on Lookup and
index. Where index indicates which value is to be Reference
taken from the list.
clean(text) Removes non-printable characters (such as tab Text
characters) from text. Where text indicates the
location of the text to be cleaned.
clearerror(value, If replacement-value is supplied and value is an Information
[replacement-value]) error, returns replacement-value. If
replacement-value is not supplied and value is an
error, returns an empty value.
clearzero(value, If replacement-value is supplied and value is a zero, Information
[replacement-value]) returns replacement-value. If replacement-value
is not supplied and value is a zero returns an
empty value.
code(text) Returns the numeric code for the first character Text
in a text string, from the character set in use on
your operating system platform. Results may
vary between different systems.
combin(n, r) Calculates the number of combinations of r Statistical
objects chosen from n objects. Both r and n
must be greater than 0.
concatenate(text1, text2, ...) Joins two or more text strings into a single text Text
string.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
381
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

confidence(alpha, Confidence interval for a population mean. Probability

standard_deviation, size) Distribution
correl(array1, array2) Correlation coefficient between two data sets. Statistical
cos(angle) Cosine of the angle (in radians). Trigonometric
cosh(number) Hyperbolic cosine of a real number. Trigonometric
count(number1, [number2], ...) Returns a count of all the numbers contained in Statistical
its arguments. An argument can be (1) a number
or (2) a reference to a cell or range of cells.
counta(value1, [value2], ...) Returns a count of all non-blank values Statistical
contained in its arguments. An argument can be
(1) a non-blank value or (2) a reference to a cell
or range of cells.
countblank(range) Count of the number of empty cells in a Statistical
specified range of cells.
countif(range, condition) Count of all values in range that satisfy condition. Statistical
Condition must be surrounded by quotes or
refer to a cell containing the condition text.
covar(array1, array2) Covariance, the average of the products of Statistical
deviations for each data point pair in two data
sets.
critbinom(trials, Smallest value for which the cumulative Probability
probability_success, alpha) binomial distribution is >= value of the criterion Distribution
value.
date(year, month, day) Returns a number that represents the date in Date and
date-and-time code. Time
datevalue(date_text) Converts date in the form of text to a number Date and
that represents the date in date-and-time code. Time
day(number) Extracts the day of the month from a date-and- Date and
time code. Time

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
382
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

dayofyear(number) Extracts the day of the year from a date-and- Date and
time code, where January 1st returns 1. Time
days360(date1, date2, [method]) Returns the number of days between the date1 Date and
and date2 based on a 360-day year. If date1 is Time
later than date2, days360() returns a negative
value. This function is useful with certain
accounting systems where 30-day months are
assumed.
db(initial_value, ending_value, Declining balance. Depreciation of an asset Financial
lifetime_years, year_num, during a particular year using the fixed-declining
[months_year1]) balance method.
ddb(initial_value, ending_value, Double declining balance. Depreciation of an Financial
lifetime, period_num, [factor]) asset for a specified time period using the
double-declining balance method or some other
method you specify.
degrees(radians) Converts radians to degrees. Trigonometric
devsq(number1, [number2], ...) Sum of squares of deviations of data points Statistical
from their sample mean.
dollar(number, [decimal]) Formats number as currency with decimal Text
precision. If decimal is omitted, a default
precision of 2 is used.
err([error_string]) Returns an error value. Information
errortype(value) Returns an integer representing the error type of Information
an error value.
even(number) Rounds a positive number up or negative Math
number down to the closest even integer.
exact(text1, text2) Returns TRUE if text1 and text2 are identical. Text
exact() is case-sensitive: exact("the", "The")
returns FALSE.
exp(power) Raises Euler's number (e) to the specified power. Math

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
383
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

expondist(x, lambda, Exponential distribution. Probability

cumulative {boolean}) Distribution
fact(N) Calculates N factorial (N!). For N > 0, N! = (1 x Math
2 x ... x N); 0! = 1. N is rounded down to the
nearest integer.
fdist(x, deg_freedom1, F probability distribution (degree of diversity) Probability
deg_freedom2) for two data sets. Distribution
find(text, target_text, Returns the starting position of text within Text
[start_num]) target_text, with the search beginning at
start_num. If start_num is omitted, search starts
at the first character in target_text. Case
sensitive.
finv(probability, deg_freedom1, Inverse of the F probability distribution. Probability
deg_freedom2) Distribution
first(list, [skip empties]) Returns the first value in a list of values. Lookup and
Optionally skip empty values by entering 1. Reference
fisher(x) Fisher transformation at x. This transformation Probability
produces a function that is normally distributed Distribution
rather than skewed.
fisherinv(y) Inverse of the Fisher transformation: if y = Probability
fisher(x) then x = fisherinv(y). Distribution
fixed(number, decimal, Rounds number to decimal precision and returns Text
[no_commas]) the result as text. Provide #TRUE# for the
optional no_commas argument to obtain result
without thousands separators.
floor(number, significance) Rounds number down (toward 0) to the nearest Math
multiple of significance; number and significance
must be same sign.
forecast(x, dependent_values, Calculates, or predicts, a future value along a Statistical
independent_values) linear trend by using existing values.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
384
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

ftest(array1, array2) F-test, the one-tailed probability that the Probability

variances in array1 and array2 are not Distribution
significantly different.
fv(rate, num_periods, payment, Future value of an investment based on Financial
[present_value], periodic, constant payments and a constant
[payment_type]) interest rate.
gammadist(x, alpha, beta, Gamma distribution. Probability
cumulative {boolean}) Distribution
gammainv(probability, alpha, Inverse of the Gamma distribution. Probability
beta) Distribution
gammaln(x) Natural logarithm of the Gamma function. Probability
Distribution
geomean(number1 {>0}, Geometric mean of a series of positive values. Statistical
[number2 {>0}], ...)
harmean(number1, [number2], Harmonic mean of a data set of positive Statistical
...) numbers: the reciprocal of the arithmetic mean
of reciprocals.
hour(number) Extracts the hour of the day from a date-and- Date and
time code, returning a value from 0 to 23. Time
hypgeomdist Hypergeometric distribution, the probability of a Probability
(num_success_sample,num_sample, given number of sample successes, given the Distribution
num_success_population, sample size, population successes, and
num_population) population size.
if(condition, value1, value2) Returns value1 if condition evaluates to TRUE, or Logical
value2 if condition evaluates to FALSE.
indirect(range) Returns the range of cells identified by the Lookup and
argument. The name of the range follows the Reference
conventions of naming ranges in formulas. If the
range argument does not resolve to a valid range
(due to an improperly defined range or renaming
of an item in a previously valid range) the result
will be an #INDIRECT error.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
385
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

int(number) Rounds number down to the nearest integer. Math

intercept(dependent_values, Calculates the point at which a line will intersect Statistical
independent_values) the y-axis by using a best-fit regression line
plotted through the known x and y values.
ipmt(rate, period, num_periods, Interest payment for a particular time period on Financial
principal, [future_value], a principal amount, based on periodic, constant
[payment_type]) payments and a constant interest rate.
irr(values, [guess]) Internal rate of return for a series of regularly Financial
occurring cash inflows (positive values) and
outflows (negative values). These cash flows do
not have to be constant, as they would be for an
annuity.
isblank(value) Returns TRUE if value refers to an empty cell. Information
isempty (value) Returns TRUE if value refers to an empty cell. Information
iserr(value) Returns TRUE if value is an error other than Information
#N/A.
iserror(value) Returns TRUE if value is an error. Information
isna(value) Returns TRUE if value is #N/A. Information
isnontext(value) Returns TRUE if value is not text or is blank. Information
isnumber(value) Returns TRUE if value is a number. Information
istext(value) Returns TRUE if value is text. Information
join(list, separator) Concatenates the string values of list elements, Text
inserting separator between them, and returns the
result.
kurt(number1, [number2], ...) Kurtosis of the data set. Kurtosis characterizes Probability
the relative peakedness or flatness of a Distribution
distribution relative to the normal distribution.
Positive kurtosis indicates a relatively peaked
distribution and negative indicates a relatively
flat distribution.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
386
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

large(array, k) Returns the k-th largest value in a Statistical

data set (array).
last(list, [skip empties]) Returns the last value in a list of values. Lookup and
Optionally skip empty values by entering 1. Reference
left(text, [num_chars]) Returns a string containing the first num_chars Text
characters in text. If num_chars is omitted,
returns the first character in text.
len(text) Returns the number of characters in text. Text
list ([value],...) Returns a list comprising its arguments Information
beginning with value.
ln(number) Natural (base e) logarithm of number. Function Math
ln() is the inverse of function exp().
log(number, [base]) Logarithm of number to the given base. If base Math
omitted, base 10 is assumed.
log10(number) Base 10 logarithm of number. Math
loginv(probability, mean, Inverse of the lognormal cumulative distribution Probability
standard_deviation) function of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed Distribution
with parameters mean and standard_deviation.
lognormdist(x, mean, Cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where Probability
standard_deviation) ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters Distribution
mean and standard_deviation.
lookup(key_value, search_list, Locates key_value within search_list, returning Lookup and
value_list) corresponding value from value_list. For lookup() Reference
to function correctly, search_list must be sorted
in ascending order. [key_value is the value to be
searched for; search_list is the item to be
searched; value_list is the item containing the
result, must be the same size as the search_list.]
lower(text) Returns a copy of text, with all letters in text Text
converted to lower case.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
387
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

match(lookup_value, Returns position of lookup_value within Lookup and

search_range, [match_type]) search_range. Behavior is dependent on optional Reference
argument match_type.
max(number1, [number2], ...) Returns the largest value in a set of values, Statistical
ignoring text and logical values.
maxa(value1, [value2], ...) Returns the largest value in the list, counting Statistical
TRUE as 1, text and FALSE as 0.
median(number1, [number2], ...) Returns the median, the number in the middle Statistical
of a set of numbers; that is, half the numbers
have values greater than the median and half
have values less than median.
mid(text, start_num, num_chars) Returns a string containing num_chars characters Text
from text, starting with the character at position
start_num.
min(number1, [number2], ...) Returns the smallest value in a set of values, Statistical
ignoring text and logical values.
mina(value1, [value2], ...) Returns the smallest value in a set of values, Statistical
counting TRUE as 1, text and FALSE as 0.
minute(number) Extracts the minute from a date-and-time code, Date and
returning a number from 0 to 59. Time
mirr(values, finance_rate, Modified internal rate of return for a regularly Financial
reinvest_rate) occurring cash inflows (positive values) and
outflows (negative values), considering both
interest paid on ouflows and interest received
from reinvestment of inflows.
mod(number, divisor) Returns the remainder after number is divided by Math
divisor. Result has the same sign as divisor.
mode(number1, [number2], ...) Most frequently occurring value in a set of Statistical
numeric values.
month(number) Extracts the month index from a date-and-time Date and
code, where January returns 1. Time

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
388
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

N(value) Converts non-number values to a number: dates Information

to serial numbers, TRUE to 1, anything else to
0.
na() Returns error value #N/A. Information
negbinomdist(num_failures, Negative binomial distribution, the probability Probability
num_successes, that there will be num_failures failures before Distribution
probability_success) num_successes successes, with probability_success the
probability of success. This function is similar to
the binomial distribution, except that the
number of successes is fixed and the number of
trials is variable.
normdist(x, mean, Normal cumulative distribution for the specified Probability
standard_deviation, cumulative mean and standard deviation. Distribution
{boolean})
norminv(probability, mean, Inverse of the normal cumulative distribution Probability
standard_deviation) for the specified mean and standard deviation. Distribution
normsdist(z) Standard normal cumulative distribution (has a Probability
mean of 0 and standard deviation of 1). Distribution
normsinv(probability) Inverse of the standard normal cumulative Probability
distribution (mean = 0, standard deviation = 1). Distribution
not(boolean) Returns the logical opposite of its argument Logical
interpreted as a boolean. For example,
not(#FALSE#) returns TRUE, and not(-1)
returns FALSE.
now() Returns current date and time. Date and
Time
nper(rate, payment, present_value, Number of periods necessary to pay down a Financial
[future_value], [type]) principal amount based on periodic, constant
payments and a constant interest rate.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
389
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

npv(rate, amount, ...) Net present value of an investment based on a Financial

discount rate and a series of future payments
(negative values) and income (positive values)
that occur at regular intervals.
odd(number) Rounds a positive number up or negative number Math
down to the nearest odd integer.
or(boolean1, boolean2, ...) Returns TRUE if one or more of its boolean Logical
arguments are TRUE. Returns FALSE if all
arguments are FALSE.
pearson(array1_independent, Pearson product moment correlation Statistical
array2_dependent) coefficient, r, a dimensionless index that ranges
from -1.0 to 1.0 inclusive and reflects the extent
of a linear relationship between two data sets.
percentile(range, percentile) The k-th percentile of values in a range. Statistical
percentrank(range, x, Rank of a value in a data set as a percentage of Statistical
[significance]) the data set.
permut(n, r) Calculates the number of permutations of r Statistical
objects chosen from n objects. Both r and n
must be greater than 0.
PI() Returns the constant pi (~3.1415926536), the Trigonometric
ratio of the circumference of a circle to its
diameter.
pmt(rate, num_periods, principal, Calculates the payment for a loan assuming Financial
[future_value], [type]) constant payments and a constant interest rate.
poisson(x, mean, cumulative Poisson distribution. A common application of Probability
{boolean}) the Poisson distribution is predicting the Distribution
number of events over a specific time.
power(base, exponent) Raises base to the power of exponent. Math
ppmt(rate, period, num_periods, Payment on the principal for a particular time Financial
present_value, [future_value], period for an investment assuming periodic,
[type]) constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
390
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

prob(num_range, prob_range, Probability that values in a range are between Statistical

lower_bound, [upper_bound]) lower_bound and upper_bound. If upper_bound is
not supplied, returns probability that values are
equal to lower_bound.
product(number1, [number2], Returns the multiplication product of its Math
...) arguments.
proper(text) Returns a copy of text, with the first letter in Text
each word given in upper case, and other letters
given in lower case.
pv(rate, num_periods, payment, Present value of an investment: the total amount Financial
[future_value], [type]) that a series of future payments is worth now.
quartile(range, quart) Quartile of a data set. Statistical
radians(degrees) Converts degrees to radians. Trigonometric
rand() Generates a random number greater than or Math
equal to 0 and less than 1. Returns a different
number each time the model is recalculated.
randmt() Generates a random number greater than or Math
equal to 0 and less than 1 using the Mersenne
Twister pseudo random number generation
algorithm. Returns a different number each time
the model is recalculated.
rank(number, value_list, [order]) Rank of a number within a list of numbers. If the Statistical
list were sorted, the rank would be the number's
position after sorting.
rate(num_periods, payment, The interest rate per period of a loan or an Financial
present_value, [future_value], investment.
[type], [guess])
replace(target_text, start_num, Starting at position start_num, replaces num_chars Text
num_chars, new_text) of string target_text with string new_text. Returns
the result.
rept(text, num_times) Repeats text num_times times. Text

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
391
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

right(text, [num_chars]) Returns a string containing the last num_chars Text

characters from text.
roman(number) Returns the Roman numeral representation of Text
number, in text format.
round(number, digits) Rounds number to the given number of digits. Math
rounddown(number, digits) Rounds number down (toward 0) to the given Math
number of digits.
roundup(number, digits) Rounds number up (away from 0) to the given Math
number of digits.
rsq(dependent_values, Square of the Pearson product moment Statistical
independent_values) correlation coefficient through the given data
points.
s(range) Gives the first value in a range as a string. Text
search(find_text, target_text, Returns the position of the first instance of Text
[start_num]) find_text within target_text, reading from left to
right (not case-sensitive).
second(number) Extracts the second from a date-and-time code, Date and
returning a number from 0 to 59. Time
For more information on the following select functions, see “Select Function” on page 189. In each
of the select functions value_list is the value you want returned; key_list is the item to be searched;
lookup_value is the value to be searched for.
select(value_list, key_list, For each value L in lookup_value, locates the value Lookup and
lookup_value) K within key_list, such that K equals L. If found, Reference
returns the corresponding value in value_list.
*See “Using As” This function will return all values in the
value_list where K equals L.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
392
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

selectbetween(value_list, For each pair of values L1 in lookup_value1 and Lookup and

key_list, lookup_value1, L2 in lookup_value2, locates the values K within Reference
lookup_value2, [inclusive]) key_list, such that L1 < K < L2. If found, returns
the corresponding values in value_list. If the
optional argument [inclusive] is TRUE, the
comparison is L1 <= K <= L2. This function
will return all values in the value_list where K is
greater than L1 and less than L2.
selectgreaterthan For each value L in lookup_value, locates the value Lookup and
(value_list, key_list, K within key_list, such that K > L. If found, Reference
lookup_value, [inclusive]) returns the corresponding value in value_list. If
the optional argument [inclusive] is TRUE, the
comparison is L1 <= K <= L2. This function
will return all values in the value_list where K is
greater than L.
selectlessthan(value_list, For each value L in lookup_value, locates the value Lookup and
key_list, lookup_value, K within key_list, such that K < L. If found, Reference
[inclusive]) returns the corresponding value in value_list.This
function will return all values in the value_list
where K is less than L.
selectlist(value_list, key_list, For each value L in lookup_value_list, locates the Lookup and
lookup_value_list)( values K within key_list, such that K = L. If Reference
found, returns the corresponding values in
value_list. This function will return all values in
the value_list where K equals L.
selects(value_range, test_range, Return a list of cells from value_range that Lookup and
condition) corresponds to the cells in test_range that meet Reference
condition. Condition must be surrounded by
quotes or refer to a cell containing the condition
text.
sign(number) Returns a value signifying the sign of number: -1 Math
if negative, 0 if 0, +1 if positive.
sin(angle) Sine of an angle. Trigonometric

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
393
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

sinh(number) Hyperbolic sine of number. Trigonometric

skew(number1, [number2], ...) Skewness of a distribution: a characterization of Probability
the degree of asymmetry of a distribution Distribution
around its mean. Positive skew indicates an
asymmetric tail extending in the positive
direction while a negative skew is a tail in the
negative direction.
sln(initial_value, ending_value, Straight line depreciation of an asset for a single Financial
lifetime) period.
slope(dependent_values, Slope of the linear regression line through the Statistical
independent_values) given data points.
small(array, k) Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set. Statistical
sqrt(number) Square root of number. Returns error if number is Math
negative.
standardize(x, mean, Returns the normalized value from a Probability
standard_dev) distribution characterized by a mean and standard Distribution
deviation.
stdev(number1, [number2], ...) Standard deviation based on a sample, ignoring Statistical
logical values and text.
stdeva(value1, [value2], ...) Standard deviation based on a sample, Statistical
evaluating text and FALSE as 0, and TRUE as 1.
stdevp(number1, [number2], ...) Standard deviation based on a whole population, Statistical
ignoring logical values and text.
stdevpa(value1, [value2], ...) Standard deviation based on entire population, Statistical
evaluating text and FALSE as 0, and TRUE as 1.
steyx(dependent_values, Standard error of the predicted y-value for each Statistical
independent_values) x in a regression.
substitute(target_text, Replaces old_text with new_text within target_text. Text
old_text, new_text, Argument instance_num allows you to select
[instance_num]) which instance of old_text to replace.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
394
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

sum(value1, [value2], ...) Sum of the arguments. Only numbers are Statistical
included in this calculation.
sumif(range, condition, Sum of all values in range that satisfy condition. Statistical
[value_range]) Condition must be surrounded by quotes or
refer to a cell containing the condition text.
Values used in sum are drawn from optional
value_range if provided.
sumproduct(range1, [range2], Sum of the products of corresponding ranges. Statistical
...)
sumsq(number1, [number2], ...) Returns the sum of the squares of the Math
arguments. Arguments may be single values or
ranges of values.
sumx2my2(x_range, y_range) Sums the differences between the squares of the Math
values in x_range and y_range. x_range and
y_range must contain the same number of
values.
sumx2py2(x_range, y_range) Sum of squares of the values in x_range and Math
y_range. x_range and y_range must contain the
same number of values.
sumxmy2(x_range, y_range) Sum of the squares of the differences between Math
corresponding values in x_range and y_range.
x_range and y_range must contain the same
number of values.
switch (condition1, value1, Returns the first value for which the condition Logical
[condition2, value2], evaluates to TRUE. If all conditions are false,
...[defaultvalue]) returns the defaultvalue.
syd(initial_value, ending_value, Sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for Financial
lifetime, period) a specified period.
tan(angle) Tangent of an angle. Trigonometric
tanh(number) Hyperbolic tangent of number. Trigonometric

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
395
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

tdist(x, degrees_freedom, tails) Student's t-distribution. Probability

Distribution
text(number, format_text) Converts a value to text with a specific number Text
format.
time(hour, minute, second) Converts hours, minutes, seconds to a date-and-time Date and
code. Time
timevalue(date_text) Converts text with a time (date_text) to a number Date and
representation in date-and-time code. Time
tinv(probability, Inverse of Student's t-distribution. Probability
degrees_freedom) Distribution
today() Returns current date at midnight. Date and
Time
trim(text) Removes all spaces from text except for single Text
spaces between words.
trimmean(array, percent) Mean of the interior portion of a set of data Statistical
values as specified by the percent to exclude.
trunc(number, [digits]) Truncates a number by removing the fractional or Math
decimal part to the specified number of digits.
Returns an integer if no number of digits is
specified.
ttest(array1, array2, tails, type) Probability associated with a Student's t-Test. Probability
Used to determine whether two samples are Distribution
likely to have come from the same two
underlying populations that have the same
mean.
type(value) Returns an integer representing the type of value. Information
upper(text) Returns a copy of text, with all letters in text Text
converted to upper case.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
396
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

using as Similar to select, returns a list of values using Lookup and

the key values as the lookup values. Example: Reference
Item3=Matrix1::Item1 using Matrix1::Item2 as
Category. For more information, see “Using/
As Formulas” on page 184
value(text) Converts a text string that represents a number Text
to a number.
var(number1, [number2], ...) Variance based on a sample, ignoring logical Statistical
values and text.
vara(value1, [value2], ...) Variance based on a sample, evaluating text and Statistical
false as 0, and true as 1.
varp(number1, [number2], ...) Variance based on a whole population, ignoring Statistical
logical values and text.
varpa(value1, [value2], ...) Variance based on entire population, evaluating Statistical
text and false as 0, and true as 1.
vdb(initial_value, ending_value, Variable declining balance. Depreciation of an Financial
num_periods, start_period, asset for a specified period, including partial
end_period, [factor], periods, using the double-declining balance
[no_switch]) method or some other factor you specify.
weekday(number, [mode]) Extracts the weekday from a date-and-time Date and
code. Time
weibull(x, alpha, beta, Weibull distribution. Use this distribution in Probability
cumulative) reliability analysis, such as calculating mean time Distribution
to failure.
xirr (values, dates, [guess]) Internal rate of return for a series of cash Financial
inflows (positive values) and outflows (negative
values) that are associated with dates. These cash
flows are not necessarily periodic or of the same
value as they would be for an annuity. Enter an
optional guess at the rate or allow Quantrix to
determine the best first guess.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
397
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Table B-1. Alphabetical summary of functions

Name and Arguments Description Category

xnpv (rate, values, dates) Net present value of an investment based on a Financial
discount rate and a series of future payments
(negative values) and income (positive values) that
occur on specific dates. The first date indicates
the beginning of the payment schedule.
year(number) Extracts the year from a date-and-time code, in Date and
the range 1900 to 9999. Time
ztest(array, x, Two-tailed P-value of a z-test. The z-test Probability
[standard_deviation]) generates a standard score for x with respect to Distribution
the data set and returns the two-tailed
probability for the normal distribution.

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Appendix B: Functions
398
Alphabetical Summary of Functions

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 399

chart views 118, 234

Index

Index column headings to matrices 129

comments to components in the Model Browser 40
comments to formulas 172
A
custom objects to the presentation canvas 279
about data labels to charts 240
categories 3, 31, 43, 75, 120 existing files to Quantrix 370
cells 146 folders 40
chart grid 257 formula fields 47, 169
chart types 231 formulas 12
chart views 22, 32, 52, 228 functions to formulas 188, 376
charting table 229 graphics to the presentation canvas 290
entering data into input cells 153 headers and footers to printed pages 312
exporting models 325 item groups 99, 142
expressions 200 items 6, 45, 77, 129
filtered tables 124 items to an item group 143
financial format 225 linked categories 81, 127
folders 39 matrices 42, 81, 118
Format Toolbox 204 notes 128, 173
formatting tools 204 page breaks 265, 297, 316
formula editor 3, 46 roles 360
formulas 31, 166 row headings to matrices 129
functions 376 summary items 78, 137, 138
importing files 370 table views 118
item groups 31, 43, 75, 141 See also inserting, creating
item instances 115 aligning
items 31, 43, 75, 129 numbers 210
layout trays 44 objects on the presentation canvas 299
linked categories 125 text in items and cells 207
matrices 3, 31, 42, 75 annotating
Model Browser 15, 38 formulas by adding comments 172
model files 32, 56 matrices and views by adding comments 40
model windows 3, 34 presentations by adding text 55, 279
notes 128 assumptions matrices
permissions 363 defined 75
perspectives 50 examples of 18, 81, 89
plugins 369 attach
printing 302 Dependency Inspector 198
protection 358 Format Toolbox 205
Quantrix Viewer 320 tabs 49
roles 358 Audit Trail 367
structure 74–75, 114 auditing formulas 193
Sum Toolbar 36 auto complete
summary items 137 formulas 48
table views 32, 54 axes
tables 3, 31, 43 changing colors in 242
tabs 48 formatting 242
templates 61 moving data series to different 238
views 32 reordering data along 238
Zoom 37
accounting alignment of numbers 210 B
activating Quantrix xvi
adding background colors
categories 8, 45, 77, 120 changing for charts 241

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

400 Index

changing for items and cells 221 resizing 45

setting in presentation canvas 291 selecting 148–151
background image selecting a structural subset of 149
setting on presentation canvas 290 selecting all in a matrix or view 148
bind to selecting an arbitrary range of 151
checkboxes 285 selecting by category 149
dial gauge 286 selecting by item or item group 148
drop-down menu 283 undo and redo edits 159
radio buttons 284 cell-specific formulas, about 84, 166
slider 279 changing
status light 288 calculation order 47, 171
thermometer 287 chart depth 244
toggle switch 283 chart elevation 244
chart rotation 244
C colors of objects on the presentation canvas 291
data series color 243
calculated cells
default font 68
defined 10, 146
default template 64
highlighting 146
drawing grid size 298
identifying 146
orientation of printed pages 310
mapping to formulas 146
printing options 307
overriding values in 147
See also customizing, editing, moving, resizing
calculation matrices
chart grid
defined 75
about 257
examples of 77, 93
data item 263
calculation order
drill down 259
changing 47, 191
chart grids
precedence of mathematical operators 174
showing and hiding 242
specifying 191
chart legend
categories
hiding 239
about 3, 31, 43, 75, 120
orientation 239
and category tiles 120
showing 239
compared to item groups 144
chart views
copying 122
about 22, 32, 52, 228
creating links 127
about the charting tools 229
deleting 45, 121
closing 235
inserting 8, 45, 77, 120
copying 119
moving 45, 123
creating from canvas objects 234
notes, adding 128
deleting 119, 235
pasting 122
inserting 22, 118, 234
removing links 128
managing 234
renaming 45, 77, 121
opening 235
category tiles. See categories
pasting 119
cells
renaming 118, 235
about 146
charting tables
adding color to 221
about 229
aligning data in 207
changing the layout of 53
constrained input 156
defined 23
copying and pasting data in 161
in presentation canvas 274
deleting data from 160
charts 242
editing data in 45, 159
about chart types 231
entering data into 45, 153
adding data labels to 240
find/replace 160
changing background color of 241
moving between 152
changing font and axis colors of 242

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 401

changing fonts in 242 resizing 223

changing rotation, elevation, and depth of 244 width 223, 224
choosing a chart type 53, 236 See also items
choosing data series for 236 comments
choosing graphical enhancements 240 adding to components in the Model Browser 40
customizing 236–243 adding to formulas 172
customizing data series of 243 comparing
excluding data from 238 item groups and categories 144
expressions 201 models and spreadsheets 33
formatting with the Format Toolbox 229–255 components
including and excluding in print jobs 307 defined 38
moving 53, 293 manipulating in the Model Browser 38–41
moving data series to a different axis 238 moving tabs of 81
plotting, for 2D and 3D grid 231 renaming to improve clarity 97
plotting, for 2D and 3D scatter 233 See also matrices, chart views, table views, presenta-
reordering data along an axis 238 tion canvas
scaling 3D charts 255 connecting annotations to objects 288
showing and hiding grid 242 constant value formulas 177
specifying data locations 236 constrained formulas
tooltips 228 defined 177
variations on grid, scatter, pie, and radar 231 examples of 92, 103, 177
checkboxes, bind to 285 constrained input 156
choosing constructing formulas
colors from a palette 222 about 169
from menus in the menu bar xv, 36 examples of 84–88, 91–96, 101–104
circles copying
adding to the presentation canvas 289 categories 122
See also objects chart views 119
closing data in a cell 161
chart views 40, 235 items and item groups 131
Format Toolbox 205, 374 matrices 119
matrices 40 presentation canvas 111, 119
Model Browser 41 table views 119
models 35, 372 creating
presentation canvas 40, 270 chart views 118, 234
Quantrix 35 comma-separated values (csv) files 328
table views 40 custom number formats 214
collapsing items and item groups 90, 135 folders 39
colors HTML files 326
adding to items and cells 221 item groups 99, 142
changing for chart backgrounds 241 linked categories 81, 127
changing for fonts and axes in charts 242 matrices 42, 81, 118
changing for lines in the presentation canvas 291 Microsoft Excel (xls) files 325
changing for objects on the presentation canvas 291 model files 57
changing in a data series 243 presentation canvas 107, 269
choosing color from a palette 222 roles 360
column tray summary items 137, 138
about 44 table views 118
defined 3 templates 61
in charts 229 web pages 326
showing and hiding 44 See also adding, inserting
columns csv files 328
adding headings to 129 currency, formatting numbers as 211
printing headings 312 custom number formats

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

402 Index

creating 214 deleting

customization syntax 217 categories 45, 121
date and time syntax 216 chart views 119, 235
customer support, contacting xix data in a cell 160
customizing DataLink 354
chart data series 243 folders 41
chart fonts, colors, series 241 formulas and formula fields 47, 170
charts 236–243 headers and footers from printed pages 312
date and time number formats 216 images in header/footer 315
fonts 206 item groups 143
headers and footers on printed pages 314 items 45, 131
lines in tables 219 lines that connect objects 289
number formats 216–218 linked categories 127
the tool area 37 links between categories 128
See also changing, editing, moving, resizing matrices 119
cutting. See deleting notes 128
objects from the presentation canvas 295
D page breaks 265, 297, 316
presentation canvas 270
data
roles 362
aligning in cells 207
summary items 139
copying and pasting in cells 161
table views 119
deleting and cutting from cells 160
delimited text files
excluding from a chart 238
exporting model as 328
filtering 164
importing from 343
sorting 163
Dependency Inspector 198
See also editing, entering
depth, changing in charts 244
data labels, adding to charts 240
detach
data locations, specifying in charts 236
Dependency Inspector 198
data series
Format Toolbox 205
changing colors in 243
tabs 49
choosing for a chart 236
dial gauge, bind to 286
customizing in a chart 243
dimensions
moving to a different axis 238
defining 76
DataLink
expressing as categories 77
configuring JDBC / ODBC 333
multiple, displayed in a 2D table 115
configuring source 332
See also categories, item instances
creating datalink 330
displaying
deleting 354
Quantrix models in other applications 324
drill down 355
See also showing
SQL expert mode 337
dragging, defined xv
using 2D matrix data 346
drawing grids
using CSV 341, 343
changing grid size 298
using Microsoft Excel (xls) files 338
showing and hiding 298
using web services / SOAP 341
using on the presentation canvas 298
using XML files 339
drivers
date
adding JDBC 69
creating custom formats for 216
connecting with JDBC 332
entering into input cells 154
connecting with ODBC 333
formatting numbers as 213
drop-down menu, bind to 283
decimals
changing precision of 210
choosing separators for all models 65 E
default printing options 305 eclipse notification

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 403

and calculation order 191 expressions

reordering formulas to eliminate 194 about 200
reported in the formula editor 194 in charts 201, 239, 249
editing in headers/ footers 201, 315
data in input cells 45, 159 in the presentation canvas 201, 292
formulas in formula fields 47, 92, 170
perspectives 51 F
roles 361
fill pattern, customizing in data series 243
See also changing, customizing, moving, resizing
filter tray
elements. See structural elements
about 44, 124
elevation, changing in charts 244
defined 20
entering
in charts 24, 238
data into input cells, about 10, 44, 153
in presentation canvas 276
data into input cells, examples of 83
moving categories into 124
date and time into input cells 154
showing and hiding 44
fractions into input cells 155
filtered tables
numbers into input cells 153
about 124
percentages into input cells 84, 155
examples of 23, 106
special characters into input cells 155
printing 302
text strings into input cells 155
printing one or all variations of 311
equal sign (=)
filtering
entering as text 156
by moving categories 45, 124
entering to override a value 147, 156
examples of 20
Error icon 193
See also filter tray, filtered tables
errors
filtering data 164
in formula editor 197
financial format, about 225
naming 197
Find/Replace 160
specifying ranges 198
FIRST 180
syntax 197
folders
ESCAPE key, using to cancel edits 156
about 39
examples
adding 40
assumptions matrices 18, 81
creating 39
calculation matrices 77, 93
deleting 41
constrained formulas 92, 103
printing 306
constructing formulas 84–88, 91–96, 101–104
fonts
filtered tables 23, 106
changing colors in charts 242
formula syntax 167
changing for charts 242
intermatrix formulas 85, 87, 95
customizing 206
item groups 99–101
formatting 206
linked categories 18, 81
setting default 68
recurrence formulas 85, 87
footers
summary matrices 99
adding images to 315
excluding
adding to printed pages 312
data from a chart 238
customizing on printed pages 314
tables, charts, formulas from printed pages 307
deleting from printed pages 312
expanding
deleting images from 315
items and item groups 135
setting for multiple views 306
See also showing
format menu, about 205
exporting models
format pop-up menu, about 205
about 325
format toolbar, about 204
as comma-separated values (csv) files 328
Format Toolbox
as HTML files 111, 326
about 204
as Microsoft Excel (xls) files 325
chart options 229–255
exposing. See showing

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

404 Index

closing 205 constant value 177

fill color options 221 constrained 177
font options 206 constructing 84–88, 91–96, 101–104, 169
line options 220 deleting from formula fields 47, 170
number format options 208 eclipse notification 194
text options 206 editing in formula fields 47, 92, 170
formatting expressions 200
about the tools 204 general 84, 166
adding fill colors to items and cells 221 including and excluding in print jobs 307
aligning text in items and cells 207 index 183
axes 242 inserting formula fields 169
cells using the pop-up menu 148 inserting functions 376
charts with the Format Toolbox 229 inserting ranges 101
fonts 206 intermatrix 181
headers and footers on printed pages 314 intermodel 182
items and item groups 132 managing formula fields 169
lines 220 naming errors 197
numbers 208–218 recalculating 47, 192
numbers, currency 211 recurrence 179
numbers, date and time 213 reordering formula fields 171
numbers, fractions 213 size mismatch warning 194
numbers, in scientific notation 211 specifying ranges error 198
numbers, negative 212 specifying ranges in 172
numbers, percentages 212 standard, defined 13
numbers, precision and alignment 210 summary, defined 13
numbers, special 214 syntax errors 197
numbers, with custom formats 214 syntax tips and examples 167
presentations with the presentation toolbar 269 using In and Skip 92, 177
with the format menu 205 using mathematical operators 173
with the format pop-up menu 205 using PREV, THIS, NEXT, FIRST, LAST 179
with the format toolbar 204 fractions
with the Format Toolbox 204 entering as a fraction or decimal 155
formula editor entering into input cells 155
about 3, 46 formatting numbers as 213
auto complete 48 full screen mode 35
resizing 47 functions
showing and hiding 47 about 376
status conditions 193 adding to formulas 188, 376
using to troubleshoot 193 alphabetical summary of 377–397
formula fields inserting syntax into formulas 171, 376
deleting 170
editing 170 G
inserting 169
general formulas, about 84, 166
reordering 171
grids. See chart grids, drawing grids
formula toolbar
group
about 46
items into item groups 142
using to insert syntax and functions 171
objects on the presentation canvas 296
formulas
about 31, 166
adding comments to 172 H
adding functions to 188, 376 headers
auto complete 48 adding images to 315
cell-specific 84, 166 adding to printed pages 312
changing calculation order 171, 191 customizing on printed pages 314

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 405

deleting from printed pages 312 intermatrix formulas

deleting images from 315 combined with linked categories 86, 126, 181
setting for multiple views 306 defined 181
hiding examples of 85, 87, 95, 181
chart grids 242 intermodel formulas 182
chart legend 239 item descriptors
drawing grids 298 creating 139
formula editors 47 deleting 141
items and item groups 135 formatting 140
layout trays 44 setting value 140
Model Browser 40 viewing 140
notes 128 item groups
toolbars 37 about 31, 43, 75, 141
highlighting adding items to 143
calculated cells 14, 146 collapsing 90, 135
See also selecting compared to categories 144
HTML files, exporting models as 111, 326 copying 131
deleting 143
I examples of 99–101
expanding 135
identifying calculated and input cells 10, 146
formatting 132
importing
hiding 135
data via DataLink 330
inserting 99, 142
importing files
pasting 131
about 370
renaming 130
model, xml, imx, and modelfile 370
ungroup 143
including
item instances, about 115
tables, charts, formulas on printed pages 307
items
index formulas
about 31, 43, 75, 129
defined 183
about item instances 115
examples of 183
about summary items 137
input cells
adding color to 221
defined 10, 146
adding to an item group 143
entering data into 153
aligning text in 207
identifying 146
collapsing 90, 135
See also calculated cells, cells
copying 131
inserting
deleting 45, 131
categories 8, 45, 77, 120
expanding 135
chart views 22, 118, 234
formatting 132
formula fields 47, 169
hiding 135
function syntax into formulas 171
inserting 6, 45, 77, 129
item groups 99, 142
item descriptors 139
items 6, 45, 77, 129
moving between 152
matrices 42, 81, 118
notes 135
page breaks 316
pasting 131
presentation canvas 107, 269
renaming 45, 77, 130
ranges into formulas 101
reordering 132
summary items 12, 78, 137, 138
selecting 45
syntax into formulas 171
See also summary items
table views 118
See also adding, creating
installing K
plugins 369 keywords
Quantrix xvi in recurrence formulas 179

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

406 Index

modifying in recurrence formulas 180 Model Browser

about 38
L comments 41
drop-down menu 15, 39
LAST 180
filter 38
layout
folders 39
changing by moving category tiles 4, 79, 123
opening and closing 40
layout trays
resizing comment field in 40
about 44
showing 15
showing and hiding 44
status conditions 193
legends
toolbar 38
choosing data series to display in 236
using to delete components 40, 235, 270
formatting with the Format Toolbox 229
using to insert components 40
moving 53
using to open components 40, 235, 270
reordering 24, 53, 238
using to rename components 40, 235, 270
lines
model files
adding to the presentation canvas 289
about 32, 56
changing colors in the presentation canvas 291
choosing thousands and decimal separators 65
changing styles in the presentation canvas 291
closing 35
customizing in data series 243
creating 57
deleting from the presentation canvas 289
icon and extension 56
formatting with the Format Toolbox 220
MODELT 61
in tables, customizing 219
opening 57
linked categories
opening recently viewed 59
about 125
options for viewing recent files 62
combined with intermatrix formulas 86, 126, 181
renaming 60
creating 81, 127
saving 4, 59, 79
defined 18
setting options for all 62
deleting 127
model windows
examples of 18, 81
about 3, 34
removing link 128
closing 35
linked views. See chart views, table views
maximizing 35
linking
minimizing 35
existing categories 127
moving 35
matrices using linked categories 127
resizing 5, 35
tool area 34
M using the title bar and window frame 35
mathematical operators Modeler Role 358
calculation precedence 174 modeling matrix, matrices. See matrices
using in formulas 173 models
matrices capacity 60
about 3, 31, 42, 75 compared to spreadsheets 33
changing the layout of 123 defining goals for 72
copying 111, 119 process for planning and building 72
deleting 119 samples for test driving xix
formatting table portion as an outline 105, 226 samples that illustrate functions xix
inserting 42, 81, 118 understanding the parts 30
pasting 111, 119 moving
renaming 118 between cells and items 152
maximizing model windows 35 categories 45, 79, 123
menus charts 53, 293
choosing from using ALT key combinations 36 component tabs 48, 81
using menu bar menus 36 data series to a different axis 238
minimizing model windows 35 legends 53

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 407

model windows 35 model files 57

objects on the presentation canvas 293 presentation canvas 40, 270
Quantrix 56
N recently viewed model files 59
table views 40
naming
orientation
errors 197
changing for printed pages 310
structural elements 117
chart legend 239
negative numbers, formatting 212
other applications
NEXT 180
displaying models in 324
notes
exporting models to other file formats 325
about 128
importing images from 290
adding 128, 173
pasting models into 111, 324
category 128
outline format, applying to a table 105, 226
deleting 128, 173
overriding values in calculated cells 147
editing 128, 173
hiding 128
item 135 P
printing 310 page breaks
showing 128 adding 316
Notification icon 193 in chart grid 265
numbers in presentation canvas 297
adding thousands separators 210 moving 297
aligning 210 removing 265, 297, 316
changing precision of 210 setting 265, 297
creating custom formats for 216–218 viewing 265, 297, 316
entering into input cells 153 page setup
formatting as currency 211 about 307
formatting as date 213 headers/footers for multiple views 306
formatting as fractions 213 using to change printing options 307
formatting as negative 212 pasting
formatting as percentages 212 categories 122
formatting as time 213 chart views 119
formatting in scientific notation 211 data in a cell 161
formatting options in the Format Toolbox 208 items and item groups 131
formatting special numbers 214 matrices 111, 119
models into other applications 111, 324
O presentation canvas 111, 119
table views 119
objects
percentages
adding to presentation canvas 279
entering as a decimal or percent 155
connecting to annotations 288
entering into input cells 155
deleting from the presentation canvas 295
examples of entering 84
group and ungroup 296
formatting numbers as 212
moving 293
permissions
resizing 294
about 363
OK icon 193
edit presentation 365
online help
edit structure 364
electronic user guide xviii
interaction 366
sample models xix
perspectives
opening
about 50
chart views 40, 235
defaults for roles 360
Format Toolbox 374
editing 51
matrices 40
managing 51
Model Browser 15, 40

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

408 Index

saving 50 multiple views 306

planning models notes 310
defining goals 72 page breaks 316
identifying structural elements 76 page setup 26, 307
overview 72 Print Preview window 303
plotting scaling printed pages 311
3D grid charts 232 tables 307
3D scatter charts 233 protection
plugins 369 about 358
presentation canvas removing 366
about 269
adding custom objects to 279 Q
adding images to 290
Quantrix
adding lines, rectangles, circles to 289
activating xvi
adding objects to 279
closing 35
annotating 55, 279
installing xvi
changing object colors on 291
opening 56
changing the drawing grid size 298
setting options for all files 62
closing 270
starting 2, 57
copy/paste 111
updating automatically xvi, 66
creating 107
updating manually 66
deleting 270
Quantrix resources
deleting objects from 295
customer support, contacting xix
expressions 201, 292
electronic user guide xviii
group and ungroup objects on 296
Quantrix Tips xix
inserting 107
sample models xix
moving objects on 293
www.quantrix.com xviii
opening 270
Quantrix Viewer
renaming 270
about 320
resizing objects on 294
upgrading 322
showing and hiding the drawing grid 298
using the drawing grid on 298
presentation toolbar, about 269 R
PREV 180 radio buttons, bind to 284
previewing ranges
changing the number of previewed pages 304 errors in formulas 198
including or excluding portions to print 304 inserting into formula fields 101
Print Preview window 303 selecting 151
printing specifying in formulas 172
about 302 rank 390
adding headers and footers 312 rearranging
changing options 307 categories to change table layout 44, 123
charts 307 See also moving
choosing landscape or portrait orientation 310 recalculating formulas 47, 192
column and row headings 312 recent files
customizing headers and footers 314 opening 59
default options 305 setting options for viewing 62
deleting headers and footers 312 rectangles
excluding tables, charts, formulas 307 adding to the presentation canvas 289
expressions 201 See also objects
filtered table variations 311 recurrence formulas
filtered tables 302 defined 179
formulas 307 examples of 85, 87, 179
including tables, charts, formulas 307 keywords 179

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 409

modifying keywords 180 S

redo 159
saving
removing
as template 61
DataLink 354 model files 4, 59, 79
links between categories 128
models in different file formats 325
page breaks 265, 297, 316
perspectives 50
plugins 369 roles 359
protection 366
tabs 50
renaming
See also exporting
categories 45, 77, 121 scaling
chart views 118, 235
3D charts 255
items 45, 77
output on printed pages 311
items and item groups 130 See also resizing
matrices 118
scientific notation, formatting numbers in 211
select function 189, 391
model files 60
presentation canvas 270 Select Function dialog box
about 188, 376
roles 361
using to add functions 188, 376
table views 118
reordering
selecting
data along an axis 238 a structural subset of cells 149
formulas and formula fields 47, 171
all cells in a matrix or view 148
items 132
an arbitrary range of cells 151
legends 24, 53, 238 cells 44, 148–151
resizing
cells by category 149
cells 45
cells by item or item group 148
columns 223, 224 group headings 142
formula editors 47
items 45
model windows 5, 35
sharing
objects on the presentation canvas 294 by exporting to different file formats 325
rows 223, 224
by pasting models into other applications 324
See also scaling
linked categories 126
roles models across applications 324
about 358
showing
adding 360
chart grids 242
default perspective 360 chart legend 239
deleting 362
drawing grids 298
editing 361
formula editors 47
managing 358 layout trays 44
Model Browser 15, 40
passwords 359
renaming 361
toolbars 37
saving 359 single quotes
switching 363
using with special characters in formulas 168
rotation, changing in charts 244
using with special characters in input cells 156
row tray size mismatch warning 194
about 44
slider
about 279, 286
defined 3
in charts 229 bind to 279
showing and hiding 44
bounds 282
rows
setup 281
adding headings to 129 sorting. See also reordering
height 223, 224
sorting data 163
printing headings 312
special characters
resizing 223 ##### 156
See also items

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

410 Index

entering into input cells 155 copying 119

equal sign (=) 156 creating from canvas objects 120
ESCAPE key 156 deleting 119
using single quotes with 156, 168 formatting as an outline 226
special numbers, formatting 214 inserting 118
spreadsheets, compared to models 33 pasting 119
starting Quantrix 2, 57 renaming 118
status conditions tables
eclipse notification 194 about 3, 31, 43
errors 197 changing the layout of 123
icons 41 in presentation canvas 271
illegal range errors 198 including and excluding in print jobs 307
naming errors 197 tabs
OK, Notification, Warning, Error 193 about 48
shown in a formula editor 47, 193 attach 49
shown in the Model Browser 193 detach 49
size mismatch warning 194 moving 48
syntax errors 197 saving 50
status light, bind to 288 templates
structural elements creating 61
granularity 74 editing 57
identifying when planning a model 76 MODELT format 61
naming 117 samples xix
See also matrices, categories, items, item groups setting as default 64
structure text
about 74–75, 114 aligning 207
granularity of elements 74 entering into input cells 155
Sum Toolbar, about 36 thermometer, bind to 287
summary items THIS 180
about 137 thousands separators
collapsing 90 adding to numbers 210
deleting 139 choosing for all models 65
inserting 12, 78, 137, 138 time
type, average 137 creating custom formats for 216
type, count 137 entering into input cells 154
type, countA 137 formatting numbers as 213
type, max 137 toggle switch, bind to 283
type, min 137 tool area
type, product 137 about 34
type, sum 137 customizing 37
summary matrices toolbars
defined 75 about standard and format toolbars 37
examples of 99 about the formula toolbar 46
syntax about the presentation toolbar 269
errors 197 showing and hiding 37
for creating custom date and time formats 216 troubleshooting
for creating custom number formats 217 by checking which formula calculates a cell 198
formula examples and tips 167 by showing and hiding input cells 198
inserting into formulas 171 formulas in the formula editor 193
typographical conventions
T about xiv
choosing from menus xv
table views
for functions 377
about 32, 54
New, Note, Caution, Tip icons xiv

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

 Index 411

special fonts and characters xv Z

Z-axis
U in 3D charts 247
undo 159 virtual, in 2D grid charts 244
ungroup Zoom, about 37
item groups 143
objects on the presentation canvas 296
updating
Quantrix automatically xvi, 66
Quantrix manually 66
user guide
about xiv
electronic version xviii
User Role 358
using as 184, 396

V
Viewer Role 358
views
about 32
copying 119
deleting 119
inserting 118
pasting 119
renaming 118
Vista
activating with xvi
setting options 62

W
Warning icon 193
web pages
creating from a model 111, 326
moving categories on 326
www.quantrix.com xviii

X
X-axis
in 2D grid charts 231
in 3D grid charts 232
xls files
exporting models as 325
using as database 338
XML files
importing into Quantrix 339

Y
Y-axis
in 2D grid charts 231
in 3D grid charts 232

Quantrix Modeler User Guide

412 Index

Quantrix Modeler User Guide